Inglés 5F0012720BD (05.

15) (GT9)

5F0012720BD

­­
Leon Inglés (05.15)
Leon
MANUAL
OWNER’S
About this manual The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
For the sake of the environment

versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the tional extras for some versions, or are
protection.
time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries.
units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with
Note
until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does
tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON >> The section is continued on the follow-
range, some of the equipment and functions ing page.
that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts,
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Important warnings on a given page which are:
they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials
the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page
3. Emergencies
The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details. Audiovisual material on a given page 5. Tips
The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the WARNING
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. mation on safety. They warn you about possi- find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
ble dangers of accident or injury.
The audiovisual material only is intended to All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
alities better. It does not replace the instruc- CAUTION
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
al to obtain more comprehensive information potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
and indications. All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.15
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its correspond- You can access the information in this man- WARNING
ing supplements should be read carefully to ual using:
familiarise yourself with your vehicle. Read and always observe safety informa-
● Thematic table of contents that follows the tion concerning the passenger's front air-
Besides the regular care and maintenance of manual’s general chapter structure. bag ››› page 87, Important information
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-
● Visual table of contents that uses graphics regarding the front passenger's airbag. »
serve its value.
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
For safety reasons, always note the informa- information, which is detailed in correspond-
tion concerning accessories, modifications ing chapters.
and part replacements. ● Alphabetical index with many terms and
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board synonyms to help you find information.
documentation to the new owner, as it
should be kept with the vehicle.
Related videos

Lane Assist ››› page 200 Start-Stop ››› page 182

Storing objects ››› page 148 Light Assist ››› page 130

Tiredness detection ››› page 209 Front Assist ››› page 195

Interior lights ››› page 135 Automatic gearbox DSG ››› page 167
SEAT Drive Profile ››› page 203 Active cylinder management ACT ››› page 176

Dynamic chassis control DCC ››› page 204 Adaptive cruise control ACC ››› page 185

CUPRA driving style. ››› page 205 All-wheel drive ››› page 238

Natural gas CNG ››› page 244

 Table of Contents

Table of Contents Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
77
Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 81 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Rear lid (luggage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior view (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Panoramic sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys-
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . 89 Adjusting the head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Manual unlocking/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 145
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 91 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Towing and tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 92 Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Changing bulbs in headlight unit . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Changing front fog* light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Changing the rear light bulbs (on the side pan- Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 62 el) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Changing the rear light bulbs (on the rear
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 106 Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Cruise control system (GRA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 112 Monitoring system Front Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5
 Table of Contents

Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Tiredness detection (break recommenda- Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
tion)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Accessories and modifications to the vehi-
cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Vehicle exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Progressive steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

6
 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 67 4 ››› page 14 7 ››› page 12

2 ››› page 57 5 ››› page 62 8 ››› page 57
3 ››› page 11 6 ››› page 15

7
 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 59 4 ››› page 61 7 ››› page 60 10 ››› page 63

2 ››› page 58 5 ››› page 58 8 ››› page 153 11 ››› page 151
3 ››› page 60 6 ››› page 59 9 ››› page 64

8
 The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 14 5 ››› page 44 9 ››› page 32 13 ››› page 49 17 ››› page 61
2 ››› page 11 6 ››› page 46 10 ››› page 30 14 ››› page 28 18 ››› page 16
3 ››› page 29 7 ››› page 31 11 ››› page 51 15 ››› page 18 19 ››› page 17
4 ››› page 29 8 ››› page 35 12 ››› page 21 16 ››› page 14 20 ››› page 19

9
 The essentials

Interior view (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 29 5 ››› page 32 9 ››› page 29 13 ››› page 51 17 ››› page 17
2 ››› page 44 6 ››› page 31 10 ››› page 11 14 ››› page 49 18 ››› page 28
3 ››› page 30 7 ››› page 35 11 ››› page 14 15 ››› page 19 19 ››› page 61
4 ››› page 21 8 ››› page 46 12 ››› page 14 16 ››› page 16 20 ››› page 18

10
 The essentials

How it works
Unlocking and locking ● Locking the vehicle without activating the Unlocking and locking the driver's
anti-theft system: Press the  ››› Fig. 1 button door
for a second time for the next 2 seconds.
Doors
● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button.
● Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the 
››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-

ing switch
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. None
of the doors can be opened from the outside.
The doors can be opened from the inside by
pulling the inside door handle.
Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button.
Fig. 1
If the central locking system should fail to op-

 ››› page 117 erate, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

 ››› page 11, ››› page 12 As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked all other doors are locked. When it is
unlocked manually, only the driver door
WARNING opens. Please observe the instructions relat-
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in
ing to the anti-theft alarm system
the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and ›››  page 117.
the anti-theft security system* is enabled, as
● Unfold the vehicle key shaft
the doors and windows cannot then be
Fig. 2 See position on page 9-10 opened from the inside. Locked doors could
›››  page 118.
delay assistance in an emergency, potentially ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the putting lives at risk. in the cover on the driver door handle
key ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up-
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. wards. »
11
 The essentials

● Insert the key shaft into the lock cylinder to Manual locking of the doors with no Rear lid
unlock or lock the vehicle. lock cylinder
Special Characteristics
● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when
vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm
will not be triggered ›››  page 117.
● After the driver door is opened, you have
15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once
this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-
mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and Fig. 5
deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
Fig. 4 Locking the door manually.
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
Note cally. It is activated by using the handle on
If the central locking system should fail to
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder the boot lid.
vehicle is locked manually using the key will have to be locked separately. To change the locking / unlocking status,
shaft ›››  page 117.
A mechanical locking device (only visible press the button  or the button 1
when the door is open) is provided on the ››› page 11 on the remote control key.
front passenger door. A warning appears on the instrument panel
● Pull the cap out of the opening.
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it the rear lid is open when the car is driven
to the right as far as it will go (if the door is faster than 6 km/h*.
on the right side) or to the left (if the door is
on the left side). Opening and closing
Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opens
rior door handle once to unlock and open the automatically.
door.

12
 The essentials

● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the Manual release of the rear lid Manual release of the rear lid
handles on the interior lining and close it by 3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
pushing gently.

 ››› page 124

 ››› page 13, ››› page 13

WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-
duction on page 91.
● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of
Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to man-
accident or injury. ual release.
● The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may The rear lid can be unlocked manually from
damage the tail lights. inside in the event of an emergency.
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass ● Insert the key in the opening in the lining
could smash. Risk of injury! of the tail gate 1 and move the key in the di-
● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
rection of the arrow until the lock is released.
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing. Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to man-
● Closing the rear lid without observing and ual release.
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no The rear lid can be unlocked manually from
one is in the path of the rear lid. inside in the event of an emergency.
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
● Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the
interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! er in groove ››› Fig. 7 A.
● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave ● Insert the key into the opening and turn it
the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened in the direction of the arrow until the latch
if the key is left inside. ››› Fig. 7 B has been released.
13
 The essentials

Bonnet ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
signed for this in the bonnet. against escaping coolant and steam.
● If it is necessary to work in the engine com-

 ››› page 245 partment while the engine is running, the ro-
tating components (for example, poly-V belt,
alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltage
WARNING ignition system are an additional hazard.
● Switch the engine off, remove the key from
the ignition and apply the hand brake. If the
vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever Electric windows*
in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox,
Fig. 8 See position on page 9-10 place the selector lever in position P. Wait for
the engine to cool down.
● Keep children away from the engine com-
partment.
● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
tion on the engine compartment, as these
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system, especially when working
on the battery.
● If working inside the engine compartment,
remember that, even when the ignition is
Fig. 9 switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-
tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-
Fig. 10 See position on page 9-10
● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under jury.
the dashboard ››› Fig. 8 1 . ● Never cover the engine with additional in- ● Opening the window: Press the  button.
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
● Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catch ● Closing the window: Pull the  button.
fire!
under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 9 2 . The
● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
arrester hook under the bonnet is released. Buttons on the driver door
pansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure. 1 Window on the front left door

14
 The essentials

2 Window on the front right door ● The electric windows will work until the ig- ● Opening: Turn the switch to position
3 Window on the rear left door (only 5-door nition has been switched off and one of the ››› Fig. 11 3 .
vehicles) front doors has been opened. ● Convenience position: Turn the switch to
4 Window on the right rear door (only 5- ● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- position ››› Fig. 11 2 .
door vehicles) ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that ● Closing: Turn the switch to position
they have been disabled. ››› Fig. 11 1 .
5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons on the rear doors (only 5- ● To tilt open: Push the switch to position
door vehicles) ››› Fig. 124 . For an intermediate position,
Panoramic roof* hold down the switch until you reach the de-
sired position.
 ››› page 125
● Lowering: Pull the switch to position
››› Fig. 125 . For an intermediate position,
WARNING hold down the switch until you reach the de-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- sired position.
duction on page 91.
● Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
 ››› page 127

● Never close the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could WARNING
cause serious injury to you and third parties. Fig. 11 Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoram-
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- ic sliding sunroof can cause serious injuries.
dow. ● Only open or close the panoramic sliding
● The engine may accidentally be started and sunroof and the sun blind* when nobody is in
be out of control. the way.
● If the ignition is switched on, the electric ● The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper-
equipment could be activated with risk of in- ated for up to about ten minutes after the ig-
jury, for example, in the electric windows. nition has been switched off, provided the
● The doors can be locked using the remote driver door and the front passenger door are
control key. This could become an obstacle not opened.
for assistance in an emergency situation.
● Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle. Fig. 12

15
 The essentials

Before driving WARNING Electric adjustment of the driver's

The safe driving chapter contains important
seat*
Manually adjusting the front seats information, tips, suggestions and warnings
that you should read and observe for your
own safety and the safety of your passengers
›››  page 72.

WARNING
● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-
cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
● Be careful when adjusting the seat height.
Careless or uncontrolled adjustment can Fig. 14
cause injuries.
● The front seat backrests must not be re- A Adjusting the lumbar support: press the
clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and button according to the desired position.
the airbag system might not protect as they B Seat up/down: Press the button
should, with the subsequent danger of injury. up/down. To adjust the front of the seat
cushion, press the front of the button
up/down. To adjust the rear of the seat
Fig. 13 cushion, press the rear of the button
up/down.
1 Forward/back: pull the lever and move Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-
the seat forwards or backwards. ton forwards/backwards.
2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. C Backrest further upright/further reclined:
3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. press the button forwards/backwards.
4 Lumbar support: Press the button in the
WARNING
corresponding position.
● If the electric front seats are used negli-
5 Folding down the backrest (only 3-door
gently or without paying due attention, it can
vehicles): pull the lever and push the
cause serious injury.
backrest forward.

16
 The essentials

● The front seats can also be electrically ad- Adjusting the head restraints Adjustment of the seat belt
justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev-
er leave a child or any other person who may
need help in the vehicle.
● In the event of an emergency, electrical ad-
justment can be stopped by pressing any
control.

CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical components
of the front seats, please refrain from kneel-
ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure at
a single point to the seat cushion and back- Fig. 15
rest.
● Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both hands and push upwards to the desired
Note position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
● It may not be possible to electrically adjust pressing the 1 button on the side.
the seat if the vehicle battery is very low.
● If the engine is started while the seats are
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment  ››› page 76, ››› page 140
will stop. Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seat
WARNING belt buckle. »
● Travelling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an ac-
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
pected manoeuvres.
● The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.

17
 The essentials

Seat belt tensioners Adjusting the exterior mirrors

During a collision, the seat belts on the front
seats are retracted automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.

›››
 in Service and disposal of belt ten-
sioners on page 82

Fig. 17
 ››› page 82

To adjust the seat belt around your should- WARNING Fig. 18 See position on page 9-10
ers, adjust the height of the seats. ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may to the corresponding position:
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the cumstances. L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi-
upper part of the body. tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the install parts of the belt tensioners or seat side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belts. right) to the direction desired.
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-  Depending on the equipment fitted on
vis. matic retractor cannot be repaired. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.

 ››› page 79  Folding in mirrors.

 ››› page 81  ››› page 139

WARNING
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a
larger field of vision. However, they make ob-
jects look smaller and further away than they
18
 The essentials

really are. If you use these mirrors to esti- Adjusting the steering wheel an accident. Make sure that the steering
mate the distance to vehicles behind you wheel points towards your chest.
when changing lane, you could misjudge the
distance. Risk of accident!

Adjusting the rear view mirror (auto-

matic anti-dazzle function)*

Fig. 20

● Adjusting the position of the steering

wheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 20 1 lever down,
move the steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.

WARNING
Fig. 19
● Never adjust the position of the steering
● Switching on the automatic anti-dazzle wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
function: press the 1 ››› Fig. 19 button. The could cause an accident.
2 warning lamp lights up and, in bright ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering
light, the rear view mirror darkens. wheel position does not accidentally change
during driving. risk of accident!
● Adjusting the rear view mirror: turn it in the
direction of the arrows. ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and
firmly holding the upper part of the steering
wheel: risk of accident!
›››
 in anti-dazzle rear vision mirrors on
page 138 ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it
points towards your face, the driver airbag
will not protect you properly in the event of

19
 The essentials

Airbags ditional protection for the head and chest in

the event of a severe frontal collision ››› .
Front airbags Their special design allows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occupant
puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are protected by the airbag. After the
collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to
allow visibility.

WARNING
● The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
● The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
● It is also important not to attach any ob-
Fig. 22 Front passenger airbag located in jects such as cup holders or telephone
dash panel. mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
The front airbag for the driver is located in ● Do not attempt to modify components of
the steering wheel ››› Fig. 21 and the airbag the airbag system in any way.
Fig. 21 Driver airbag located in steering
for the front passenger is located in the dash
wheel.
panel ››› Fig. 22. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively ››› Fig. 21 ››› Fig. 22.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-

20
 The essentials

Deactivating the front passenger front Knee airbag*

airbag  ››› page 85

WARNING
● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
● Always switch off the ignition before disa-
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do
so could result in a fault in the airbag deacti-
vation system.
● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
Fig. 24 On the driver side: location of the
disable the airbag during driving.
Fig. 23 knee airbag
● If the   (airbag disabled) control lamp
To deactivate the front passenger front air- flashes, the front passenger front airbag will
not trigger in the event of an accident! Have
bag:
the system immediately checked by an Offi-
● Open the glove compartment on the front cial Service.
passenger side.
● Insert the key into the slot provided in the
deactivation switch.
● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
remains inserted (the maximum).
● Turn the key, changing its position to .
Do not force it. If you have difficulty, ensure Fig. 25 On the driver side: radius of action of
that you have inserted the key as far as it will the knee airbag.
go.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
● Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
below the dash panel ››› Fig. 24. Airbags are
strument panel where it shows  
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
   the following should appear .
The area framed in red (deployment area)
››› Fig. 25 is covered by the knee airbag when »
21
 The essentials

it is deployed. Objects should never be WARNING

placed or mounted in this area.
● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
WARNING forward, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
● The knee airbag is deployed in front of the
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
driver's knees. Always keep the deployment in an accident.
areas of the knee airbags free.
● In order for the side airbags to provide their
● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
deployment area of the knee airbag. position must always be maintained with
● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a dis- seat belts fastened while travelling.
tance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between Fig. 27 Illustration of completely inflated side
● In a side-on collision the side airbags will
your knees and the location of the this air- airbags on the left side of the vehicle.
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-
bag. If your physical constitution prevents ure the pressure increase on the interior of
you from meeting these requirements, make The side airbags are located in the backrest
the doors, due to air escaping through the
sure you contact a specialised workshop. cushions of the driver seat ››› Fig. 26 and the areas with holes or openings in the door pan-
front passenger seat as well as in the back- el.
rest of the side rear seats*. The locations are
● Never drive if the interior door panels have
Side airbags* identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper
been removed or if the panels have not been
region of the backrests. correctly fitted.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
airbag system provides additional protection in the door panels have been removed, un-
for the upper body in the event of a severe less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
side collision ››› . been closed properly.
● Always check that the openings are closed
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
or covered if loudspeakers or other equip-
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas
ment are fitted inside the door panels.
of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occu- ● Occupants of the outer seats must never
pants in a collision, the front and rear outer carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or al-
seat belts also hold the passengers in the
Fig. 26 Side airbag in driver seat. low children or other passengers to travel in
event of a side collision; this is how these air-
this position. It is also important not to at-
bags provide maximum protection. tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to

22
 The essentials

the doors. This would impair the protection Head-protection airbags* See your technical service to make this ad-
offered by the side airbags. justment.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only ● There must be no other persons, animals or
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any objects between the occupants of the outer
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. seats and the deployment space of the head-
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, protection airbags so that the head-protec-
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- tion airbag can deploy completely without re-
ster because the system may be damaged. In striction and provide the greatest possible
this case, the side airbags would not be trig- protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
gered. not been expressly approved for use in your
vehicle may not be attached to the side win-
● Under no circumstances should protective
dows
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
Fig. 28 Location of head-protection airbags. ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
unless the covers have been approved for use
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
from the side of the backrest, the use of con- The head-protection airbags are located on heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
ventional seat covers would obstruct the side both sides in the interior above the doors Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-
ers.
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- ››› Fig. 28 and are identified with the text
tiveness. “AIRBAG”. ● The airbags provide protection for just one
● Any damage to the original seat upholstery accident; replace them once they have de-
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- ployed.
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a special-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle ● Any work on the head-protection airbag
ised workshop. occupants additional protection for the head system or removal and installation of the air-
and upper body in the event of a severe side bag components for other repairs (such as re-
● The airbags provide protection for just one
collision ››› . moval of the roof lining) should only be per-
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed. formed by a specialised workshop. Other-
WARNING wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-
● Any work on the side airbag system or re-
tem operation.
moval and installation of the airbag compo- ● In order for the head-protection airbags to
● Do not attempt to modify components of
nents for other repairs (such as removal of provide their maximum protection, the pre-
the front seat) should only be performed by a scribed sitting position must always be main- the airbag system in any way.
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may tained with seat belts fastened while travel- ● The side and head airbags are managed
occur during the airbag system operation. ling. through sensors located in the interior of the
● Do not attempt to modify components of ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the airbag system in any way. be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a the side and curtain airbags neither the
screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. doors nor the door panels should be modified
in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the »
23
 The essentials

front door is damaged, the airbag system WARNING

may not work correctly. All work carried out ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
on the front door must be done in a special-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ised workshop.
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
● An inflating front passenger airbag can
Child seats strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.
Important information regarding the
● Never install a child seat facing backwards
front passenger's airbag Fig. 30 On the rear frame of the passenger
side door: airbag sticker. on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!
A sticker with important information about
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-
the passenger airbag is located on the pas-
ses, to transport a child in the front passen-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger ger seat, the front passenger front airbag
side door frame. must always be disabled ›››  page 85. If
the passenger seat has a height adjustment
›››
 in Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag on page 88
option, move it to the highest, most upright
position. If you have a fixed seat, do not in-
stall any child restraint system in this loca-

Fig. 29 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag

 ››› page 87 tion.
● For those vehicles that do not include a key
sticker. lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-
cle must be taken to a technical service.

24
 The essentials

Securing child seats with the seat belt

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: Possible installations for the child seat.

Figure ››› Fig. 31 A shows the basic child re- Seating position U: Suitable for universal restraint systems
straint system mounting using lower retain- for use in this weight group.
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- Weight Front Rear side Rear cen-
group *: Only compatible for models with adjust-
ure ››› Fig. 31 B shows the child restraint passen- seat tral seat able seat height. Place the seat in the
system mounting using the vehicle seat belt. ger seat backmost and highest position possi-
The seat belt may be used to secure univer- Group 0 U* U U ble.
sal type child seats to the vehicle seats to 10 kg
The systems include the child restraint sys-
marked with a U in the table below.
Group 0+ U* U U tem mounting with an upper retaining strap
If the front passenger seat lacks a height ad- to 13 kg (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
justment, child seats cannot be mounted is the seat.
Group I U* U U
this location. 9 to 18 kg
WARNING
Group II U* U U
● When travelling, children must be secured
15 to 25 kg
in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
Group III U* U U for age, weight and size.
22 to 36 kg ● Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
›››  page 87.
25
 The essentials

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat mounting system*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily FIX” rings are located between the rear seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-
and safely on the rear outer seats with the backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. Tether* rings are located at the rear of the below.
backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on The body weight permitted and information
backrest or in the boot).
each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-
are secured to the seat frame and, in others, bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-
they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO- universal” certification.

Vehicle Isofix positions

Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction
Rear side seats
F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
Baby carrier
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

26
 The essentials

IU: Suitable for ISOFIX universal child re- Attaching the child seat with the Attachment of the child seat with the
straint systems approved for use in this “ISOFIX system” Top Tether* retainer straps
weight group.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems for this weight
group or size class.

WARNING
● The retaining rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
● Never secure other child seats that do not
have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
retaining belts or objects to the fastening Fig. 32 ISOFIX securing rings. Fig. 33 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju- back of the rear seat.
ries to the child. You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-
● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- turer's instructions. Child seats with the Top Tether system come
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se- with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-
● Remove the protective caps of the “ISOFIX” cle anchor point, located at the back of the
curing rings.
rings by placing a finger in the hole and pull- rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
ing up ››› Fig. 32. straint.
● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to engage securely. If the child seat is equip- to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it hitting the inside of the vehicle.
to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 33. Observe
the manufacturer's instructions.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- seats
sure that it is properly anchored.
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
attachment system are available from Techni- carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
cal Services. turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
27
 The essentials

Securing the Top Tether* to the an- ● Push the lock and release it from the an- Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
chorage point choring support. ● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel
WARNING until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic
An undue installation of the safety seat will gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-
increase the risk of injury in the event of a tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,
crash. press the locking key on the selector lever
● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the and release it again.
luggage compartment. ● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
● Never secure or tie luggage or other items into the ignition and turn it at the same time
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper as the steering wheel in the direction indica-
ones (Top Tether). ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
Fig. 34 Retainer strap: correct adjustment locked.
and fitting.
Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow
Securing the retainer strap plugs reheating
● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to Ignition lock
● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2
deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer position.
strap.
● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1
● Guide the strap under the rear seat head re-
position.
straint ››› Fig. 34 (lift the head restraint where
● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat
necessary).
when the ignition is switched on
● Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 33. Starting the engine
● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
facturer's instructions.
the way down and move the gearbox lever in-
to neutral.
Releasing the retaining strap Fig. 35 See position on page 9-10
● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal
● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- and move the selector lever to the P position
er's instructions. or into N.
tion and start the engine.

28
 The essentials

● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- ● Turn the switch to the required position ● Always use your dipped beam head lights if
tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not ››› Fig. 36. it is raining or if visibility is poor.
press the accelerator.
Sym- Ignition switched Ignition is
WARNING
Start-Stop System* bol off switched on
If the headlights are set too high and not
When you stop and release the clutch pedal, Fog lights, dipped
Light off or daytime used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or
the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.  beam and side lights distracting other road users. This could result
driving light on.
The ignition remains switched on. off.
in a serious accident.
The “Coming home” Automatic control of ● Always make sure that the headlights are

 ››› page 163  and “Leaving home”

guide lights may be
dipped beam and
daytime driving
correctly adjusted.

switched on. light.

WARNING
 Side light on. Turn signal and main beam lever
● Never run the engine in confined spaces, as
the exhaust gases are poisonous. Dipped beam head- Dipped beam
 light off switched on.

 Front fog lights: move the switch to the

Lights and visibility first position, from positions ,  or .
 Rear fog light: move the switch completely
Light switch from positions ,  or .
● Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or
turn it to the  position.

Fig. 37 See position on page 9-10

 ››› page 129
More the lever to the required position:
WARNING 1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking
The side lights or daytime driving lights are light (ignition switched off).
not bright enough to illuminate the road 2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light
ahead and to ensure that other road users are
able to see you.
(ignition switched off). »
Fig. 36 See position on page 9-10
29
 The essentials

3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp  Hazard warning lights into contact with highly inflammable materi-
lit up on the instrument panel. als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This
4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is could start a fire.
pushed. Control lamp  lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

Interior lights

 ››› page 129

WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or
forgetting to deactivate them can confuse Fig. 38 See position on page 9-10
other road users. This could result in a seri-
ous accident. Switched on, for example:
● Always give warning when you are going to ● When approaching a traffic jam
change lane, overtake or when turning, acti-
vating the turn signal in good time. ● In an emergency
Fig. 39
● As soon as you have finished changing ● The vehicle has broken down
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn ● When towing or being towed Knob Function
signal off.
 Switches interior lights off.
WARNING  ››› page 133
 Switches interior lights on.
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac-
cidents and serious injury, as the main beam WARNING Switches door contact control on (central po-
may distract or dazzle other drivers. sition).
● The risk of an accident increases if your ve- The interior lights come on automatically
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw  opened or the key is removed from the igni-
the attention of other road users to your sta- tion.
tionary vehicle. The lights go off a few seconds after all the
● Due to the high temperatures that the cata- doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the
ignition is switched on.
lytic converter can reach, never park in an
area where the catalytic converter could come  Turning the reading light on and off
30
 The essentials

Ambient light: in the door panel, it changes More the lever to the required position:
colour (white or red) depending on the driv-
ing mode. Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
 ››› page 136

1  Using the control ››› Fig. 40 A adjust the

interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or  ››› page 70

 ››› page 135 the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2  Slow wipe.

Windscreen wipers and window wiper

3  Continuous wipe.

blade Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold

4  the lever down for more time to increase
the wipe frequency.

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer

function is activated by pushing the lever
5  forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
screen wipers start.

Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper

6  will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.

The rear window wash function is activa-

7  ted by pressing the lever, and the rear
Fig. 40 wiper starts simultaneously.

More the lever to the required position:

0  Windscreen wiper off.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

огромный архив документации по автомобилям Volkswagen, Skoda, Seat, Audi 31
 The essentials

Easy Connect
CAR menu settings (Setup)

Fig. 41 See position on page 9-10 Fig. 42 See position on page 9-10

To select the settings menus, press the Easy ● Press the system's MENU button and then When the function button check box is activa-
Connect  button and the Setup function the system's  ››› Fig. 41 button or  but- ted , the function is active.
button. ton to go to the CAR menu ››› Fig. 42.
Any changes made using the settings menus
The actual number of menus available and ● Press the function button Setup to open the are automatically saved on closing the
the name of the various options will depend menu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 42. BACK menus.
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. ● To select a function in the menu, press the
desired button.
● Switch the ignition on.
● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it When you press the menu button, the last se-
on. lected menu will always be displayed.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 178
Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 257
Tyres
Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 261
32
 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Activation/deactivation: Gear programme, temporary distance from the vehicle in front (dis-
ACC (adaptive cruise control) ››› page 185
tance level)

Front Assist (monitoring sys-

tem)
Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, pre-warning, distance warning display ››› page 195

City emergency braking func-

tion
Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. ››› page 199
Driver assistance
Lane Assist (system warning
you if you leave the lane)
Activation/deactivation: Lane Assists, Lane Centring Assist ››› page 200

The following functions can be activated and deactivated:

Detection of traffic signs – Display of traffic signs on the multi-function display ››› page 207
– Trailer detection (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer)

Tiredness detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 209

Parking and ma- Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings,
noeuvring
ParkPilot
adjust volume
››› page 210

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and control lighting, ambient door lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 135
Coming home/Leaving home ››› page 131
Vehicle lights Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function
function ››› page 132
Motorway light Activation/deactivation ››› page 133
››› page 18,
Rear vision mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking
Mirrors/wind‐ ››› page 139
screen wipers
Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 31

Opening and clos-

Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 126
ing
Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 117 »

33
 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience equipment,
Multifunction ECOAdvice, journey duration, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed,
– ››› page 35
display speeding warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore
data “total calculation”

Time source, set the time, automatic summer time setting, select time zone, time format, set
Date and time – –
the date, date format

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 42
All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir-
Factory settings – –
rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display

 ››› page 112

WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect
system while driving could distract you from
traffic.

34
 The essentials

Driver information system ■ MFD from departure Using the menus on the instrument
■ MFD from refuelling panel
Introduction ■ MFD total calculation

With the ignition switched on, it is possible Assist systems ››› table on page 36
to read the different functions of the display ■ Activate/deactivate Lane Assist
by scrolling through the menus. ■ Reverse (optional)

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons. Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-
tion system
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve- Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-
hicle electronics and equipment. let Navigation system
Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
A specialised workshop will be able to pro- Vehicle ››› table on page 36 tons.
gramme or modify additional functions, ac-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- WARNING
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury.
Some menu options can only be read when
● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
the vehicle is at a standstill.
trols when driving.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus. Some
warning messages can be confirmed and
made to disappear with the windscreen wiper
lever button or the multifunction steering
wheel button. Fig. 44 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: control buttons.
The information system also provides the fol-
lowing information and displays (depending The driver information system is controlled
on the vehicle's equipment): with the multifunction steering wheel buttons
Driving data ››› page 39
››› Fig. 44 or with the windscreen wiper lever
››› Fig. 43 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
■ Vehicle status
multifunction steering wheel). »
35
 The essentials

Enabling the main menu Making changes according to the menu in the Assist systems menu
● Switch the ignition on. ● With the rocker switch on the windscreen ›››  page 178.
● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-
function steering wheel, make the desired Activate or deactivate a driver assistance
press button ››› Fig. 43 1 on the windscreen system
wiper lever or button  on the multifunction changes. To increase or decrease the values
steering wheel ››› Fig. 44. more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 45 in the di-
● Mark or confirm the selection with button rection of the arrow to open the menu As-
● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-
››› Fig. 43 1on the windscreen wiper lever sist systems.
er: to display the main screen ››› page 36 or
to return to the main menu from another or button  on the multifunction steering ● Select the driver assistance system and ac-
menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 43 wheel ››› Fig. 44. tivate or deactivate it ››› page 35. A mark indi-
2 . cates that driver assistance system is switch-
ed on.
● If managed from the multifunction steering
wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. Button for the driving assistance sys-
To go from point to point in the main menu, tems*
press button   or   several times Menu
››› Fig. 44.
Menu Function
Select a submenu
Information and possible configurations
Driving
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 43 2 on the of the multifunction display (MFD)
data
windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn ››› page 39, ››› page 112.
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Information and possible configurations
wheel ››› Fig. 44 until the desired option ap- Assist
of the driver assistance systems
systems
pears marked on the menu. ››› page 112.
● The selected option is displayed between
Information instructions from the activa-
two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is Fig. 45 On the turn signal and main beam ted navigation system: when a route guid-
displayed on the right:  headlight lever: button for the driving assis- ance is activated, the turning arrows and
● To consult the submenu option, press but- tance systems proximity bars are displayed. The appear-
Naviga- ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys-
ton ››› Fig. 43 1 on the windscreen wiper tion tem.
lever or button  on the multifunction steer- With the turn signal and main beam head- If route guidance is not activated, the di-
ing wheel ››› Fig. 44. light lever button, you can activate or deacti- rection of travel (compass) and the name
vate the driver assistance systems displayed of the street along which you are driving
are shown ››› Booklet Navigation system.

36
 The essentials

outside temperature as a result of the heat ●  Change to a higher gear: the suggested
Menu Function
produced by the engine. gear appears to the right of the current gear
Station display on the radio. when a higher gear is recommended.
Track name on the CD. The temperatures measured range from
Audio -40 °C to +50 °C (-40 °F to +122 °F). ●  Change to a lower gear: the suggested
Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra-
dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system. gear appears to the left of the current gear
when a lower gear is recommended.
Information and possible configurations
Tele- of the mobile phone preinstallation Gear-change indicator The gear recommendation may occasionally
phone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation skip a gear (2nd  4th).
system.

In a racing circuit, measurement and Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*

Lap tim- memorisation of lap times by the vehicle
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode
er and comparison with previously measured
best times ››› page 41. ›››  page 169.
Display of the current warning or informa-
The following display symbols mean:
Vehicle tion texts and other system components,
●  Shifting up a gear
status depending on the equipment
››› page 112. ●  Shifting down a gear

Fig. 46 Instrument panel: gear-change indica- CAUTION

Outside temperature display tor (manual gearbox). The gear-change indicator is intended to help
save fuel, but it is not intended to recom-
A gear change will be recommended if the mend the right gear for all driving situations.
When the outside temperature is below +4 °C gear you are in is not the most economical In certain situations, only the driver can
(+39 °F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it choose the correct gear (for instance when
risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this means that you are already in the most eco- overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or
symbol flashes and then it remains lit until nomical gear. towing a trailer).
the outside temperature rises above +6 °C
(+43 °F) ››› in Indications on the display on Vehicles with a manual gearbox
page 108. Note
The following display symbols ››› Fig. 46 The display disappears from the instrument
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when mean: panel when you press the clutch pedal.
travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be higher than the true

37
 The essentials

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open Illustra- Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
Key to ››› Fig. 47
tion
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
 Do not continue driving! warnings.
A The bonnet is open or is not properly A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct
closed ››› page 245. levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in On the
instrument panel on page 47
 Do not continue driving! Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-
B The rear lid is open or is not properly sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
closed ››› page 124.

 Do not continue driving! Informative text

C, D A vehicle door is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 117. Information relating to different vehicle processes.

Warning and information messages Submenu Assist systems

The system runs a check on certain compo- Assist

nents and functions when the ignition is sys-
Function
switched on and while the vehicle is moving. tems
Faults in the operation are displayed on the menu
screen using red and yellow symbols and
messages on the instrument panel display Display of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC
››› page 185.
Fig. 47 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: (›››  page 110) and, in some cases, with
front left door open; D: rear right door open audible warnings. The display may vary ac- Front Switching the monitoring system on and
(5-door vehicles only). cording to the type of instrument panel fitted. Assist off ››› page 195.

When the ignition is switched on or when Lane Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
Priority 1 warning (red symbols) Assist* ››› page 202.
driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are
open will be indicated on the instrument pan- Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible Detec-
el display, and, as applicable, this will be in- warnings. tion of
 Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in On the in- Display of traffic signs ››› page 207:
dicated audibly. The display may vary accord- traffic
strument panel on page 47! signs
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted. Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-
ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

38
 The essentials

Assist can read which memory is currently dis- Erasing a memory manually
sys- played. ● Select the memory that you wish to erase.
Function
tems ● Hold the  button of the multifunction
menu ● Toggle between memories with the ignition
steering wheel or the  button of the multi-
on and the memory displayed: Press the
Tired- function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec-
 button on the windscreen wiper lever
ness Switching the tiredness detection on or off onds.
or the  button of the multifunction steering
detec- (pause recommendation) ››› page 209.
tion* wheel.
Personalising the displays
Menu Function In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
which of the possible displays of the MFD can
Display and storage of the values for
Journey data the journey and the consumption from
be shown on the instrument panel display
with the button  and the function button
when the ignition is switched on to
Setup ›››  page 112.
Memory when it is switched off.
If the journey is continued in less than
MFD from
The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- 2 hours after the ignition is switched
departure
off, the new data is added to the data Data summary
ent values for the journey and the consump- already stored in the memory. The
tion. memory will automatically be deleted if
the journey is interrupted for more than Menu Function
Changing between display modes on the 2 hours.
MFD The current fuel consumption dis-
Display and storage of the values for
play operates throughout the jour-
● In vehicles without multifunction steering MFD from the journey and the consumption. By Current fuel
ney, in litres/100 km; and with the
wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the refuelling refuelling, the memory will be erased consumption
engine running and the vehicle
windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 43. automatically.
stopped, in litres/hour.
● Vehicles with a multifunction steering The memory records the values for a
After turning on the ignition, aver-
wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 44. specific number of partial trips, up to a
age fuel consumption in li-
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99
tres/100 km will be displayed after
MFD total hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or
Multifunction display memory travelling about 100 metres. Other-
calcula- 9999 km, depending on the model of Average fuel
wise horizontal lines are displayed.
The multifunction display is equipped with tion instrument panel. On reaching either of consumptiona)
The value shown is updated approxi-
these limitsa), the memory is automati-
three memories that work automatically: MFD mately every 5 seconds.
cally erased and starts to count from 0
from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD ACT®*: Depending on the equip-
total calculation. On the screen display, you
again.
ment, number of active cylinders. »
a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.
39
 The essentials

Menu Function Menu Function The speed is stored and the warning activa-
ted.
Approximate distance in km that can Speed warn- If the stored speed is exceeded (be- ● To switch system off: press the but-
still be travelled with the fuel re- ing at --- tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -
Operating maining in the tank, assuming the km/h or Speed 155 mph), an audible warning is ton  or  . The stored speed is de-
rangea) same style of driving is maintained. warning at given together with a visual warn- leted.
This is calculated using the current --- mph ing.
fuel consumption.
Detection of
This indicates the hours (h) and mi- traffic
The traffic signs detected are dis- Engine oil temperature display
Journey du- played.
nutes (min) since the ignition was signs
ration
switched on. Vehicles without multifunction steering
Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature dig- wheel
Distance Distance covered in km (m) after ture ital display
covered switching on the ignition. ● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 43 2 until
Coolant tem- the main menu appears. Enter into Journey
Digital display of the current temper-
Whenever you refuel the quality of perature
data. With the button 2 move to the oil
ature of the liquid coolant.
the natural gas is automatically veri- gauge
fied and is displayed when the igni-
temperature gauge.
a) In vehicles with a natural gas engine, range and average con-
tion is switched on. The display is
CNG quality sumption refer only to data or natural gas consumption. If you
made in a percentage of between Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
70% and 100%. The greater the per- are in “petrol mode”, the information of both data only appears
on the dash panel and not on the multifunction screen. ● Enter the submenu Journey data and
centage displayed the lower the con-
sumption may be. turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-
Storing a speed with the speed warning ture display appears.
The average speed will be shown af-
● Select the display Speed warning at
ter a distance of about 100 metres The engine reaches its operating temperature
Average has been travelled. Otherwise hori- --- km/h (--- mph) when in normal driving conditions, the oil
speed zontal lines are displayed. The value ● Press the button  on the windscreen temperature is between 80°C (180 °F)
shown is updated approximately ev-
ery 5 seconds.
wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc- and 120°C (250 °F). If the engine is re-
tion steering wheel to store the current speed quired to work hard and the outside tempera-
Digital dis-
Current speed displayed in digital and activate the warning. ture is high, the engine oil temperature can
play of increase. This does not present any problem
format. ● To switch system on: adjust to the desired
speed
speed within 5 seconds using the rocker as long as the warning lamps  ››› table on
switch  on the windscreen wiper lever or page 48 or  ››› table on page 48 do not
by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- appear on the display.
tion steering wheel. Next, press the button
 or  again or wait several seconds.

40
 The essentials

Additional electrical appliances Note Menu “Stop”

● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
The timer starts.
ter you switch the ignition on again.
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 43 2 until the If there are existing laps and they are in-
main menu appears. Enter into the section ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa- cluded in the statistics, it will begin with
tions, but rather with a large separation of Start the number of laps in question.
Journey data. With the rocker switch, It is only possible to begin with a new first
move to the display Convenience appli- time.
lap if the statistics have been reset first in
ances. the Statistics menu.

● Operation with the multi-function steering The timer begins when the vehicle sets
Timer* Since off.
wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to
start If the vehicle is already moving, the timer
Journey data and enter with OK. Turn the You can access the timer via the selection begins once the vehicle has stopped.
thumbwheel to the right until the Conven- menu ››› page 36.
ience appliances display appears. Statis- The Statistics menu is displayed on
It allows you to manually time lap times on a tics the screen.
In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- racing circuit, memorise them and compare
rent sum of all the additional appliances. them to the vehicle's previous best times.
Menu “Lap”
The following menus can be displayed:
The timer of the current lap stops and a
Saving tips ● Stop new lap starts immediately. The time for
New lap
the lap you have just completed is inclu-
● Lap ded in the statistics.
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in
● Pause
conditions that increase fuel consumption. Partial For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-
Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- ● Partial time time played. The timer continues in parallel.
cations appear automatically only with the ef- ● Statistics The current lap timer will be interrupted.
ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will Stop The lap does not end. The Pause menu is
disappear automatically. Change from one menu to another displayed.
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately ● Vehicles without multifunction steering
after it appears, press any button on the wheel: press the rocker switch  in the Menu “Pause”
windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- windscreen wiper lever. Continue The interrupted timer continues.
ing wheel*. ● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
A new timer starts. The halted lap ends
press  or  . New lap
»
and is included in the statistics.

41
 The essentials

Menu “Pause” Menu “Long-term statistics” Setting speed limit warning

You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to
The timer of the current lap ends and is Reset-
Interr. All the memorised statistical data are re- set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
cancelled. It is not included in the statis- ting to
lap set.
tics. zero
● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP
The current timer ends. The lap is inclu- > control button  Driver Assistant >
End WARNING
ded in the statistics. Speed warning.
Do your best to avoid handling the timer ● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but-
Menu “Partial time” while driving. ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >
● Only set the timer or consult statistics Driver assistant > Speed warning.
Partial For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-
when the vehicle is stationary.
time played. The timer continues in parallel. The warning limit can be set from 30 to
● While driving, do not handle the timer in
The timer of the current lap stops and a complicated driving situations. 240 km/h (20 to 150 mph). The adjustment
new lap starts immediately. The time for is done in 10 km/h (mph) intervals.
New lap
the lap you have just completed is inclu-
ded in the statistics. Note
Speed warning device
The current lap timer will be interrupted. ● Please bear in mind that, even with the
Stop The lap does not end. The Pause menu is speed warning function, it is still important
The speed warning device warns the driver
displayed. to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the
when they have exceeded the pre-set speed
speedometer and to observe the legal speed
limit by 3 km/h. An audible warning is given
Menu “Long-term statistics” limits.
and the lamp  can be seen simultaneously
● The speed limit warning function in the ver-
View of the latest lap times: on the instrument panel, as well as a mes-
sion for several countries warns you at a
– total time sage for the driver: speed warning ex-
speed of 120 km/h (80 mph). This is a facto-
– best lap time ceeded! The warning lamp  switches off
– worst lap time
ry-set speed limit.
when reducing speed below the stored maxi-
– average lap duration mum limit.
A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and a
total duration of 99 hours, 59 minutes Speed warning programming is recommen- Service intervals
and 59 seconds. ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-
If one of the 2 limits is reached, you will mum speed, such as when travelling in a
have to reset the statistics in order to be- The service interval indication appears on the
gin a new timer.
country with different speed limits or for a instrument panel display ›››  Fig. 124 4 .
maximum speed for winter tyres.
Back This returns to the previous menu. SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
42
 The essentials

services without engine oil change (e.g. In- The kilometres indicated are the maximum Vehicles with text messages: the following
spection). number of kilometres that can be travelled message is displayed: Service --- km
until the next service. After a few seconds, (miles) or --- days ago.
In vehicles with Services established by time
the display mode changes. A clock symbol
or mileage, the service intervals are already The time can also be set via the  key and
appears and the number of days until the
pre-defined. Setup function button in the Easy Connect
next service is due.
system ›››  page 112.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
Vehicles with text messages: Service in
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
--- km or --- days will be shown on the Resetting service interval display
technological progress, maintenance work
instrument panel display.
has been greatly reduced. Because of the If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
technology used by SEAT, with this service dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
Service due lows:
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this change When the service date is due, an audible
warning is given when the ignition is switch- ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of
use and individual driving styles are consid- ed on and the spanner displayed on the ton ›››  Fig. 124 4 .
ered. The pre-warning first appears 20 days screen flashes for a few seconds. ● Switch ignition back on.
before the date established for the corre- ● Release THE 4 ›››  Fig. 124 button and
Vehicles with text messages: Service now
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- press it again for the next 20 seconds.
will be shown on the instrument panel dis-
maining until the next service are always
play.
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) Note
and the time is given in complete days. The
Reading a service notification ● The service message disappears after a few
current service message cannot be viewed
With the ignition switched on, the engine off seconds, when the engine is started or when
until 500 km after the last service. Prior to OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper
this, only lines are visible on the display. and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
lever, or OK on the multifunction steering
service notification can be read:
wheel.
Inspection reminder Press and hold the button ›››  Fig. 124 4 ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in
When the Service date is approaching, when for more than 5 seconds to consult the serv- which the battery has been disconnected for
the ignition is switched on a Service remind- ice message. a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
er is displayed. culate the date of the next service. Therefore
When the service date has passed, a minus
the service interval display may not be cor-
Vehicles without text messages: a span- sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
ner  will be displayed on the instrument ometres or days. service intervals permitted in the ››› Book-
panel plus an indication in km. let Maintenance Programme. »

43
 The essentials

● If you reset the display manually, the next speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced
service interval will be indicated as in vehi- until reaching the new stored speed.
cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea- ● Switching off the CCS: Move switch
son we recommend that the service interval ››› Fig. 48
1 to . The system is disconnec-
display be reset by a SEAT authorised service. ted and the memorised speed is deleted.

Operation using the third lever

Cruise control ● Switching on the CCS: move the third lever
to  ››› Fig. 49. The system switches on but it
Operating the cruise control system does not control the speed as no speed has
Fig. 49 See position on page 9-10 been programmed.
(CCS)*
Operation of the turn signal lever ● Activating the CCS: press the  ››› Fig. 49
button. It memorises and maintains the cur-
● Switching on the CCS: Move switch
rent speed.
››› Fig. 48 1to . The system is on. If no
● Temporarily switching off the CCS: move
speed has been programmed, the system will
not control it. the lever to  ››› Fig. 49 and release it or
press the brake pedal. The cruise control sys-
● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 48
tem is switched off temporarily.
2 in the  area. The current speed is
● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to
memorised and controlled.
 ››› Fig. 49 and release it. The memo-
● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move
rised speed is saved and controlled again.
switch ››› Fig. 48 1 to  or push the
● Switching off the CCS: move the third lever
Fig. 48 See position on page 9-10 brake. The cruise control system is switched
off temporarily. to position ››› Fig. 49 to . The system is dis-
connected and the memorised speed is de-
● Reactivating the CCS: Press button
leted.
››› Fig. 482 in . The memorised speed
is saved and controlled again.
● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac-
 ››› page 184

celerates until the new stored speed.

● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button 2 in  to lower the
44
 The essentials

WARNING ● Never use the CCS when driving off-road or ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
on unpaved roads. too high for the prevailing road, traffic or
Use of the cruise control could cause acci-
● Always adapt your speed and the distance weather conditions.
dents and severe injuries if it is not possible
to drive at a constant speed maintaining the to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, ● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot
safety distance. weather conditions, the condition of the road maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends
● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-
and the traffic situation. to accelerate under its own weight. Select a
● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the
fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is
control system, turn it off every time you fin- vehicle.
insufficient, on steep roads, with several
bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ish using it.
ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

45
 The essentials

Warning lamps
On the instrument panel

Fig. 50 See position on page 9-10

Red warning lamps Lit up or flashing: Yellow warning lamps

››› page
Central warning lamp: additional   Do not continue driving!
237 Central warning lamp: additional
Fault in the steering.
 information on the instrument pan- –  information on the instrument pan- –
el display Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page el display
 tened seat belt. 78
 Parking brake on. ››› page
 Do not continue driving!
165  Use the foot brake!
››› page
 The brake fluid level is too low or
180
there is a fault in the brake system.
46
 The essentials

Other warning lamps

 Front brake pads worn. contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry
grass, fuel).
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- Left or right turn signal.
››› page
129 ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
connection caused by the system.
 ››› page  dent for the driver and for other road users. If
flashes: ESC or ASR activated. 178
››› page necessary, switch on the hazard warning
Hazard warning lights on.
133 lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-
 ASR manually deactivated.
››› page vise other drivers.
 Trailer turn signals
219 ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
 ABS faulty or does not work.
engine and allow it to cool.
it lights up: Press the foot brake!
››› page ››› page ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a
 Rear fog light switched on.
129  flashes: the selector lever locking
167
button has not engaged. hazardous area and could cause severe inju-
lights up or flashes: fault in the ries ›››  page 245.
 emission control system.
– it lights up: cruise control activated
or speed limiter switched on and
active. ››› page CAUTION
it lights up: pre-ignition of diesel  184
engine. ››› page Failure to heed the control lamps and text
flashes: the speed set by the
 111 speed limiter has been exceeded. messages when they appear may result in
flashes: fault in the diesel engine
management. faults in the vehicle.
Lane Assist is switched on and ac- ››› page
fault in the petrol engine manage- ››› page
 tive. 200
 ment. 111
››› page
lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page
 Main beam on or flasher on.
129
 steering system. 237
WARNING
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in
››› page
 the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
257
If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-
tem. ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may
cause accidents and severe injuries.
››› page
 Fuel tank almost empty.
106 ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page
 belt tensioners. 83
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-
Lane Assist is switched on, but not ››› page sure that there are no highly flammable ma-
 active. 200 terials under the vehicle that could come into

47
 The essentials

On the instrument panel display  Do not continue driving! Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book-
Engine oil pressure too low. If  via Bluetooth to the original tele- let Radio
the warning lamp flashes, stop ››› page phone device. or
 driving, even if the oil level is 246 ››› Book-
correct. Do not even run the en- Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi-
gine at idle speed!  meter. Available only for devices gation
pre-installed in factory. system
››› page
 Fault in the battery.
251 Freezing warning. The outside
››› page
Driving light totally or partially ››› page
 temperature is lower than +4 °C
37
(+39 °F).
faulty. 95
  Start-Stop system activated.
››› page
Fault in the cornering light sys- ››› page
tem. 129 182
 Start-Stop system unavailable.
››› page ››› page
 Diesel particulate filter blocked
175  Low consumption driving status
36
Level of windscreen washer fluid ››› page
 ›››
Fig. 51 See position on page 9-10
too low.

Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-

136
 in On the instrument panel on
page 47

tection. Control manually. ››› page

››› page  246
 Do not continue driving! 117 Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.
With the corresponding indica- ››› page On the instrument panel
 tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet 124 ››› page
open or not properly closed. ››› page  Fault in the gearbox.
174
245
››› page
Ignition:  Do not carry on driv-  Light Assist on.
130
ing! Engine coolant level too low,
 coolant temperature too high ››› page  Immobiliser active.
249
Flashing: Fault in the engine ››› page
coolant system.
 Service interval display
42

Fig. 52 See position on page 9-10

48
 The essentials

Front passenger front airbag is ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot Automatic gearbox*
››› page right down.
  disabled (  
83
 ). ● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
The front passenger front airbag ››› page
  is activated (   83 ● Release the clutch.
 ).
Selecting reverse gear
›››
 in On the instrument panel on
page 47
● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.

 ››› page 110 ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it

upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go
and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 53 Fig. 54
R .
● Release the clutch. P Parking lock
Gearbox lever R Reverse gear
Manual gearbox  ››› page 166 N Neutral (idling)
D/S Drive (forward)
WARNING +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to
When the engine is running, the vehicle will go down a gear.
start to move as soon as a gear is engaged
and the clutch released. This is also the case
›››
with the electro-mechanical parking brake
switched on.
 in Selector lever positions on
page 168

● Never engage reverse gear when the vehi-

cle is moving.  ››› page 167

Fig. 53 WARNING  ››› page 50 »

If the gear is changed down inappropriately
The position of the gears is indicated on the by selecting a gear that is too low, you may
gearbox lever ››› Fig. 53. lose control of the vehicle, causing an acci-
dent and serious injuries.
49
 The essentials

WARNING Should the power supply be interrupted, If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-
there is a manual unlocking device located charged battery) and the vehicle has to be
● Take care not to accidentally press the ac-
under the console of the selector lever, on pushed or towed, the selector lever must first
celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
the right. Releasing the selector lever re- be moved to position N, after operating the
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
quires a certain degree of practical skill. manual release mechanism.
mediately (in some cases even if the parking
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an ● Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver
accident. WARNING
blade.
● Never move the selector lever to R or P The selector lever may be moved out of posi-
when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap-
Removing the cover from the selector lever
tion could result in an accident. plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-
● Apply the handbrake  ››› to ensure that cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-
the car does not move. cle could otherwise start to move inadver-
● Carefully pull the corners of the selector tently after shifting the selector lever out of
Manual release of the selector lever position P - accident risk!
lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-
er handle.

Releasing the selector lever

● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-
low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 55.
● Now press the interlock button on the se-
lector lever A and move the selector lever to
position N.
● After carrying out the manual release, at-
tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox
Fig. 55 Selector lever: manual release from
console again.
position P.

50
 The essentials

Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 56 See position on page 9-10

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1
The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature
Temperature

2
The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.
Fan

3
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .
Air distribution

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides. »

51
 The essentials

 The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-
Defrost function screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3 °C (+38 °F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

 Air distribution towards the footwell.

 Upward air distribution.

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 Seat heating buttons

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri-
  bution adjusts automatically to the position .

When the warning light for button  lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper-
 ature control on the passenger side

 Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up .

 Press the configuration button : the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off Turn the blower control to the  position or press the  button.

›››
 in Important information regarding
air-conditioning on page 55

 ››› page 159

52
 The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* work?

Fig. 57 See position on page 9-10

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature
Temperature

2 Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off

Fan Level 6: maximum fan level.

3
Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Air distribution

 The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the
Defrost function windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

 Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area. »

53
 The essentials

 Air distribution towards the footwell.

 Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 Seat heating buttons

Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the
  position 

›››
 in Important information regarding
air-conditioning on page 55

 ››› page 159

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 58 See position on page 9-10

54
 The essentials

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool
Temperature or dehumidify the air

2 Setting 0: blower, heating and fresh air systems switched off

Fan Level 6: maximum fan level

3
Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Air distribution

 The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Defrost function

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

 Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.

 Air distribution towards the footwell.

 Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes

 Air recirculation ››› page 162

 Seat heating buttons

››› Important information regarding air- ● Always ensure that all windows are free of
 in Important information regarding
air-conditioning on page 55 conditioning ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,
so as to maintain good visibility of everything
 ››› page 159 WARNING outside.
● The maximum heat output required to de-
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
creases the risk of serious accidents.
available when the engine has reached its »
55
 The essentials

normal running temperature. Only drive when

you have good visibility.
● Always ensure that you use the heating
system, fresh air system, air conditioner and
the heated rear window to maintain good visi-
bility to the outside.
● Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over very
quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
not required.

WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-
duce driver concentration possibly resulting
in a serious accident.
● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be
refreshed.

56
 The essentials

Level control Fuel

 ››› in Filling up on page 240

Filling capacities
 ››› page 240

Tank level
WARNING
50 l, of which, approx. 7 l reserve
Petrol and diesel Vehicles with all-wheel-drive: Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-
engines 55 l, of which, approx. 8.5 l re- ous burns and other injuries.
serve
● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a
Natural gas en- canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the
approx. 15 kg
ginea) vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
a)
Fig. 59
The capacity depends on the efficacy and characteristics of
the natural gas pumps. The capacity indicated is based on a
minimum loading pressure of 200 bar. The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container locking.
Versions without
headlight washer approx. 3 litres Opening the fuel tank cap
system
● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
Versions with left side.
headlight washer approx. 5 litres ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
system
● Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap ››› Fig. 59.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
● Close the lid.

57
 The essentials

Oil ● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level Engine oil additives
in that zone. No type of additive should be mixed with the
● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Topping up engine oil
● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.
● Add oil slowly.
 ››› page 246

● At the same time, check the level to ensure WARNING

you do not add too much.
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , have the specialist knowledge required!
unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
Fig. 60
serve the warnings ›››  page 245.
Oil properties
● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
Engine type Specification may cause burn injuries.
● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such
Petrol without flexible VW 502 00/VW 504 00
as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
service interval
● When removing the oil drain plug with your
Petrol with flexible serv- VW 504 00 fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-
ice interval (LongLife) vent oil from running down your arm.
Diesel. Engines without VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
Particulate filter (DPF) 507 00 contact with engine oil.
● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
Diesel. Particulate Filter VW 507 00
Fig. 61
Engines (DPF). stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-
With or without flexible dren.
The level is measured using the dipstick loca- service interval (with
ted in the engine compartment and without LongLife)a)
CAUTION
›››  page 245.
Natural gas engines VW 502 00 No additives should be used with engine oil.
The oil should leave a mark between zones This could result in engine damage. Any dam-
a)Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
A and C . It should never exceed zone A . age caused by the use of such additives
engine.
would not be covered by the factory warranty.
● Zone A : Do not add oil.

58
 The essentials

Coolant If for weather reasons further protection is Brake fluid

necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G
13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-
corrosion protection ››› in Topping up cool-
ant on page 249. The mixture of G 13 with G
12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11
Fig. 62 (green-blue) engine coolants will significant- Fig. 63
ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and
The coolant tank is located in the engine should therefore be avoided ››› in Topping The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
compartment ›››  page 245. up coolant on page 249. gine compartment ›››  page 245.
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant The level should be between the  and 
when the level is below .
 ››› page 249 marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-
cal Service.
Coolant specifications
WARNING
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-  ››› page 250

water and at least 40 % of the additive G 13 ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the rious damage. WARNING
necessary frost protection down to -25 °C ● Please make sure that the percentage of ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
(-13 °F) and protects the light alloy parts of additive is correct with respect to the lowest original container in a safe place out of reach
the engine cooling system against corrosion. expected ambient temperature in the zone in of children. Risk of poisoning!
It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- which the vehicle is to be used.
● If the brake fluid is left in the system for
ses the boiling point of the coolant. ● When the outside temperature is very low, too long and the brakes are subjected to
the coolant could freeze and the vehicle heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the
To protect the cooling system, the percentage would be immobilised. In this case, the heat- brake system. This would seriously affect the
of additive must always be at least 40 %, ing would not work either and inadequately efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- dressed passengers could die of cold. vehicle. This may cause an accident.
tection is not required.
59
 The essentials

Windscreen washer warmed the windscreen with the ventilation – 2. When the repair is finished, reconnect
system. The antifreeze could freeze on the the negative pole of the battery.
windscreen and reduce visibility. ● Switch off all electrical devices before re-
connecting the battery. Reconnect first the
WARNING positive cable and then the negative cable.
Never reverse the polarity of the connections.
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other This could cause an electrical fire.
similar additives with the windscreen washer
● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-
water. A greasy layer may be formed on the
windscreen which will impair visibility. ted to the battery.
● Never use damaged batteries. This could
● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec-
ommended by SEAT. cause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat-
tery immediately.
● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
Fig. 64
the water in the reservoir.
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
the engine compartment ›››  page 245.
To top up, mix water with a product recom-
Battery
mended by SEAT.
The battery is located in the engine compart-
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze. ment ›››  page 245. It does not require
maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-
spection Service.
 ››› page 250

WARNING  ››› page 251

If the water from the windscreen washer does

not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze WARNING
on the windscreen and rear window, reducing ● When repairing or working on the electrical
forward and rear visibility. system, proceed as follows:
● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer – 1. Remove the key from the ignition. The
contains enough anti-freeze. negative cable on the battery must be
● In cold conditions, you should not use the disconnected.
windscreen washer system unless you have
60
 The essentials

Emergencies In the engine compartment ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box tion system.
cover ››› Fig. 66. ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
Fuses electrical system.
Identifying fuses situated below the dash
Fuse location panel by colours WARNING
Colour Amp rating Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
Black 1 cause a fire and serious injury.
Purple 3 ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
Light brown 5 age (same colour and markings) and size.
Brown 7.5 ● Never repair a fuse.
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
Red 10
or similar.
Blue 15
Fig. 65
Yellow 20
Replacing a blown fuse
White or trans- 25
parent

Green 30

Orange 40

 ››› page 94

Fig. 66 WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can
Underneath the instrument panel give serious electrical shocks, causing burns Fig. 67 Image of a blown fuse »
The fuse box is located behind the storage and even death!
compartment ››› Fig. 65.
61
 The essentials

Preparation Light source used for each function LED rear lights Type
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- Halogen headlights Type The remaining functions work with LEDs
trical equipment.
Daytime driving light/side light P21W SLL
● Open the corresponding fuse box
›››  page 95. Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Action in the event of a punc-
Identifying a blown fuse
Turn signal PY21W LL
ture
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
››› Fig. 67. What to do first
Full-LED main headlights Type
● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface
blown. No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs
and in a safe place as far away from traffic as
possible.
To replace a fuse Front fog light Type
● Apply the handbrake.
● Remove the fuse. Fog/cornering lights* H8 ● Switch on the hazard warning lights.
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an
● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.
identical amperage rating (same colour and Rear lights Type
markings) and identical size. ● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever
Brake light/tail light P21W LL to position P.
● Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid. Side lights 2x W5W LL ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
Turn signal PY21W LL
● Have the vehicle tool kit ›››  page 89
Retro fog light H21W and the spare wheel* ›››  page 260
Bulbs ready.
Reverse lights P21W LL
Bulbs (12 V) ● Observe the applicable legislation for each
LED rear lights Type country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the etc.).
lifetime of the car and cannot be replaced. If Turn signal PY21W LL ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and
the headlight becomes damaged, go to a Retro fog light H21W wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
specialised workshop. roadside crash barrier).
Reverse lights P21W LL

62
 The essentials

WARNING ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
››› Fig. 68 10 . unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
● Always observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users. ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 68 3 into ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
● If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break distributed throughout the tyre.
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
automatically. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from ● Remove the lid from the filling tube valve.
moving. ››› Fig. 68 and screw the open end of the
3 ● Repeat the inflation process.
tube into the tyre valve.
● If the indicated pressure still cannot be
● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
With anti-puncture kit fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant and request assistance from an authorised
bottle. technician.
● Remove the bottle from the valve. ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
ing the tool ››› Fig. 68 1 . ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
Inflating the tyre 80 km/h (50 mph).
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
››› Fig. 68 5 into the tyre valve. ›››  page 91.
● Check that the air bleed screw is closed
››› Fig. 68 ›››
7 .
● Start the engine and leave it running.
 in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 89

Fig. 68
● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 68 9 into the
vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 147.  ››› page 89

● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF

The anti-puncture kit is located under the WARNING
floor panel in the luggage compartment. switch ››› Fig. 68 8 .
● Keep the air compressor running until it A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same performance properties as a conven-
Sealing the tyre reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar
tional tyre.
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). a maximum of 8
● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
minutes. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). »
the ››› Fig. 68 1 tool to remove the insert.
Place it on a clean surface. ● Disconnect the air compressor.

63
 The essentials

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and ● Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for
fast cornering.  ››› in What to do first on page 63 the valve.
● Next fit the rest of the wheel cover
● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
 ››› page 89

Wheel bolt caps*

Wheel covers*
Changing a wheel
Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 71 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Fig. 70 Remove the wheel cover. Removal

● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the
The wheel covers must be removed for access
to the wheel bolts. cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 71.
Fig. 69 See Fig. for positioning 2
● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
1 An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* Removing
2 Towline anchorage ● Remove the wheel cover using the wire
3 Box spanner for wheel bolts* hook ››› Fig. 70.
4 Crank handle for jack ● Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the
wheel cover.
5 Jack*
6 Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- Fitting
ers*/wheel bolt cap clip.
● Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by
pressing it firmly.
64
 The essentials

Anti-theft wheel bolts Loosening the wheel bolts Lifting the vehicle

Fig. 72 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and Fig. 73 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts. Fig. 74 Crossbar: marks.
adapter.
● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto
● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. the wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapter
● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools) is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-
onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on theft wheel bolts ››› page 65.
as far as it will go. ● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn
● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto to the left ››› Fig. 73 (arrow). To apply the re-
the adapter as far as it will go. quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the
end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel
● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 65.
bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot
on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the
Note
vehicle for support and take care not to slip. Fig. 75 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi-
Make a note of the code number of the anti- cle.
theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, WARNING
but not in your vehicle. If you need a new ● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi- Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be-
fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not, ground. If necessary use a large, strong
cial Service, indicating the code number. board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
an accident may occur.
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping ››› . »
65
 The essentials

● Find the support point on the strut (sunken ● The height of the parked vehicle can The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
area) closest to the wheel to be changed change as a result of variations in tempera- easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
››› Fig. 74. ture and loading. the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
● Turn the jack*, located below the strut sup- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
port point, to raise it until tab 1 ››› Fig. 75 is ting the wheel.
CAUTION
below the housing provided.
The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-
● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto bar. Only place the jack* on the points de-
the housing provided on the strut and the Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-
signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-
mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The wise, the vehicle may be damaged. tation
base plate 2 should fall vertically with re-
spect to the support point 1 . A directional tread pattern can be identified
by the arrows on the sidewall that point in
● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel Removing and fitting a wheel the direction of rotation. Always observe the
is slightly lifted off the ground. direction of rotation indicated when fitting
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel the wheel to guarantee optimum properties
WARNING bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. of this type of tyres with regard to grip,
Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be- noises, wear and aquaplaning.
fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not, Taking off the wheel
an accident may occur. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
spanner and place them on a clean surface. with care as this means the tyre does not of-
WARNING ● Take off the wheel. fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-
● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If ticular importance when the road surface is
the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could Putting on the spare wheel wet.
slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
risk of injury.
To return to directional tread tires, replace
direction, observe the instructions in the punctured tyre as soon as possible and
● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- ››› page 66. restore the obligatory direction of rotation of
plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles
all tyres.
could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. ● Mount the wheel.
● Only mount the jack* on the support points ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
designed for this purpose on the strut, and tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
always align the jack correctly. If you do not, Subsequent work
● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-
equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
using the wheel brace.
66
 The essentials

● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed Emergency towing of the vehi-
››› page 64. below 50 km/h.
● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
cle
If there is a danger of being trapped despite
tion. having mounted the chains, it is best to disa-
Towing
● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the ›››  page 179, Switching on/off the ESC
luggage compartment ›››  page 148. and ASR.
● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- Snow chains will improve braking ability as
ted tyre as soon as possible. well as traction in winter conditions.
● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- For technical reasons snow chains may only
cator, adjust the pressure and store the read- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
ing in the radio/Easy Connect system* combination.
›››  page 257.
● Have the tightening torque of the wheel 195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
205/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm Fig. 76
que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-
while, drive carefully. 225/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as 225/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
possible.
Remove wheel covers and any integral trim
ring before fitting snow chains.
Snow chains Remove the chains when roads are free of
snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the
Use wheels become damaged quickly and may
even be rendered unusable.
Snow chains should only be used on the
front wheels. Fig. 77

Check that they are correctly seated after

Towline anchorages
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac- Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-
rages. »
67
 The essentials

The towline anchorages are located under ways a risk of overloading and damaging the WARNING
the floor panel in the luggage compartment, anchorage points.
next to the vehicle tools ›››  page 89. The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-
Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig- ing, for example, the towed vehicle can easily
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen be driven into the towing vehicle.
connection ››› Fig. 76 o ››› Fig. 77 and tighten washer can work. Ensure that the steering
it with the wheel brace. wheel is unlocked and moves freely.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles Tow-starting
Tow rope or tow bar
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
The tow bar offers increased safety and a gearbox, place the lever in N. If the engine will not start, first try starting it
lower risk of damage. using the battery of another vehicle
To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The ››› page 69. You should only attempt to tow-
The tow rope is recommended when there is brake servo does not work when the engine start a vehicle if charging the battery does
no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does is switched off. not work. This is done by leveraging wheel
not damage the vehicle. movement.
The power steering only works when the igni-
tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving, When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
provided that the battery is sufficiently charg- gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-
● The tow rope must be taut before you drive ed. Otherwise, it will need more force. tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the
off.
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all catalytic converter.
● Release the clutch very carefully when start- times.
ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler- ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.
ate gently (automatic gearbox). ● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.

Driving style
 ››› page 92
● Switch the ignition on.
● Once both vehicles are moving, release the
Towing requires some experience, especially WARNING clutch.
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
If the vehicle has no electrical power, the ● As soon as the engine has started, press
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- brake lights, turn signals and all other lights
experienced drivers should not attempt to the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.
will no longer function. Do not have the vehi-
tow. cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle tion could result in an accident.
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-

68
 The essentials

How to jump start How to jump start: description 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to
the positive + terminal of the vehicle
with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 78.
Jump leads
3. Connect the other end of the red jump
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire lead to the positive terminal + in the ve-
cross section. hicle providing assistance B .
If the engine fails to start because of a dis- 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
charged battery, the battery can be connec- connect one end of the black jump lead to
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the negative terminal – of the vehicle
the engine. providing the current B ››› Fig. 78.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN – For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles nect one end of the black jump lead X to a
tions). The wire cross section must be at least without Start Stop system suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of
25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least metal in the engine block, or to the engine
35 mm2 for diesel engines. block itself ››› Fig. 79.

Note
5. Connect the other end of the black jump
lead X to a solid metal component bolted
● The vehicles must not touch each other, to the engine block or to the engine block
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as itself of the vehicle with the flat battery.
the positive terminals are connected. Do not connect it to a point near the bat-
● The discharged battery must be properly tery A .
connected to the on-board network.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
Fig. 79 Diagram of connections for vehicles parts in the engine compartment.
with Start Stop system
Starting
Jump lead terminal connections 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles boosting battery and let it run at idling
››› . speed. »

69
 The essentials

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat on battery). Failure to comply could result in Note
battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until an explosion.
the engine is running. The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-
● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- erwise electricity could flow as soon as the
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- positive terminals are connected.
Removing the jump leads ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
off the dipped beam headlights if they are freezes, it should be replaced.
switched on. ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes Changing the wiper blades
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
10. Turn on the heater blower and heated Failure to comply could result in an explo-
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
Windscreen wipers service position
sion.
battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks ● Observe the instructions provided by the
which are generated when the leads are manufacturer of the jump leads.
disconnected.
● Do not connect the negative cable from the
11. When the engine is running, disconnect other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
the leads in reverse order to the details of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
given above. battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
explosion.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Do not attach the negative cable from the
metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
nals. the brake line.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery Fig. 80 Wipers in service position
onds, switch off the starter and try again after clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
about 1 minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-
terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- ers are in service position ››› Fig. 80.
WARNING hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
● Position the leads in such a way that they ● Close the bonnet ›››  page 245.
● Please note the safety warnings referring to
cannot come into contact with any moving ● Switch the ignition on and off.
working in the engine compartment
parts in the engine compartment.
›››  page 245. ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
● The battery providing assistance must have wards briefly 4 ››› page 31.
sult in chemical burns.
the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and
approximately the same capacity (see imprint

70
 The essentials

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- and design on to the wiper arm and hook it
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- into place.
tion. ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
CAUTION
● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the Changing the rear wiper blade
wiper arms, only leave them in the service ● Raising/lowering the wiper arm.
position.
● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 82 (arrow
● Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms. Fig. 82 Changing the rear wiper blade
A ).
● Hold down the release button 1 while
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms gently pulling the blade in the direction of ar-
Changing the windscreen and rear ● Place the windscreen wipers in the service row B .
window wiper blades position ››› page 70. ● Insert a new blade of the same length and
● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas- type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-
tening point. rection to the arrow B and hook into place
button 1 .
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.
● Raise the wiper arms.
● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
 ››› page 91

● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or WARNING

damp cloth may be used ››› in Changing
Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility
the windscreen and rear window wiper
and increase the risk of accident and serious
Fig. 81 Changing the windscreen wiper blades on page 92. injury.
blades
● Always replace damaged or worn blades or
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
blades which do not clean the windscreen
● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. correctly.
● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 81 1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-
rection of the arrow.
71
 Safety

Safety – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and

good view of the surroundings.
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road ››› , for this reason:
– Make sure all luggage is secured – Always pay attention to traffic and do not
Safe driving ››› page 148. get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere
Safety first!
with the pedals. – Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
WARNING – Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vi-
sion mirrors properly according to your – Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
● This manual contains important informa-
size.
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both – Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for the driver and the passengers. The other – Ensure that the passengers in the rear for road, traffic and weather conditions.
sections of the on-board documentation also seats always have the head restraints in
contain further information that you should – When travelling long distances, take
the in-use position ››› page 76.
be aware of for your own safety and for the breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
safety of your passengers. – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
● Ensure that the on-board documentation is straints according to their height.
or stressed.
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- – Protect children with appropriate child
cially important when lending or selling the seats and properly applied seat belts WARNING
vehicle to another person. ››› page 87. When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct the risk of injury and accidents increases.
your passengers also to assume a proper
Advice about driving sitting position. ››› page 73.
– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your Safety equipment
Before starting every trip passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly. ››› page 77. Never put your safety or the safety of your
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
passengers, always note the following points dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
before every trip: risk of injury. The following list includes most
What affects driving safety? of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly. As a driver, you are responsible for yourself ● Three-point seat belts
– Check tyre pressure.
and your passengers. When your concentra- ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear
tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
side seats,
72
 Safe driving

● Belt tensioners for the front seats Correct position for passengers mend the following adjustments for the driv-

Technical data
● Front airbags er:
● knee airbags, Correct sitting position for driver – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
● Side airbags in the front seat backrests distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
● Side airbags in the rear seat backrests* ››› Fig. 83.
● Head-protection airbags
– Move the driver seat forwards or backwards
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in so that you are able to press the accelera-

Advice
the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floor
● Height-adjustable front head restraints with your knees still slightly angled ››› .
● Rear head restraints with in-use position – Ensure that you can reach the highest point
and non-use position of the steering wheel.
● Adjustable steering column – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

Operation
Fig. 83 The proper distance between driver edge is at the same level as the top of your
The safety equipment mentioned above and steering wheel head, or as close as possible to the same
works together to provide you and your pas-
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 84.
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
safety systems can only be effective if you tion so that your back rests completely

Emergencies
and your passengers are sitting in a correct against it.
position and use this equipment properly.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 77.
Safety is everyone's business!
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat ››› page 140.

Safety
Fig. 84 Correct head restraint position for the WARNING
driver.
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver
can lead to severe injuries.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
least 25 cm distance between the centre of »
73
 Safety

the chest and the centre of the steering Correct sitting position for front pas- and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer
wheel ››› Fig. 83. If you are sitting closer than senger than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you you properly.
properly. For your own safety and to reduce the risk of ● If your physical constitution prevents you
● If your physical constitution prevents you injury in the event of an accident, we recom- from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 mend the following adjustments for the front cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The passenger: workshop will help you decide if special spe-
workshop will help you decide if special spe- cific modifications are necessary.
– Move the front passenger seat back as far
cific modifications are necessary. ● Always keep your feet in the footwell when
as possible ››› .
● When driving, always hold the steering the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the
wheel with both hands on the outside of the – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. tion so that your back rests completely incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver against it. increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
airbag is triggered. braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
edge is at the same level as the top of your to an incorrect sitting position.
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
head, or as close as possible to the same
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-
level as the top of your head ››› page 76. senger in events such as sudden braking ma-
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver front of the front passenger seat. backrest tilted far back! The airbag system
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 77. tection when the backrest is in an upright po-
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can sition and the front passenger is wearing his
It is possible to deactivate the front passen- or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
only provide optimal protection when the
ger airbag in exceptional circumstances backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
backrest is in an upright position and the
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-
››› page 85. the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning
ly. of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-
Adjusting the front passenger seat
sition!
● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- ››› page 140.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
ieve optimal protection.
WARNING to achieve maximum protection.

● An incorrect sitting position of the front

passenger can lead to severe injuries.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
74
 Safe driving

Correct sitting position for rear seat Examples of incorrect sitting posi- ● Never put your feet out of a window.

Technical data
passengers tions ● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
passengers on the rear seat bench must con- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- well.
sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
– Sit up straight.
correct seat belt position. As the driver, you

Advice
gage compartment.
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially
sition ››› page 76. children. WARNING
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect ● Any incorrect sitting position increases the
front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travel- risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrect
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 77.
ling ››› . position exposes the vehicle occupants to se-

Operation
vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik-
– Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sit- ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed an
when you take children in the vehicle ting positions that could be dangerous for all incorrect sitting position.
››› page 87. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
but we would like to make you aware of this er sitting position and maintain it throughout
WARNING issue. the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-

Emergencies
● If the passengers in the rear seats are not sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion: sition during the trip ››› page 73, Correct posi-
juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle. tion for passengers.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats.
to achieve maximum protection.
● Never kneel on the seats.
● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
tion when seat backrests are in an upright
● Never lean against the dash panel.

Safety
position and the vehicle occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench.
the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways.
● Never lean out of a window.
75
 Safety

Correct adjustment of front head re- Correct adjustment of rear head re- Rear head restraints
straints straints – The rear head restraints have 2 positions:
use and non-use.
– One position for use (head restraint raised)
››› Fig. 86. In this position, the head re-
straints are used normally, protecting pas-
sengers along with the rear seat belts.
– And one position for non-use (head re-
straint lowered).
– To fit the head restraints in position for use,
pull on the edges with both hands in the
direction of the arrow.
Fig. 85 Correctly adjusted head restraint as Fig. 86 Head restraints in the correct posi-
viewed from the front and the side. tion. WARNING

Read the additional information carefully ● Under no circumstances should the rear
›››  page 17. passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position. See the warning
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- label located on the rear side fixed window
portant part of passenger protection and can ››› Fig. 87.
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident ● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
situations. with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
● Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is, as far as possible, at the same level
as the top of your head, or at the very least, CAUTION
at eye level ››› Fig. 85. Fig. 87 Head restraint position warning label. Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head restraints ››› page 140.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
portant part of the passenger protection and
can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-
dent situations

76
 Seat belts

Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- Seat belts

Technical data
erings over the original floor mats. This
Pedals would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident. Why wear a seat belt?
– Ensure that you can always press the accel- ● Never place objects in the driver footwell.
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired An object could move into the pedal area and Number of seats
to the floor. impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front
– Ensure that the pedals can return unim- not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped

Advice
paired to their initial positions. celerator pedal. Risk of accident! with a three-point seat belt.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- In some versions, your vehicle is approved
tened during the trip and do not obstruct only for four seats. Two front seats and two
the pedals ››› . rear seats.

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals

Operation
WARNING
clear and which are secured to prevent them
● Never transport more than the permitted
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
amount of people in your vehicle.
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must her seat. Children must be protected with an

Emergencies
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop appropriate child restraint system.
the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.

Safety
WARNING
● Restricting pedal operation can lead to crit-
ical situations while driving.

77
 Safety

Seat belt lamp*  of more than approximately 25 km/h The protective function of seat belts
(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened
while the vehicle is in motion. The warning
light will also flash .
The  lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
nition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display.*

Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is switched on, the seat belt status
display ››› Fig. 88 on the instrument panel in-
Fig. 88 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc- Fig. 89 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
cupied and corresponding seat belt fastened forms the driver whether the passengers in will not be thrown forward in the event of sud-
display. the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. den braking
The  symbol indicates that the passenger in
The control lamp illuminates to remind the this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt. Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
driver to fasten his seat belt. When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened in the proper position. They also help prevent
or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- uncontrolled movements that may result in
Before starting the vehicle:
played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- serious injury and reduce the risk of being
– Fasten your seat belt securely. dication can be hidden by pressing the thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their 0.0/SET button on the dash panel. dent.
seat belts properly before driving off. The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
– Protect children by using a child seat ac- 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
cording to the child's height and weight. is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
An audible warning will also be heard if the the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
When the ignition is switched on, the control vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
lamp  in the instrument panel lights up (de- (15 mph). tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
pending on the model version) if the driver or gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
passenger have not fastened their seat belts. these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
An audible warning signal will sound for a This is why it is so important to fasten seat
few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened belts before every trip, even when "just driv-
as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed ing around the corner".
78
 Seat belts

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat WARNING ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be

Technical data
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown blocked with paper or other objects, as this
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
that wearing seat belts is an effective means can prevent the latch plate from engaging se-
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
of substantially reducing the risk of injury curely.
optimal protection from seat belts can be
and improving the chances of survival when ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
achieved only if you use them properly.
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, similar items to alter the position of the belt
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
properly worn seat belts improve the protec- webbing.
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt connections, belt retractors or parts of the

Advice
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
is required by law in most countries. jured. buckle could cause severe injuries in the
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regular
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
intervals.
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Never allow two passengers (even children)
triggered in some cases of head-on collision. ● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-
to share the same seat belt.
dent and stretched must be replaced by a

Operation
The front airbags will not be triggered during ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in essary even if there is no apparent damage.
sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- motion. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
is not exceeded.
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
Therefore, you should always wear your seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it moved or modified in any way.

Emergencies
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants is being worn. ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the
have fastened their seat belts properly before ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or retractors may not work properly.
you drive off! fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
Safety instructions on using seat jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
belts ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or

Safety
in any other incorrect position.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in
● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
this section. over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
at all times and are not damaged. to protect.

79
 Safety

Head-on collisions and the laws of called “kinetic energy” is created both in the possible to brace oneself with one's hands.
physics passengers and inside the vehicle. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con-
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
››› Fig. 90.
sorbed” in the event of an accident. It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
The most significant factor, however, is the
wise be thrown forward violently through the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
danger not only themselves but also the front
netic energy is multiplied by four.
occupants ››› Fig. 91.
Fig. 90 A driver not wearing a seat belt is Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
thrown forward violently our example do not have their seat belts fas-
tened, in the event of a collision the entire
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
Fig. 91 The unbelted passenger in the rear
collision, they will move forward at the same
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the speed their vehicle was travelling just before
driver who is wearing a seat belt. the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics collisions.
work in the case of a head-on collision: when Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy body in a collision are so great that it is not
80
 Seat belts

How to properly adjust your The seat belts are equipped with an automat-

Technical data
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-
seatbelt dom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-
Fastening and unfastening the seat ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
belt areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.

Advice
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
››› page 82.
Fig. 93 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
cy. Releasing the seat belt
● Press the red button on the belt buckle

Operation
Read the additional information carefully ››› Fig. 92 B. The latch plate is released and
›››  page 17. springs out ››› .
Fasten your seat belt ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim is not damaged.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly. Positioning seat belts

Emergencies
● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly. Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-
● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch ly when they are properly positioned
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and ›››  Fig. 17.
lap.
WARNING
● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
Fig. 92 Positioning and removing the seat ● The seat belts offer best protection only
belt buckle.
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
when the backrests are in an upright position

Safety
securely locked with an audible click
››› Fig. 92 A. and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly.
● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
securely engaged in the buckle. »
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will

81
 Safety

not protect you properly and the risk of injury The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the specialised workshops, must be ob-
is increased. the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle served.
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
overturns, or in accidents where no major
cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the forces act on the vehicle. WARNING
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
Note belts, including the removal and refitting of
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-
vere injuries in the event of an accident. ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a system parts in conjunction with other repair
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is work, must be performed by a specialised
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the
not an indication of fire in the vehicle. workshop only.
seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always ● The relevant safety requirements must be ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the observed when the vehicle or components of tection for one accident and must be changed
abdomen ›››  Fig. 17. the system are scrapped. Specialised work- if they have been activated.
● Always engage the retractor lock when you shops are familiar with these regulations,
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 which are also available to you.
››› page 87.
● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 79.
Service and disposal of belt tension-
ers
Seat belt tensioners The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that are installed in the seats of
How the seat belt tensioner works your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
Read the additional information carefully when performing other repair work, the seat
›››  page 18. belt may be damaged. The consequence may
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
The seat belts for the occupants in the front tensioners function incorrectly or may not
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen- function at all.
sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-
ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli- So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sions and only if the seat belt is worn. This sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing do not cause any injuries or environmental
the forward motion of the occupants. pollution, regulations, which are known to

82
 Airbag system

Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-

Technical data
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained
pant. This also applies to children. or the restraint system is not appropriate for
Brief introduction their age, size or weight.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag. ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you
Why is it so important to wear a seat lean forward or to the side while travelling or
This way, the front airbags can completely
belt and to sit correctly? deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
a substantially increased risk of injury. This
mum protection.
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best increased risk of injury will be further in-

Advice
protection, the seat belt must always be worn The most important factors that will trigger creased if you are struck by an inflating air-
properly and the correct sitting position must an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle bag.
be assumed. of collision and the speed of the vehicle. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
››› page 77.
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Operation
overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected
mind that the airbag system can only work ef- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
fectively when the vehicle occupants are occurring during the collision and measured
wearing their seat belts correctly and have by the control unit remains below the speci- Description of the airbag system
adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fied reference values, the front, side and/or
fore, it is most important to properly wear the curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 20.

Emergencies
seat belts at all times, not only because this to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
is required by law in most countries, but also cle involved in an accident, no matter how
The airbag system is not a substitute for the
for your safety ››› page 77, Why wear a seat serious, is not a determining factor for the
seat belts. The airbag system offers addition-
belt?. airbags to have been triggered.
al protection for the driver and passenger in
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so combination with the seat belts.
WARNING
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- The airbag system comprises the following
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to modules (as per vehicle equipment):

Safety
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position critical or fatal injuries.
● Electronic control unit
while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti- ● Front airbags for driver and passenger
Sharp braking before an accident may cause cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. ● Knee airbag for the driver
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be Children up to 12 years old should always
thrown forward into the area of the deploying ● Side airbags »
83
 Safety

● Head airbag WARNING such as the properties of the object the vehi-
● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide
panel speed, etc.
maximum protection if the occupants are
● Key-operated switch for front passenger air- seated correctly ››› page 73, Correct position Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
bag for passengers. vation.
● Control lamp to disconnect/connect the ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
front airbag. have the system checked immediately by a tory and activates the respective restraint
specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a
system.
The airbag system operation is monitored danger that during a collision, the system
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly. If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- fined reference value in the control unit the
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). airbags will not be triggered, even though
Airbag activation the accident may cause extensive damage to
There is a fault in the system if the control the car.
lamp : The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousandths of a second, to provide addi- The following airbags are triggered in seri-
● does not light up when the ignition is
tional protection in the event of an accident. ous head-on collisions
switched on,
A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ● Driver airbag.
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
is switched on ● Front passenger front airbag
tion of fire in the vehicle.
● turns off and then lights up again after the ● Knee airbag for the driver.
The airbag system is only ready to function
ignition is switched on
when the ignition is on. The following airbags are triggered in seri-
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
In special accidents instances, several air- ous side-on collisions
moving.
bags may activate at the same time. ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
The airbag system is not triggered if: In the event of minor head-on and side colli- dent.
● the ignition is switched off sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. dent.
● there is a minor frontal collision
● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
● there is a minor side collision Activation factors cident.
● there is a rear-end collision The conditions that lead to the airbag system
● the vehicle turns over. activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
84
 Airbag system

In an accident with airbag activation: ments, facing in the direction of travel)

  It lights up on the dash panel

Technical data
● the interior lights switch on (if the interior ››› page 88;
light switch is in the courtesy light position); Fault in the air- Have the system checked immedi- ● despite the driver seat being in the correct
bag system. ately by a specialised workshop.
● the hazard warning lights switch on; position, a minimum distance of 25 cm can-
Front passenger not be maintained between the centre of the
● all doors are unlocked; Check whether the airbag should re-
front airbag dis- steering wheel and the driver's torso,
main disabled.
● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. abled.
● installation of special devices is required in
the steering wheel area due to a physical dis-
  It lights up on the dash panel

Advice
ability,
Deactivating airbags The control lamp switches off about ● if you have special seats installed (e.g. an
Front passenger 60 seconds after the ignition is orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
Deactivation of front airbag front airbag ena- turned on or after enabling of the
bled. front passenger front airbag with the The front passenger front airbag can be disa-
key lock switch. bled using the switch ››› page 86.

Operation
Several warning and control lamps light up We recommend that you contact an author-
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-
ed on, signalling that the function is being bags.
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds. Airbag system control

Emergencies
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, The airbag system availability is controlled
the lamp      does not re- electronically, regardless of whether an air-
main lit, or if it is lit together with the control bag is disabled.
lamp  on the dash panel, there may be a
Fig. 94 Control lamp for disabling the front If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics
fault in the airbag system ››› .
passenger front airbag on the dash panel system:
● the airbag system warning lamp  illumi-
The disabling of airbags is only carried out in
It lights up on the combi-in- nates after switching on the ignition for

Safety
 certain cases, i.e. if:
strument about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about
● a child seat is required in the front passen- 12 seconds. »
Fault in airbag ger seat with the child facing in the opposite
Have the system checked immedi-
system and seat direction to the direction of travel (in some
ately by a specialised workshop.
belt tensioners.
countries, due to divergent legal require-

85
 Safety

If the airbag has been disabled with the air- ● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find Read the additional information carefully
bag switch on the side of the dash panel: information on which vehicle airbags can be ›››  page 21.
● the airbag control lamp  will illuminate disabled. The switch disables only the front passenger
for about 4 seconds after the ignition is front airbag.
switched on,
● The airbag is disabled, signalled with the Front passenger front airbag switch Switching on the airbag
warning lamp   which lights up with the – Switch the ignition off.
word      placed in the cen-
tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 95. – Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
WARNING – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
In the event of a fault in the airbag system, deactivating the front passenger airbag
the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail ››› Fig. 95. About 3/4 of the key should en-
to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly, ter, as far as it will go.
leading to severe or fatal injuries.
– Then turn the key gently to the ON position.
● Have the airbag system checked immedi-
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
ately by a specialised workshop.
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
● Never mount a child seat in the front pas- Fig. 95 Front passenger front airbag switch.
senger seat or remove the mounted child – Close the passenger side storage compart-
seat! The front passenger front airbag may ment.
deploy during an accident in spite of the
– Check, with the ignition switched on, that
fault.
the control lamp   ››› Fig. 96 does not
light up, with the word    
CAUTION  in the centre part of the dash panel.
Always pay attention to any lit control lamps – The warning lamp   is illuminated for
and to the corresponding descriptions and in-
60 seconds in the centre part of the dash
structions to avoid damage to the vehicle.
panel.

Note
Fig. 96 Warning lamp for disabling the front
● Follow the current legislation in your coun- passenger airbag.
try regarding the disabling of airbags.

86
 Transporting children safely

Control lamp with the word   

Transporting children safely Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

Technical data
  (front passenger airbag disabled) observe any statutory requirements when in-
If the front passenger front airbag is disa- stalling and using child seats. Always read
bled, after switching on the ignition, the con-
Safety for children and note ››› page 87.
trol lamp will light up for several seconds, We recommend you always carry the manu-
then it will switch off for about 1 s and then Introduction
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
switch on again. gether with the on-board documentation.
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault accident statistics, we recommend that chil-

Advice
in the disabling of the airbag system ››› in dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag seats. Depending on their age, height and Important information regarding the
on page 21. Please go immediately to an Of- weight, children travelling in rear seats must front passenger's airbag
ficial Service. use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the Read the additional information carefully
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or ›››  page 24.

Operation
in the centre back seat.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
The physical laws involved and the forces tion included in the following chapters:
acting in a collision apply also to children
››› page 80. But unlike adults, children do not ● Safety distance with respect to the passen-
have fully developed muscle and bone struc- ger airbag ››› page 83.

Emergencies
tures. This means that children are subject to ● Objects between the passenger and the
a greater risk of injury. passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must on page 20.
always use special child restraint systems The passenger side front airbag, when ena-
when travelling in the vehicle. bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
We recommend the use of child safety prod- backward since the airbag can strike the seat
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- with such force that it can cause serious or

Safety
gramme, which includes systems for all ages fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
made by “Peke” (not for all countries). should always travel on the rear seat.
These systems have been especially de- Therefore we strongly recommend you to
signed and approved, complying with the transport children on the rear seats. This is
ECE-R44. regulation. the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be »
87
 Safety

disabled with a key-operated switch ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4
››› page 86. When transporting children, use must not wear a normal seat belt without a years old)
a child seat suitable for the age and size of child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
each child ››› page 88. abdominal and neck areas during a sudden Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
braking manoeuvre or in an accident. years old)
WARNING ● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
● All vehicle occupants, especially children, ted and the seat belt should be properly in years old)
must assume the proper sitting position and place ››› page 77.
be properly belted in while travelling. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat Child seats that have been tested and ap-
● Never hold children or babies on your lap, ››› page 88, Child seats. proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
the child! seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- with the test number below it).
● Never allow a child to be transported in a tivated ››› page 122. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
vehicle without being properly secured, or to observe any statutory requirements when in-
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. stalling and using child seats.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- Child seats We recommend you to always include the
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
occupants. Categorisation of child seats into together with the on-board documentation.
● If children assume an improper sitting posi- groups SEAT recommends you use child seats from
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
themselves to greater risk of injury in the Use only child seats that are officially ap- child seats have been designed and tested
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an proved and suitable for the child. for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- right child seat for your model and age group
and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis- at SEAT dealers.
dent; as this could cause serious injury or sion for Europe Regulations.
even death. WARNING
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
● A suitable child seat can protect your child!
ries: Read and always observe information and
● Never leave a child alone in the child seat warnings concerning the use of child seats
or inside the vehicle because depending on Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 ››› page 87.
the season, very high temperatures may be months)
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
be fatal. Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
88
 Self-help

Emergencies Note ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the

Technical data
tyre greater than 4 mm.
The jack does not generally require any main-
tenance. If required, it should be greased us- ● If you have been driving with very low pres-
Self-help ing universal type grease. sure or a completely flat tyre.
● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* date.

The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored Tyre repair WARNING
under the floor panel in the luggage compart-

Advice
ment. Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the
To access the vehicle tools: roadside. Please observe the following rules
Read the additional information carefully to minimise the risk of injury:
– Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han- ›››  page 63
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
dle until it is fastened to the tabs on both
sides. The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Park it at a safe distance from surrounding

Operation
will reliably seal punctures caused by the traffic to fill the tyre.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the penetration of a foreign body of up to about ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
tyre repair kit* is located under the floor pan- 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- and solid.
el in the luggage compartment. jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● All passengers and particularly children
The tool kit includes: After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, must keep a safe distance from the work area.

Emergencies
you must again check the tyre pressure about ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
● Jack* 10 minutes after starting the engine. other road users.
● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
You should only use the tire mobility set if
er*/wheel bolt cap clip. the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
● Box spanner for wheel bolts* erwise, you should seek professional assis-
familiar with the procedure and you have the
tance.
● Towline anchorage necessary tire mobility set! Otherwise, you
● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
should seek professional assistance.
● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* rary emergency use only until you can reach

Safety
● Towing bracket device the nearest specialised workshop.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases: ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tire mo-
Some of the items listed are only provided in bility set as soon as possible. »
certain model versions, or are optional ex- ● If the wheel rim has been damaged.
tras. ● In outside temperatures below -20 °C
(-4 °F).
89
 Emergencies

● The sealant is a health hazard and must be Contents of the tyre mobility system* 7 Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-
cleaned immediately if it comes into contact sor may have a button).
with the skin. 8 ON/OFF switch
● Always keep the tire mobility set out of the 9 12 volt connector
reach of small children.
10 Bottle of sealant
● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has
been approved for your vehicle. 11 Spare tyre valve
● Always stop the engine, apply the hand- The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert
manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
vehicle involuntary movement.
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11 .
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing WARNING
Fig. 97 Standard representation: Contents of
any legal requirements. When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
the tyre mobility system.
and the inflator tube may become hot.
Note The tyre mobility set is located underneath ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at the floor covering in the luggage compart- ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or
SEAT dealerships. ment. It includes the following components hot air compressor on flammable material.
››› Fig. 97: ● Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
Note 1 Tyre valve remover
● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
Take into account the separate instruction 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur- 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
er. good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
3 Filler tube with cap
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
4 Air compressor
5 Tube for inflating tyres
CAUTION
6 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-
the compressor).
heating! Before switching on the air compres-
sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
90
 Self-help

Check after 10 minutes of driving Manual unlocking/locking ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid

Technical data
only when there is nobody in the way.
Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 97 5 again
Introduction
and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .
CAUTION
Read the additional information carefully
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: When opening and closing in an emergency,
›››  page 12, ›››  page 13. carefully disassemble components and then
● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun- reassemble them carefully to avoid damage
sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. to the vehicle.
roof can be locked manually and partially

Advice
● You should obtain professional assistance
opened, for example if the key or the central
››› . locking is damaged.

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: WARNING

Changing the windscreen wiper
● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value Opening and closing doors carelessly can
blades
again.

Operation
cause serious injury.
● Carefully resume your journey until you ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
Changing the windscreen and rear
reach the nearest specialised workshop with- doors and windows cannot be opened from window wiper blades
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). the inside.
Read the additional information carefully
● Have the damaged tyre replaced. ● Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in the
›››  page 71.

Emergencies
WARNING car in an emergency and will not be able to The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
get themselves to safety.
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
● Depending on the time of the year, temper- responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
be extremely high or extremely low resulting noise of the water as it is wiped across the
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. in serious injuries and illness or even death,
windscreen will be louder.
● Seek specialist assistance. particularly for young children.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-

Safety
WARNING
larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,
they should be changed if they are damaged,
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . »
lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-
jury.

91
 Emergencies

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced only be towed with the driven wheels lifted The front towline anchorage is only mounted
immediately. These are available from quali- clear of the road, or transported on a special if the vehicle has to be towed.
fied workshops. car transporter or trailer. There is a cover with an opening into which
the towline anchorage is screwed on the right
CAUTION
CAUTION part of the front bumper.
● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could
Do not tow vehicles for more than 50 m. Risk – To remove the bumper cover, just press the
scratch the glass.
of damage to the catalytic converter. upper left side inwards.
● If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean – Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- Note cle tool kit ››› page 89.
aged. ● Please observe related legal requirements.
– Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint ● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 98 and
thinner or similar products to clean the win- vehicles. However, observe any regulations tighten with the wheel brace.
dows. to the contrary.
● In icy conditions, always check that the ● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- After use, unscrew the towline anchorage
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- wise the front towline anchorage could be and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may pulled off the vehicle. towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- kit. The towline anchorage should always be
ers in service position ›››  page 70. kept in the vehicle.
Front towline anchorage

Towing and tow-starting the ve-

hicle
General information
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 67.
CAUTION
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant Fig. 98 Right side of the front bumper: tow-
in the automatic transmission the car may line anchorage screwed in.
92
 Self-help

Rear towline anchorage Vehicles with towline anchorage Towing vehicles with a manual gear-

Technical data
On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov- box
er which covers a threaded hole.
Towing is relatively straightforward.
– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-
cle tool set ››› page 89. Please observe the relevant instructions
››› page 92.
– To remove the bumper cover, just press the
upper side of the cover inwards (arrow) and The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
remove the cover by levering on the lower tow rope in the normal way, with all four

Advice
››› Fig. 99 side. wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
– Screw the towline anchorage into the screw road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h
connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 100 (30 mph).
Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: cover-
and tighten with the wheel brace.
cap.

Operation
After use, unscrew the towline anchorage
and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace Towing a vehicle equipped with auto-
the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor- matic gearbox
age should always be kept in the vehicle.
Certain restrictions must be observed when
WARNING towing your vehicle.

Emergencies
● If the towline anchorage is not screwed in Please observe the relevant instructions
as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw ››› page 92.
connection shearing off during towing (acci-
dent risk). The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
● If your car has a towing bracket, only use
Fig. 100 Right side of the rear bumper: tow-
wheels on the ground. When doing so,
special towing ropes. Risk of accident!
line anchorage screwed in. please note the following points:

Safety
CAUTION ● Make sure the selector lever is in the N po-
The rear towline anchorage should only be
sition.
mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle. In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only
use special tow bars to prevent damage to ● The vehicle must not be towed faster than
the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe- 50 km/h (30 mph).
cially approved for use with towing brackets. ● The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine »
93
 Emergencies

is not running, the gearbox oil pump does

not work and the gearbox is not adequately
Fuses and bulbs ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan- of the electrical system.
ces. Fuses ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
If the vehicle has to be towed with a break- Introduction damage the electrical system.
down truck, it must only be suspended at the
front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo- Due to the constant updating of vehicles,
cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed fuse assignments based on equipment and Note
with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e. the use of the same fuse for various electrical ● One component may have more than one
travelling backwards), the drive shafts also components, it is not possible to provide an fuse.
turn backwards. The planetary gears in the up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for ● Several components may run on a single
automatic gearbox then turn at such high the electrical components at the time this fuse.
speeds that the gearbox will be severely manual was printed. For detailed information
damaged in a short time. about the fuse positions, please consult a
technical service.
Note
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
normal way, or if it has to be towed further component can be protected by several
than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported
fuses.
on a special car transporter or trailer.
● Should the power supply to the selector Only replace fuses when the cause of the
lever be interrupted in position P, the selector problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be fuse blows after a short time, you must have
recovered/manoeuvred you must manually the electrical system checked by a special-
release the selector lever ›››  page 50. ised workshop as soon as possible.

CAUTION
● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the igni-
tion.

94
 Fuses and bulbs

Vehicle fuses Opening and closing the fuse box situated Bulbs

Technical data
below the dash panel
● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 101. Changing a bulb
● Closing: push back the cover it in until it
clicks into place. Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 62.
To open the engine compartment fuse box Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
● Open the bonnet  ››› page 245. practical skill.

Advice
● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse If you choose to change the engine compart-
box cover ››› Fig. 102. ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a
● Then lift the cover out. dangerous area ››› in Work in the engine
Fig. 101 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse compartment on page 245.
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
box cover
Push the locking tabs down until they click Always use identical bulbs with the same

Operation
audibly into place. designation. The name can be found on the
base of the bulb holder.
CAUTION
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- there are different sets of headlights and tail
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems lights:
with your vehicle.

Emergencies
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid ● Halogen headlights
the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- ● Full-LED main headlights*
ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to
● Rear bulb light
the electrical system.
Fig. 102 In the engine compartment: fuse box ● LED rear light*
cover
Note
Full-LED headlight system*

Safety
Read the additional information carefully In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
›››  page 61 those indicated in this chapter. These should
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same beam and route light) with light emitting di-
amperage (same colour and markings) and odes (LEDs) as a light source. »
size.

95
 Emergencies

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the Note

lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
● Please check at regular intervals that all
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
an authorised workshop to have it replaced.
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
WARNING but also that of all other road users.
● Take particular care when working on com- ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you
ponents in the engine compartment if the en- have the correct new bulb.
gine is warm. Risk of burns.
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
glass can break when you touch the bulb, instead, since the fingerprints left on the Fig. 104 Dipped beam headlights.
causing injury. glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-
● When changing bulbs, please take care not erated by the bulb, they will be deposited on – Raise the bonnet.
to injure yourself on sharp edges, in particu- the reflector and will impair its surface. – Move the loops ››› Fig. 103 1 in the direc-
lar on the headlight housing.
tion of the arrow and remove the cover.
– Remove connector ››› Fig. 104 2 from the
CAUTION
Changing bulbs in headlight bulb.
● Remove the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
unit – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 104 3
could occur. pressing inwards to the right.
● Switch off the lights and the parking light Dipped headlight bulb – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
before changing a bulb. that the lug on the base fits into the recess
● Take good care to avoid damaging any com- on the reflector.
ponents.

For the sake of the environment

Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Fig. 103 Dipped beam headlights.

96
 Fuses and bulbs

Day light bulb Turn signal bulb – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb

Technical data
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.

Main beam headlight bulb

Advice
Fig. 105 Day light bulb. Fig. 106 Turn signal bulb.

– Raise the bonnet.

Operation
– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 105 1 anti-
clockwise and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time. Fig. 108 Main beam headlight bulb.

Emergencies
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.

Fig. 107 Turn signal bulb.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Move the loop ››› Fig. 106 1 in the direc-

Safety
tion of the arrow and remove the cover.
– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 107 2 anti-
clockwise and pull.
Fig. 109 Main beam headlight bulb. »
97
 Emergencies

– Raise the bonnet. FR version fog-light bulb

– Move the loop ››› Fig. 108 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the cover.
– Slide connector ››› Fig. 109 2 to the left or
right and pull.
– Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con-
nector.
– Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Fig. 111 Front fog light.

– Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 110 1 from the fog Fig. 112 Fog light: access to the connector
Changing front fog* light bulbs light grille with a screwdriver. and to the light bulb holder.
– Remove the bolts (3x) ››› Fig. 111 2 to re-
Front fog light bulb move the fog light.
– Remove the fog light.

Note
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light
bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical
Service or specialised workshop.

Fig. 113 Fog light: access to the connector

and to the light bulb holder.
Fig. 110 Front fog light.
– Remove the 3 bolts 1 ››› Fig. 112 from the
inside of the wheel housing and the 2 bot-
tom bolts 2 ››› Fig. 112 from the bumper
with the help of a screwdriver.

98
 Fuses and bulbs

– Pull the wheel housing 3 ››› Fig. 113 ac- – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb Removing the rear light

Technical data
cess the 2 hidden screws 4 ››› Fig. 113 of holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
the bumper. same time.
– Remove the screws using a screwdriver. – Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
– Pull the bumper to release it from its an-
chorages to access the connector and the – Check that the bulb works properly.
light bulb holder.

Advice
Note
Changing the rear light bulbs
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light
bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical (on the side panel)
Service or specialised workshop. Fig. 115 Luggage compartment: location of
Rear lights summary the bolt securing the tail light unit.

Operation
Rear lights on the side panel
Remove the bulb holder
Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Side light and brake light P21W LL

Emergencies
Fig. 116 Remove the rear light unit from side
panel.
Fig. 114 Front fog light.

Safety
– Check which of the bulbs is defective.
– Remove connector ››› Fig. 114 1 from the – Open the rear lid.
bulb.
– Remove the cover by prying the flat side of
– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 114 2 anti- a screwdriver into the recess and remove
clockwise and pull. the cover from the opening ››› Fig. 115 1 . »
99
 Emergencies

– Carefully loosen the screw located behind Removing the bulb holder Changing the rear light bulbs
the cover with a screwdriver, turning it anti-
clockwise (arrows) ››› Fig. 115 2 . (on the rear lid)
– Tilt the light in the direction of the arrows
Rear lights summary
until it comes out (positions 3 and 4
››› Fig. 116). Rear lights on tailgate
– Remove the bulb holder ››› page 100.
Left side

CAUTION Side lights 2x W5W LL

Take care when removing the rear light unit to Fog lights H21 W
make sure there is no damage to the paint-
work or any of its components. Fig. 117 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail Right side
light. Side lights 2x W5W LL
Note
– Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 117 unlock- Reverse light P21W LL
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to ing the retaining tabs 1 .
place under the glass on the rear light unit, to The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic
avoid any scratches. – Raise the bulb holder. vehicle. The position of lights may vary ac-
– Change the defective bulb. cording to the country.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order,
taking special care when fitting the bulb
holder. And especially that all retaining
tabs are properly secured.
– Place the light back into place and tighten
with a screwdriver.

Note
In the case of LED lights, change only the turn
signal bulb.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

100 огромный архив документации по автомобилям Volkswagen, Skoda, Seat, Audi
 Fuses and bulbs

Removing the bulb holder – Remove the bulb holder by turning it in the Note

Technical data
direction of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 119.
For LED pilots, you can only change the fog or
reverse bulb, on the left or right guide.

Changing the bulbs

Fitting the bulb holder
– Install the bulb holder making sure that

Advice
locking clips ››› Fig. 119 A are properly
clipped on.
– Replace the cover of the rear lid lining
Fig. 118 Remove the cover from the boot lid. ››› Fig. 118.

Operation
Fig. 120 Position of the bulbs in the bulb
holder

– Lightly press the defective bulb into the

bulb holder ››› Fig. 120 1 , then turn it to

Emergencies
the left 2 and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it to the right as far as it
Fig. 119 Remove the lamp holder will go.

The rear lid must be open to change the – Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
bulbs. the glass part of the bulb.

Safety
– Remove the rear lid cover in the direction – Check that the new bulb works properly.
indicated ››› Fig. 118. – Replace the bulb holder.
– Unlock the retaining tabs A of the bulb
holder, following the direction of arrows 1
and 2 ››› Fig. 119.
101
 Emergencies

Changing number plate light bulbs 3. In the connector lock, turn ››› Fig. 122 to-
wards the arrow 1 and pull the connec-
tor.
4. Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of
arrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.
5. Replace the defective bulb with a new
bulb with the same features.
6. Insert the bulb holder in the number plate
light and turn in the opposite direction of
arrow 2 until it stops.
7. Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
Fig. 121 In the rear bumper: number plate
light.
Note
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs
have an estimated life that exceeds than that
of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an
authorised workshop for replacement.

Fig. 122 Number plate light: Remove the bulb

holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

1. Press the number plate light in the direc-
tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 121.
2. Remove the number plate bulb slightly.

102
 Operation

Fig. 123 Instruments and controls.

104
 Controls and displays

Operation 9 Control lever for: 19 Depending on the equipment, con-

Technical data
– Windscreen wipers and washer . . 136 trols for:
– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . 136 – Heating and ventilation system or
Controls and displays manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . 54, 53
– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . 51
General instrument panel 10 Depending on equipment fitted: ra-
dio or display for Easy Connect 20 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1 Door release lever (navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . 112 21 Driver seat heating control . . . . . . . . 141

Advice
2 Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 11 Depending on the equipment, but- 22 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3 Electric control to adjust exterior tons for: 23 Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 – SEAT driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 24 Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . 19
4 Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 – Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 25 Storage compartment
5 Control lever for: – Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 26 Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Operation
– Turn signals and main beam – Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 133 27 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 134
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 – Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 28 Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 – Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 29 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
– Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 12 Depending on the equipment,
– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 184 glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 146 Note

Emergencies
6 Depending on equipment fitted: – CD player* and/or SD card* ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 184 ››› Booklet Radio tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-
tional extras.
7 Steering wheel with horn and
13 Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed
– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
14 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 86
if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted
– On-board computer controls . . . . 35
15 Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 20 radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-
16 Passenger seat heating control . . . . 141 gation system.
– Controls for radio, telephone,

Safety
● The arrangement of switches and controls
navigation and speech dialogue 17 USB connectivity
on right-hand drive models* may be slightly
system ››› Booklet Radio 18 Depending on equipment fitted, different from the layout shown in
– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- gear lever or selector lever for: ››› page 104. However, the symbols used to
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 169 – Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 identify the controls are the same.
8 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 – Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
105
 Operation

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments
View of instrument panel

Fig. 124 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 124: ator) before the needle reaches the red 5 Speedometer.
zone ››› . 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 110.
1 Rev counter (with the engine running, in
hundreds of revolutions per minute).
2 Engine coolant temperature display
››› page 109 or the natural gas level indi- WARNING
The beginning of the red zone of the rev cator in vehicles with natural gas engine
counter indicates the maximum speed in Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
(CNG) ››› page 110. the risk of injury.
any gear after running-in and with the en-
3 Displays on the screen ››› page 107. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
gine hot. However, it is advisable to
change up a gear or move the selector 4 Adjuster button and display trols when driving.
lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- ››› page 109.
106
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

CAUTION We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Compass ››› page 108.

Technical data
that you follow the recommendations on the ● Shift lever position ››› page 167.
● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
counter needle should only remain in the red ● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
information in ›››  page 37, Gear-change
zone for a short period of time.
indicator. ›››  page 37.
● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs ● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
and heavy acceleration and do not make the CAUTION with different setting options ›››  page 35.
engine work hard.
Never allow the rev counter needle 1 ● Service interval display ›››  page 42.
››› Fig. 124 to go into the red zone on the ● Second speed display ›››  page 35.

Advice
For the sake of the environment scale for more than a very brief period, other-
● Speed warning function ›››  page 42.
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con- wise there is a risk of engine damage.
sumption and noise. ● Start-Stop system status display
For the sake of the environment
››› page 182.
● Active cylinder management display
Changing up a gear early will help you to save
(ACT®)* ››› page 176

Operation
Rev counter fuel and minimise emissions and engine
noise. ● Signs recognised by the traffic signal de-
The rev counter indicates the number of en- tection system ››› page 207
gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 124 1 .
● Low consumption driving status (ECO)
Together with the gear-change indicator, the Indications on the display ››› page 108
rev counter offers you the possibility of using ● Identifying letters on engine (MKB).

Emergencies
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable A variety of information can be viewed on the
speed. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 124 3 , de- Distance travelled
pending on the vehicle equipment:
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates The odometer registers the total distance
the maximum engine speed which may be ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open travelled by the car.
used briefly when the engine is warm and af- ›››  page 38.
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- The odometer (trip) shows the distance
● Warning and information messages travelled since the last odometer reset. The
ing this range, you should change to a higher
›››  page 38.

Safety
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in ● Distance travelled ››› page 109. ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped- ● Time ››› page 108. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 124 4 to re-
al. »
● Navigation instructions. set the trip recorder to 0.
● Outside temperature ›››  page 37.
107
 Operation

● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
seconds and the previous value will be dis- The recommended gear in order to save fuel Depending on the equipment, when driving,
played. is displayed on the instrument panel while the “ECO” display appears on the instrument
you are driving ›››  page 37. panel when the vehicle is in low consump-
Time tion status due to active cylinder manage-
● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 124 Second speed display (mph or km/h) ment (ACT®)* ››› page 176.
4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select In addition to the speedometer, the speed
the hour or minute display. can also be displayed in a different unit of Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
● To continue setting the time, press the up- measurement (in miles or in km per hour). Hold the button ››› Fig. 124 4 down for more
per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but- than 15 seconds to display the identifying
This option cannot be deactivated in models
ton down to scroll through the numbers letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do
destined for countries in which the second
quickly. this, the ignition must be switched on and
speed must always be visible.
● Press the button 4 again in order to finish the engine switched off.
setting the time. The second speed display can be adjusted in
the Easy Connect system via the  key and WARNING
The time can also be set via the  key and the Setup function button ››› page 112. Observe the safety warnings ››› in On the
Setup function button in the Easy Connect
instrument panel on page 47.
system ››› page 112. Speed warning
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will WARNING
Compass be indicated on the instrument panel display.
With the ignition on and the navigation sys- This is very useful, for example when using Even though outside temperatures are above
freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to winter tyres that are not designed for driving
the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- at the maximum speed of the vehicle ● At outside temperatures above +4°C
played on the instrument panel. ›››  page 42. (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”
is not visible, there may still be patches of ice
The speed warning settings can be adjusted on the road.
Selector lever position
in the Easy Connect system via the  key ● Never rely on the outside temperature indi-
The selected gear is displayed on the side of and the Setup function button ››› page 112. cator!
the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
el display. In positions D and S, and with the Start-Stop operating display
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- Note
Updated information relating to the status is
played. ● Different versions of the instrument panel
displayed on the instrument panel
are available and therefore the versions and
››› page 182.
108
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

instructions on the display may vary. In the Odometer/trip recorder Engine cold

Technical data
case of displays without warning or informa- The odometer shows the total distance cov- If only the diodes in the lower part of the
tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by ered by the vehicle. scale light up, this indicates that the engine
the warning lamps. has not yet reached operating temperature.
● Depending on the equipment, some set-
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
tings and instructions can also be carried out been travelled since it was last reset. It is
do not make the engine work hard.
in the Easy Connect system. used to measure short trips. The last digit of
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100
● When several warnings are active at the Normal temperature
metres or tenths of a mile.
same time, the symbols are shown succes-

Advice
If in normal operations, the diodes light up
sively for a few seconds and will stay on until The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-
until the central zone, it means that the en-
the fault is rectified. ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 125.
gine has reached operating temperature. At
high outside temperatures and when making
Fault display
the engine work hard, the diodes may contin-
Odometer If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This

Operation
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder is no cause for concern, provided the control
display. Have the fault repaired immediately, lamp  does not light up on the instrument
as far as is possible. panel digital display.

Heat range
Coolant temperature gauge When the diodes light up in the upper area of

Emergencies
the display and the control lamp appears 
For vehicles with no coolant temperature on the instrument panel display, the coolant
gauge, a control lamp  appears for high temperature is excessive ››› page 249.
coolant temperatures ››› page 249. Please
note ››› . CAUTION
Fig. 125 Instrument panel: odometer and re-
set button.
The coolant temperature gauge 2 ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
››› Fig. 124 only works when the ignition is avoid high revs, driving at high speed and

Safety
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome- switched on. In order to avoid engine dam- making the engine work hard for approxi-
tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change age, please read the following notes for the mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
the measurement units (kilometres different temperature ranges. is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-
so depends on the outside temperature. If
“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions ›››  page 40 as a guide. »
Manual for more details.
109
 Operation

● Additional lights and other accessories in The yellow control lamp  lights up when the The display 6 ››› Fig. 124 only works when
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect reserve level has been reached. the ignition is switched on. When the display
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode
The green warning lamp  lights up when the
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the lights up in red and the control lamp  ap-
vehicle is running in natural gas operating
engine overheating. pears ››› page 106. When the fuel level is very
mode.
● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- low, the lower diode flashes in red.
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is The green warning lamp  switches off when
The distance to empty fuel level is displayed
moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- the natural gas is exhausted. The engine
on the instrument panel 3 ››› Fig. 124.
duce the cooling effect, which could cause changes to operate with petrol.
the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- The capacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle is
Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for a
tance. given in the Technical data section
long time immediately after refuelling, the
natural gas level indicator may not accurately
›››  page 57.
indicate the same level shown after refuelling
Fuel - Gas level CAUTION
when the vehicle is started up again. This is
not due to a leak in the system, but to a drop Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-
in pressure in the gas tank for technical rea- regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In
sons after a cooling phase just after refuel- this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-
ling. haust system, which could cause the catalytic
converter to overheat resulting in damage.

Fuel level - Petrol/Diesel

Control lamps
Warning and indication lamps
Fig. 126 Fuel gauge.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 46.
Displays 2 and 6 ››› Fig. 124 only work
when the ignition is switched on. When the The control and warning lamps are indicators
display reaches the reserve mark, the lower of warnings, ››› in On the instrument panel
diode lights up in red and the control lamp  on page 47, faults ››› in On the instrument
appears ››› page 106. When the fuel level is panel on page 47 or certain functions. Some
very low, the lower diode flashes in red. control and warning lamps come on when the
Fig. 127 Fuel gauge.

110
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

ignition is switched on, and switch off when Engine pre-heating/fault system* 

Technical data
the engine starts running, or while driving.
The warning lamp lights up to show that the
Depending on the model, additional text
glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
The control lamp  lights up
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action ››› page 106, Instruments. If the control lamp  lights up when the en-
gine is started it means that the glow plugs
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
are preheating. When the warning lamp goes

Advice
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
off, the engine should be started straight
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
away.
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are Control lamp  flashes
lit, an audible warning is also heard. If a fault develops in the engine management

Operation
system while you are driving, the glow plug
system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
Engine management*  a specialised workshop as soon as possible
and have the engine checked.
This warning lamp monitors the engine man-
agement system for petrol engines.

Emergencies
The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con-
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
on while system operation is being verified. It
should go out once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine
management system while you are driving,
this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehi-

Safety
cle and seek technical assistance.

111
 Operation

Introduction to the Easy Function buttons in the Page

vehicle’s settings
Connect system* menu

ESC system ››› page 178

System settings (CAR)*
Tyres ››› page 257
CAR menu (Setup) Driver assistance ››› table on page 32
Read the additional information carefully Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 210
›››  page 32
Vehicle lights ››› table on page 32
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
Connect  button and the Setup function Rear vision mirrors and wind- ››› table on page 32
screen wipers
button.
The actual number of menus available and Opening and closing ››› table on page 32
the name of the various options in these me- Multifunction display ››› table on page 32
nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics
and equipment. Date and time ››› table on page 32
Pressing the menu button will always take Units ››› table on page 32
you to the last menu used. Service ››› page 107
When the function button check box is activa-
Factory settings ››› table on page 32
ted , the function is active.
Pressing the menu button  will always take
you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those me-
nus.

112
 Communications and multimedia

Communications and multi-

Technical data
media
Steering wheel controls*
General information
The vehicle includes a multifunction module

Advice
from where it is possible to control the audio,
telephone and radio/navigation functions
without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:

Operation
● Audio version, to control the available au-
dio functions from the steering wheel (Radio,
audio CD, MP3 CD, iPod®1), USB1)).
● Audio + telephone versions o control the
available audio functions from the steering

Emergencies
wheel (Radio, audio CD, MP3 CD, iPod®1),
USB1), SD1)) and the Bluetooth system.

Safety
1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.
113
 Operation

Operating the audio system

Fig. 128 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX

A Turn Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume

A Press No function No function No function

B Mute Pause Mute

Short press: switch to the previous song

C Search for last station No function
Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next song

D Search for the next station No function
Hold down: fast forward

E Previous preset Previous folder No function

F Next preset station Next folder No function

G Change source Change source Change source

H Turn Switch MFA function Switch MFA function Switch MFA function

H Press Acts on the MFA Acts on the MFA Acts on the MFA

114
 Communications and multimedia

Operating the audio system + telephone

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 129 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Operation
A Turn Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume

A Press Mute Pause Mute Mute Mute

Short press: answer/hang up

Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu. phone menu on the dash pan-
B

Emergencies
ela). ela). ela). Hold down: reject an incoming ela).
Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) call/switch to private/redial Hold down: rediala)
mode

Short press: switch to the pre-

Radio/media functionality (ex-
C Search for last station vious song No function No functionb)
cept AUX )
Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next

Radio/media functionality (ex-
Search for the next station song No function No functionb)

Safety
D
cept AUX )
Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument
E
panel panel panel panel panel »

115
 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument
F
panel panel panel panel panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

Acts upon the dash panel Acts upon the dash panel Acts upon the dash panel
H Turn Next/previous preset stationc) Next/previous songc) menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it menu depending on where it
located is located is located

Acts on the MFA or confirms Acts on the MFA or confirms Acts on the MFA or confirms Acts on the MFA or confirms Acts on the MFA or confirms
the menu option of the dash the menu option of the dash the menu option of the dash the menu option of the dash the menu option of the dash
H Press
panel depending on the menu panel depending on the menu panel depending on the menu panel depending on the menu panel depending on the menu
option option option option option
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

116
 Opening and closing

Opening and closing The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- the alarm from being triggered accidentally

Technical data
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle ››› page 124.
can also be unlocked via the central locking
Central locking system switch or by pulling one of the inside door Turn signals
handles. The Auto Lock function can be
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
Description switched on and off on the sound system or
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
on the Easy Connect* system ››› page 120.
is locked.
Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 11 In the event of an accident in which the air-
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of

Advice
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
closed correctly.
the central locking system. There are several
methods, depending on the vehicle equip- Anti-theft alarm system*
ment: Accidental lock-out
If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-
The central locking system prevents you from
● key with remote control ››› page 119, ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-

Operation
and visible alarm.
● lock on driver door (emergency opening ing situations:
›››  page 11) or The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-
● interior central locking switch ››› page 120. switched on when locking the vehicle. It
switches off when the vehicle is unlocked not be locked with the central locking switch
from a distance. ››› page 120.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only

Emergencies
When you lock the vehicle with the key, the When the driver door is unlocked with the Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
doors and the rear lid are locked. When you key, you should switch on the ignition within when all the doors and the rear lid have been
open the door, you can either unlock only the 15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig- closed. This prevents the accidental locking
driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select gered. On some export versions, the alarm is of the vehicle.
the required option, use Easy Connect* triggered immediately when you open a door.
››› page 120. Note
To deactivate the alarm, press the button 
on the remote control key, or switch on the ● Never leave any valuable items in the vehi-

Safety
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* ignition. After a certain time, the alarm will cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a
automatically switch off. safe.
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and
● If the diode on the driver door sill lights up
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed
of about 15 km/h (10 mph).
Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is »
tow-away protection if you wish to prevent

117
 Operation

locked, the central locking system or anti- a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
theft alarm* is not working properly. You eral times, such as in convenience opening.
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi- If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
cial Service or specialised workshop.
up when the button is pressed, replace the
● The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti- key's battery ››› page 121.
theft alarm* system will only function as in-
tended if the windows and the sunroof* are
Unfolding and folding the key shaft
closed.
Press button 1 ››› Fig. 130 or ››› Fig. 131 to
unlock and unfold the key shaft.
Car key Fig. 131 Vehicle key with alarm button To fold the shaft away, press button 1 and
fold the key shaft in until it locks in place.
Vehicle key
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be Alarm button*
locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 117. Only press alarm button 2 in the event of an
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- emergency! When the alarm button is press-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote nals are switched on for a short time. When
control and new battery is several metres the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm
around the vehicle. is switched off.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- Spare key

Fig. 130 Vehicle key cle using the remote control key, this should
be re-synchronised ››› page 122 or the bat- To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
tery changed ››› page 121. the vehicle chassis number is required.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may Each new key contains a microchip which
be used. must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
Control lamp on the vehicle key work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, true for keys which are specially cut for the
the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 130 (arrow) vehicle.
once briefly, but if the button is held down for

118
 Opening and closing

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be against overloading. The vehicle is then un- ● Other functions of the remote control key

Technical data
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- locked. Lock it if necessary. ››› page 126, Convenience opening/closing.
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchron- Unlocking/Locking by remote control Selective unlocking system
ised before use ››› page 122.
Read the additional information carefully The selective unlocking system allows you to
CAUTION ›››  page 11 only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank

Advice
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com- flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ponents. Protect them from damage, impacts locked.
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
and humidity. rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
Unlocking the driver door and tank flap
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
Note remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is – Press button  on the remote control key
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if once, or turn the key once to open.

Operation
● Only use the key button when you require
the corresponding function. Pushing the but-
you press the button  for at least one sec-
ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlock ond. Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos- tank flap simultaneously.
In vehicles with a security central locking
sible even when you are outside the radius of feature (selective unlocking of side doors) – Within 5 seconds, press button  on the
action. ››› page 119, when the button  is pressed remote control key twice, or turn the key to
● Key operation can be greatly influenced by open twice within 5 seconds.

Emergencies
once, only the driver door and the fuel tank
overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle flap are unlocked. When the button is press-
working in the same range of frequencies, for ed a second time, all the vehicle doors are The anti-theft security system* and the anti-
example, radio transmitters or mobile tele- unlocked. theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you
phones. unlock only the driver door, without unlock-
● Obstacles between the remote control and WARNING ing the other doors.
the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-
charged batteries can considerably reduce Observe the safety warnings ››› in Doors on
page 11. gramme the security central locking system

Safety
the range of the remote control.
directly ››› page 120.
● If the buttons of the vehicle key are press-
ed ››› Fig. 130 or ››› Fig. 131 or one of the cen- Note
tral locking buttons ››› page 120 is pressed ● Do not use the remote control key until the
repeatedly in short succession, the central vehicle is visible.
locking briefly disconnects as protection
119
 Operation

Programming the central locking sys- With the Driver setting, when you press the ● In the event of an accident in which the air-
tem  button on the remote control key only the bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
door on the driver's side is unlocked. If that be automatically unlocked to facilitate access
You can use Easy Connect* to select which button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and assistance.
doors are unlocked with the central locking and the rear lid will be unlocked.
system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect* WARNING
In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the
system, you can select whether the vehicle key in the door lock, in the direction of open- ● The central locking switch also operates
automatically closes with the “Auto Lock” ing, twice within 2 seconds. when the ignition is switched off and auto-
programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h matically locks all the vehicle doors when the
(10 mph). If the button  is pressed, all the vehicle button  is pressed.
doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- ● The central locking switch does not operate
Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve- mation signal* is heard. if the vehicle is locked from the outside and
hicles with Easy Connect) Auto Lock/Locking while driving. If the anti-theft security system is switched on.
– Select: control button Systems or Vehi- you select on, all the vehicle doors are ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an
cle systems > Vehicle settings > locked at speeds above 15 km/h (10 mph). emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Central locking > Unlocking doors. Do not leave anyone, especially children, in
the vehicle.
Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with Central locking switch
radio) Note
– Select: SETUP button > control button 
Read the additional information carefully The doors and the tailgate are locked auto-
Central locking > Locking while
›››  page 11 matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
driving. about 15 km/h (Auto Lock) ››› page 117. You
Please note the following when using the
can unlock the vehicle again using button 
central locking switch to lock your vehicle: on the central locking switch.
Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with
Easy Connect) ● It is not possible to open the doors or the
– Select: control button Systems or Vehi-
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
cle systems > Vehicle settings >
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). Anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
Locking while driving. ● The LED in the central locking switch lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked. The following message is displayed on the in-
Unlocking doors You can choose to un- ● You can open the doors individually from strument panel to remind the driver that
lock all the doors or only the driver door when the vehicle is closed from the outside,
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
when you unlock the vehicle. In all the op- the anti-theft security system is switched on.
tions, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.  Do not forget the Safelock.
120
 Opening and closing

Please see Instruction Manual. The Replacing the battery Changing the battery

Technical data
vehicle cannot be opened from inside. This ● Unfold the vehicle key shaft ››› page 118.
makes it more difficult for unauthorised per-
● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
sons to break into the vehicle ››› in Doors
on page 11. hicle key ››› Fig. 132 in the direction of the ar-
row ››› .
The anti-theft security system can be switch- ● Extract the battery from the compartment
ed off each time the vehicle is locked:
using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 133.
● Turn the key a second time to the lock posi- ● Place the new battery in the compartment

Advice
tion, in the door lock, for the next two sec- as shown ››› Fig. 133, pressing in the oppo-
onds. If necessary, remove the protective cov- site direction to that shown by the arrow
er on the driver door handle ›››  page 11 ››› .
or else Fig. 132 Vehicle key: opening the battery ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 132, pressing
● Press  on the remote control key for a compartment it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite

Operation
second time for the following 2 seconds. direction to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
The flashing frequency of the diode in the
door sill immediately confirms the process. CAUTION
Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence
● If the battery is not changed correctly, the
for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues vehicle key may be damaged.

Emergencies
flashing slowly. ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
● When fitting the battery, check that the po-
Fig. 133 Vehicle key: removing the battery
larity is correct.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised

Safety
workshop to replace the battery. For the sake of the environment

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- Please dispose of your used batteries correct-
cle key, under a cover. ly and with respect for the environment.

121
 Operation

Synchronising the vehicle key The childproof lock prevents the rear doors The childproof lock can be activated or deac-
from being opened from the inside. This sys- tivated by inserting the key in the groove
If the button  is pressed frequently outside tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- when the door is open, as described above.
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- cidentally while the vehicle is running.
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
This function is independent of the vehicle
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
electronic opening and locking systems. It Anti-theft alarm system*
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
● Unfold the vehicle key shaft ››› page 118. ted and deactivated manually, as described Description
below:
● If necessary, remove the cover from the
driver door lever ›››  page 11. The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
Activating the childproof lock break into the vehicle or steal it.
● Press the button  on the vehicle key. For
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
this, it must remain with the vehicle.
which you wish to activate the childproof on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
● Open the vehicle within one minute using
lock.
the key shift. The key has been synchronised. ● The turn signal light will flash twice on
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
● If necessary, fit the cap. opening and deactivating the alarm.
the door using the ignition key, clockwise
for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 134 and ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
anti-clockwise for the right hand side ing and activating the alarm.
Childproof lock doors.
3 Applies to vehicles with 5 doors: When does the system trigger an alarm?
Deactivating the childproof lock The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door about 30 seconds accompanied by sound
whose childproof lock you want to deacti- and optical (flashing) warning signals and
vate. will be repeated about ten times when the
vehicle is locked and the following unauthor-
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
ised actions are attempted:
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 134 ● Opening a door that is mechanically un-
and clockwise for the right hand side locked using the vehicle key without switch-
doors. ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in
certain markets, such as the Netherlands,
Once the childproof lock is activated, the there is no 15 second waiting time and the
Fig. 134 Childproof lock on the left hand side
door can only be opened from the outside.
door.
122
 Opening and closing

alarm is activated immediately on opening for a long period of time. The alarm system Activation

Technical data
the door). remains activated. – It is automatically switched on when the
● A door is opened. ● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- anti-theft alarm is activated.
● The bonnet is opened. other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been Deactivation
● The rear lid is opened.
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
● When the ignition is switched on with a – Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
non-authorised key. chanically or by pressing the  button on
the vehicle is locked from within using the
the remote control. The time period from
central locking button  .

Advice
● When the vehicle battery is disconnected. when the door is opened until the key is in-
● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles ● If the driver door is unlocked mechanically serted in the contact should not exceed 15
with interior monitoring ››› page 124). with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-
the rest of the doors remain locked. Only
● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with gered.
when the ignition has been turned on will the
anti-tow system ››› page 124). other doors be available - but not unlocked - – Press the button  on the remote control
and the central lock button will be activated. twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-

Operation
● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
anti-tow system ››› page 124). ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat sors will be deactivated. The alarm system
● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- remains activated.
rectly.
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 124). ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
tow system are automatically switched on
the battery is disconnected or not working for
● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft again next time the vehicle is locked.

Emergencies
any reason.
alarm system is disconnected.
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
the battery cables is disconnected while the sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
How to turn OFF the alarm alarm system is active. ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid the rear lid must be closed.
key. Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
tow system* monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must

Safety
Note
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
● After 28 days, the indicator light will be It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- if not, they will be automatically switched on.
switched off to prevent the battery from ex- rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
unauthorized vehicle entry by means of ultra-
tow system should be switched off if animals
sound.
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, »
123
 Operation

their movements will trigger the alarm) or ● The vibration of a mobile phone left inside gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-
when, for example, the vehicle is transported the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-
or has to be towed with only one axle on the monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors tection.
ground. react to movements and shakes inside the ve-
– To switch off the vehicle interior monitoring
hicle.
False alarms and tow-away protection, switch off the ig-
● If on activating the alarm, any door or the nition and press button ››› Fig. 135. The in-
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa- dicator on the button will light up.
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the
serve related legal requirements. anti-tow system will only be activated once – When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
all the doors are closed (including the rear interior monitoring and the tow-away pro-
The following cases may cause a false alarm: lid). tection are switched off until the next time
● Open windows (partially or fully). the door is opened.
● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
completely).
Deactivating the vehicle interior moni- ››› page 120 is switched off, the vehicle interi-
toring and anti-tow systems* or monitoring and the tow-away protection
● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from are automatically switched off.
the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
WARNING
Note Observe the safety warnings ››› in Doors on
● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is page 11.
activated without the volumetric sensor func-
tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all
its functions, except the volumetric sensor.
This function is reactivated when the alarm is Rear lid (luggage compart-
switched on again, unless it is deliberately ment)
switched off.
Fig. 135 Vehicle interior monitoring/tow-
● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- Tailgate automatic lock
away protection button.
metric sensor, this will be indicated by a
flashing of the warning lamp on the driver Where the vehicle has been locked by press-
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be
triggered if movements are detected in the ing the  button on the remote control with
different to the flash indicating the alarm is
interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in- the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-
activated.
clination is changed (e.g. during transport). matically when closed.
You can prevent the alarm from being trig-
124
 Opening and closing

The automatic tailgate locking time extension Electric windows ger door has been opened and the key has

Technical data
function can be activated. Where this func- not been removed from the ignition.
tion is activated and once the rear lid has
Opening and closing of the electric
been unlocked by pressing the  button on Safety switch * (only in 5-door vehicles)
the remote control key ››› page 119, the rear windows*
Safety switch 5 on the driver door can be
lid can be re-opened for a certain length of
used to disable the electric window buttons
time.
in the rear doors.
Where required, the automatic tailgate lock-
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear

Advice
ing time extension function can be activated
doors are activated.
or deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service,
which will provide all the necessary informa- Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
tion. are deactivated.
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there The safety control symbol  lights up in yel-
is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. low if the buttons on the rear door are switch-

Operation
Therefore, we recommend you always lock ed off.
the vehicle by pressing the  button on the Fig. 136 Detail of the driver door: controls for
remote control or by using the central locking the windows (5-door vehicle with front and Note
button. rear electric windows).
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win-
Read the additional information carefully dow will automatically open again

Emergencies
›››  page 14 ››› page 125. If this happens, check why the
The front and rear electric windows can be window could not be closed before attempt-
operated by using the controls on the driver ing to close it again.
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
Roll-back function
Always close the windows fully if you park
the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› in

Safety
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
Electric windows* on page 15. jury when the electric windows close.
You can use the electric windows for approx. ● If a window is obstructed when closing au-
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
tomatically, the window stops at this point
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
and lowers immediately ››› . »
125
 Operation

● Next, check why the window does not close Convenience open function WARNING
before attempting it again. – Press and hold button  on the remote ● Take care when closing the sliding/tilting
● If you try within the following 10 seconds control key until all the windows and the sunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suf-
and the window closes again with difficulty sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached the fering injury.
or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- desired position, or ● For safety reasons, you should only use the
ing will stop working for 10 seconds. remote control open and close functions with-
– First unlock the vehicle using button  on
● If the window is still obstructed, the win- the remote control key and then keep the in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in-
dow will stop at this point. key in the driver door lock until all the win- juries, always keep an eye on the windows
and the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press-
● If there is no obvious reason why the win- dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have
ing the button to close them. The windows
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by reached the required position.
stop moving as soon as the button is re-
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- leased.
dow closes with maximum force. The roll- Convenience close function
back function is now deactivated. – Press and hold button  on the remote
● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window control key until all the windows and the One-touch opening and closing*
will open fully when you operate one of the sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed ››› , or
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. One-touch opening and closing means you
– Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock"
position until all the windows and the slid- do not have to hold down the button.
WARNING
ing/tilting sunroof* are closed. Buttons ››› Fig. 136 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Electric
two positions for opening windows and two
windows* on page 15. Programming convenience opening in the for closing them. This makes it easier to open
● The roll-back function does not prevent fin- Easy Connect* and close windows to the desired position.
gers or other parts of the body getting
– Select: function button CAR > control but-
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
ton Vehicle systems* > Car settings One-touch closing
accident.
> Central locking > Open the win- – Pull up the window button briefly up to the
dow by holding button down or else second position. The window closes fully.
> Front window on/off or else Roof
Convenience opening/closing on/off*. One-touch opening
Use the convenience opening/closing func- – Push down the window button briefly up to
tion to easily open/close all the windows and the second position. The window opens
the sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside. fully.

126
 Opening and closing

Restoring one-touch opening and closing door and the front passenger door are not Opening and closing the sun blind*

Technical data
The automatic open and close function will opened. 3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds
not work if the battery has been temporarily
disconnected. The function can be restored CAUTION
as follows: Check that when the rear lid is open, it does
not touch loads carried on the roof. When a
– Close the window as far as it will go by lift-
roof carrier is fitted, DO NOT open the panor-
ing and holding the electric window switch. amic roof*.
– Release the switch and then lift it again for

Advice
1 second. This will re-enable the automatic Note
function.
● Leaves and other loose objects that accu-
If you push (or pull) a button to the first mulate on the sun roof rails should be regu-
stage, the window will open (or close) until larly cleaned away either by hand or with a
vacuum. Fig. 137 On the interior roof lining: switches
you release the button. If you push or lift the

Operation
for the sun blind.
button briefly to the second stage, the win- ● In case of a fault in the operation of the
dow will open (one-touch opening) or close panoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap func-
(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op- tion will not operate correctly. Contact a spe- Function Action
erate the button while the window is opening cialised workshop.
Opening com-
or closing, it stops at this position. pletely (automatic Press button ››› Fig. 137 1 briefly.
function)

Emergencies
Stop automatic Press button 1 or button 2

Panoramic sliding sunroof* operation briefly.

To set the inter- Press button 1 or button 2 until

Opening or closing the panoramic mediate position the correct position is set.
sliding sunroof Closing complete-
ly (automatic Press the button 2 briefly.
Read the additional information carefully

Safety
function)
›››  page 15
Once the ignition has been switched off, you
The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work
can still open or close the sun blind for a few
with the ignition on. It can be opened or
minutes provided the driver door and the
closed for a few minutes after the ignition
front passenger door are not opened.
has been switched off, provided the driver
127
 Operation

Convenience closing of the panoramic ● Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof ● Nobody should be in the way of the panor-
sliding sunroof or the sun blind does not close. amic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especially
● Try and close them again. when they are closed without the anti-trap
The panoramic sliding sunroof can be function.
● If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun
opened or closed from outside the vehicle ● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-
blind is still obstructed, it will stop at the cor-
using the vehicle key: gers or other parts of the body getting
responding position. Close it without the an-
pinched against the window frame and caus-
● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but- ti-trap function.
ing injury.
ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroof
is adjusted or closes. Closing without the roll-back function
Note
● Release the unlock or lock button to stop ● The switch should be in the “closed posi-
the function. tion” ›››  page 15 1 . The anti-trap function is activated if the win-
dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof are
● Panoramic sliding sunroof: Within five sec-
During convenience closing, the windows closed from the outside of the vehicle using
onds of triggering the anti-trap function, pull the ignition key for convenience closing
and the panoramic sliding sunroof close at
the control all the way back ›››  page 15 ››› page 126.
the same time.
(arrow 5 ) until the panoramic sliding sun-
roof closes fully.
Note
● Sun blind: Within five seconds of triggering
The rotary button of the panoramic sliding
the anti-trap function, press button
sunroof remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience clos-
››› Fig. 137 2 until the sun blind closes fully.

ing from outside the vehicle, and will have to ● The panoramic sliding sunroof and sun
be re-positioned the next time you drive. blind close without the anti-trap function.
● If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannot
be closed, visit a specialised workshop.
Roll-back function of the panoramic
sliding sunroof and the sun blind* WARNING
Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun
The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in- blind without the anti-trap function can cause
jury when opening and closing the panoram- serious injuries.
ic sliding sunroof and sun blind ››› . When ● Always close the panoramic sliding sunroof
it encounters an obstacle while closing, it carefully.
rolls back and opens again.

128
 Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility With the daylight driving lights on, only these Convenience turn signals

Technical data
lights switch on ››› . For the convenience turn signals, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
Lights The daytime driving lights switch on every
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
time the ignition is switched on, if the switch
is in positions  or , according to the level will flash three times.
Side light and dipped beam headlight
of exterior lighting. The convenience turn signals are activated
Read the additional information carefully When the light switch is in position , a and deactivated in the Easy Connect system
›››  page 29 light sensor automatically switches dipped via the  key and the Setup function button

Advice
beam on and off (including the control and ››› page 112.
The legal requirements regarding the use of
vehicle lights in each country must be ob- instrument lighting) or the daytime driving In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
served. lights depending on the level of exterior ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
lighting. a specialised workshop.
The driver is personally responsible for the
correct use and adjustment of the lights in all WARNING Note

Operation
situations. ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road
● If the convenience turn signals are operat-
is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- ing (three flashes) and the other convenience
Audible warnings to advise the driver that ditions. Daytime lights do not provide
the lights have not been switched off turn signals are switched on, the active part
enough light to illuminate the road properly stops flashing and only flashes once in the
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver or be seen by other road users. new part selected.
door is open, an audible warning signal is ● The rear lights do not come on with the

Emergencies
● The turn signal only works when the igni-
heard in the following cases: this is a remind- daytime driving light. A vehicle which does tion is switched on. The hazard warning
er to turn off the lights. not have the rear lights on may not be visible lights also work when the ignition is switch-
to other drivers in the darkness, in the case ed off.
● When the parking light is on ››› page 129. of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibili-
ty. ● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the
● When the light switch is in position  or control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn
. signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash
at double speed.

Safety
Turn signal and main beam lever ● The main beam headlights can only be
Daytime running lights switched on if the dipped beam headlights
Read the additional information carefully are already on.
›››  page 29 ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the
The daytime driving lights consist of individu-
al lights, integrated in the front headlights. Push the lever all the way down to turn off headlights, tail lights and turn signals may »
the corresponding function.
129
 Operation

mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and ● The automatic dipped beam control () Switching the main beam assist on and off
in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle only switches on the dipped beam when
Func- Action
lighting system. there are no changes in brightness, and not,
for example when it is foggy. tion
– Switch the ignition on and turn the light
Automatic headlight control (AHC) switch to position .
Acti- – From the base position, move the main
 Main beam assist* vate: beam and turn signal lever forwards
 ››› page 129. When the warning lamp  is
The automatic dipped beam control is merely ››› table on page 2 displayed on the instrument panel display,
intended as an aid and is not able to recog- the main beam assist is switched on.
nise all driving situations. Main beam assist (Light Assist)
– Switch off the ignition.
When the light switch is in position , the The main beam assist acts within the limits – OR: turn the light switch to a different posi-
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and of the system and depending on environmen- tion to  ››› page 129.
To
tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on, – OR: with main beam on, move the main
switch lighting switch on and off automatical- switch
beam and turn signal lever backwards.
ly in the following situations ››› in Daytime the system is activated as of a speed of system
off: – OR: move the main beam and turn the sig-
running lights on page 129: about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated nal lever forwards to manually switch the
below about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› . main beam on. The main beam assist will then
Automatic switching Automatic switching be deactivated.
When the system is activated and the camera
on off detects other vehicles that may be dazzled,
the main beam is automatically switched off. Malfunctions
The photo sensor detects When adequate lighting is
darkness, for example, detected. Otherwise, the main beam is automatically The following conditions may prevent the
when driving through a switched on. main beam headlight control from turning off
tunnel. the headlights in time or from turning off al-
The main beam assist generally detects illu-
The rain sensor detects When the windscreen wip- minated areas and deactivates the main together:
rain and activates the ers have been inactive for beam when passing through a town, for ex-
windscreen wipers. a few minutes. ● In poorly lit towns with highly reflective
ample.
signs.
WARNING ● Other insufficiently lit road users (such as
pedestrians or cyclists).
If the road is not well lit and other road users
cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, ● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)
accidents may occur. and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob-
scured.
130
 Lights and visibility

● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- cle lighting system, for example, if additional ● Switching on front fog lights* : pull the

Technical data
cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard headlights are installed. light switch to the first point 1 , from posi-
rail in the centre of the road. tions ,  or .
● If the camera is damaged or the power sup- CAUTION ● Switching on the rear fog light : com-
ply is cut off. pletely pull the light switch 2 from position
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- ,  or .
● In fog, snow and heavy rain. tem, take the following points into considera-
● With dust and sand turbulence. tion: ● To switch off the fog lights, press the light
● Clean the field of vision of the camera regu- switch or turn it to position .
● With loose gravel in the field of vision of

Advice
the camera. larly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.
● When the field of vision of the camera is ● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
era. Cornering lights*1)
misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,
ice, etc. ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the field of vision of the camera. When turning slowly or on very tight bends,
the cornering lights are activated automati-

Operation
WARNING
cally. The cornering lights may be integrated
The convenience features of the main beam Note
in the fog lights and are switched on only at
assist should not encourage the taking of Main beam and headlight flasher can be speeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
risks. The system is not a replacement for turned on and off manually at any time with
driver concentration. the turn signal and main beam lever When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering
● You are always in control of the main beam ››› page 129. lights on both sides of the vehicle switch on,

Emergencies
and adapting it to the light, visibility and traf- in order to better illuminate the area for park-
fic conditions. ing.
● It is possible that the main beam headlight Fog lights
control does not recognise all driving situa-
tions and is limited under certain circumstan- Function “Coming home”
ces. The warning lamps  or  also show, on the
light switch or instrument panel, when the This function may be connected/disconnec-
● When the field of vision of the camera is
fog lights are on. ted through the radio menu. The “Coming
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the

Safety
main beam control may be affected. This also Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay time
applies when changes are made to the vehi- may also be set (default: 30 sec). »

1) This function is not available on vehicles equipped

with full-LED headlights.

131
 Operation

Vehicle with In the “Coming Home” function, the day- ● When the car door is opened, the “Coming Vehicle with In the “Leaving Home” function, the dip-
halogen time running lights (DRL), the rear side Home” lighting comes on. The headlights are full-LED ped beams, the daytime running lights
headlights lights and the licence plate lights are turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door headlights (DRL), the rear side lights and the li-
turned on. is opened. cence plate lights are switched on.

Vehicle with In the “Coming Home” function, the dip-

full-LED ped beams and the daytime running Deactivation Activation
headlights lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the ● If no door has been closed, they go out au- ● When the vehicle is unlocked using the re-
licence plate lights are switched on.
tomatically after 60 seconds. mote control.
● After the last door has been closed, the ● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
Automatic* activation of “Coming Home”
headlights will be switched off after the ted when the rotary light switch is in position
For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota- “Coming Home” delay (as established in the  and the light sensor detects darkness.
ry light switch in position ). radio menu) has elapsed.
● Switch off the engine and remove the key ● On turning the light switch to position  Deactivation
from the ignition with the rotary light switch ›››  page 29. ● When the “Leaving Home” delay period
in position  ›››  page 29. ● When the ignition is switched on (when ends (default: 30 sec).
● The automatic “Coming Home” function is starting the engine). ● When the vehicle is locked using the re-
only active when the light sensor detects mote control.
darkness. ● When the light control is switched into a
● When the car door is opened, the “Coming Function “Leaving Home” position other than .
Home” lighting comes on. ● With the ignition is switched on.
The “Leaving Home” function is only availa-
ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor
Manual “Coming Home” activation
(rotary light switch in position ).
For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-
ry light switch without position ). This function may be connected/disconnec-
ted through the radio menu. The “Leaving
● Switch off the engine and remove the key Home” function switch-off delay may also be
from the ignition. set (default: 30 sec).
● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
Vehicle with In the “Leaving Home” function, the day-
mately 1 second.
halogen time running lights (DRL), the rear side
● Activated for any position of the rotary light headlights lights and the licence plate lights are
switch. switched on.

132
 Lights and visibility

Hazard warning lights  6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten- Parking lights

Technical data
tion of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when When the parking light is switched on, (right
you leave the vehicle. or left turn signal), the front side light and
the rear light on the corresponding side of
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on-
the hazard warning lights are switched on. ly be activated with the ignition switched off
The two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the turn signal and main beam lever in
and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will the central position, before being triggered.

Advice
flash at the same time. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off. Parking light on both sides
Fig. 138 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-
ing lights. Emergency braking warning
With the ignition switched off and the light

Operation
If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continu- switch in position , when locking the vehi-
Read the additional information carefully
ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 cle from the outside, the parking lights on
›››  page 30 mph), the brake light flashes several times both sides of the vehicle light up. In doing
The hazard warning lights are used to draw per second to warn vehicles driving behind. If so, only the side lights of both headlights
the attention of other road users to your vehi- you continue braking, the hazard warning light up, and additionally the tail lights will
cle in emergencies. lights will come on automatically when the do so partially.

Emergencies
vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
If your vehicle breaks down:
automatically when the vehicle starts to
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from move again.
Motorway light*
moving traffic.
Note
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard The motorway light is available on vehicles
warning lights ››› in Hazard warning ● The battery will run down if the hazard
equipped with full-LED lights.
lights on page 30. warning lights are left on for a long time,
even if the ignition is switched off. The function is connected/disconnected via

Safety
3. Switch the ignition off. the corresponding Easy Connect system
● The use of the hazard warning lights de-
4. Apply the handbrake. scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- menu. »
tory requirements.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
for an automatic gearbox, move the gear
lever to P.
133
 Operation

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h for Note Headlight range control
more than 30 seconds, the dipped beam rai- The headlight range control ››› Fig. 139 is
ses slightly to increase the distance of “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are planning a long stay in a country that modified according to the value of the head-
visibility of the driver. light beam and the vehicle load status. This
drives on the other side, you should take the
● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to offers the driver optimum visibility and the
the car below 100 km/h, the dipped beam re- change the headlights. headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers
turns to its normal position. ››› .
The headlights can only be adjusted when
Headlight range control, lighting of the dipped beam is switched on.
Driving abroad the instrument and control panel To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 139:
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the road on which Value Vehicle load statusa)
you are driving is lit more intensely.
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
–
When a car that is manufactured in a country ment empty
that drives on the right travels to a country
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- 1
empty
mally necessary to cover part of the headlight
bulbs with stickers or to change the adjust- All seats occupied, luggage compartment
2
ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth- full With trailer and minimum drawbar load
er drivers. Driver only, luggage compartment full With
3
In such cases, the regulations specify certain Fig. 139 Next to the steering wheel: Head- trailer and maximum drawbar load
light values that must be complied with for light range control a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the
designated points of the light distribution. table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.
Lighting of the instrument panel, screens
This is known as “Tourist light”.
and controls*
Dynamic headlight range control
The light distribution that the halogen and
Depending on the model, lighting of the in-
full-LED headlights of the SEAT Leon range The control is not mounted in vehicles with
strument panel and controls can be adjusted
have allows the specific “tourist light” values dynamic headlight range control. The head-
in the Easy Connect system, using the button
to be met without the need for stickers or light range is automatically adjusted accord-
 and the function button SETUP
changes in the settings. ing to the vehicle load status when they are
›››  page 32. switched on.

134
 Lights and visibility

Instrument panel lighting Glove compartment and luggage compart- Note

Technical data
With the ignition on and without light activa- ment lighting*
The reading lights switch off when the vehi-
tion, the instrument panel lighting remains When opening and closing the glove com- cle is locked using a key or after several mi-
activated in daytime light conditions. The partment on the front passenger side and the nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.
lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- rear lid, the respective light will automatically This prevents the battery from discharging.
minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving switch on and off.
through a tunnel without the  function
active, the instrument panel lighting may Footwell lighting*
even switch off. The objective of this function Visibility

Advice
The lights in the footwell area below the dash
is to provide the driver with a visual indica-
(driver and front passenger sides) will switch
tion that he or she should activate the dip-
on when the doors are opened and will de- Sun visors
ped beam.
crease in intensity while driving. The intensity
of these lights can be adjusted using the ra-
WARNING
dio menu (see Easy Connect > Adjust-

Operation
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that ing Lighting > Interior lighting
the headlights dazzle and distract other driv- ›››  page 32).
ers. This could result in a serious accident.
● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load Ambient light*
status so that it does not blind other drivers.
The ambient light in the door panel changes
colour (white or red) depending on the driv-

Emergencies
ing mode. The intensity of these lights can be
Interior and reading lights1) adjusted using the radio menu (see Easy
Fig. 140 Sun visor
Connect > Adjusting Lights > In-
››› table on page 2 terior lighting ›››  page 32). Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
Read the additional information carefully senger sun visors:
›››  page 30 ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
»

Safety
screen.

1) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the

vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interior

lights: front courtesy light, rear courtesy light, foot-
well light and sun visor light.
135
 Operation

● The sun visor can be pulled out of its Sun blind* wipe before returning to the rest position.
mounting and turned towards the door 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST Ice, snow and other obstacles on the wind-
››› Fig. 140 1 . screen may damage the wiper and the wind-
● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- screen wiper motor.
gitudinally backwards. ● If necessary, remove snow and ice from the
windscreen wipers before starting your jour-
Vanity mirror light ney.
● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipers
There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on
from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer
the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is
spray for this operation.
opened 2 a light comes on.
● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed windscreen wipers while dry can cause dam-
back up. Fig. 141 Rear window: sun blind. age.
● In icy conditions, always check that the
WARNING Rear window sun blind* wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may
– Pull out the visor and hook it into the hooks
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-
● Always store sun blinds and visors in their in the centre of the top of the door frame
ers in service position ›››  page 70.
housing when not in use. ››› Fig. 141.
Note
Note
● The windscreen and window wipers only
The light above the sun visor automatically Windscreen wiper and window function when the ignition is switched on and
switches off after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the battery from
wiper systems the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
closed.
discharging.
Window wiper lever ● The interval wipe speed varies according to
the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is
Read the additional information carefully moving, the more often the windscreen is
›››  page 31 cleaned.
● The rear wiper is automatically switched on
CAUTION when the windscreen wiper is on and the car
is in reverse gear.
If the ignition is switched off with the wind-
screen wipers active, they complete their
136
 Lights and visibility

Windscreen wiper functions Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should

Technical data
be pulled towards the steering wheel when
Windscreen wiper performance in different sit- the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any
uations incrusted dirt (such as insects) should be
cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).
The activated position provision-
If the vehicle is at a To ensure the headlight washers work cor-
ally changes to the previous posi-
standstill rectly in winter, any snow which has got into
tion.
the bumper jet supports should be cleaned
The air conditioner comes on for

Advice
away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-
approximately 30 seconds in air
During automatic recirculation mode to prevent the
icing spray.
wipe smell of the windscreen washer Fig. 143 Rain sensor sensitive surface
fluid entering the inside the vehi- Note
cle. The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles
windscreen wiper intervals, depending on
Intervals between wipes depend that are on the windscreen. The wiper will
the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the

Operation
on the vehicle's speed. The high- stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path.
For the interval wipe
er the vehicle speed the shorter Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man-
the intervals. back on again. ual wipe ››› page 136.
Move the lever to the required position
Heated windscreen washer jets ››› Fig. 142:
The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it Rain sensor*

Emergencies
0 Rain sensor off.
does not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
When the ignition is switched on the heated
1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
windscreen washer jets automatically adjust sary.
the heat depending on the ambient tempera- A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
ture. – Set control to the right: highly sensi-
tive.
Headlight wash/wipe system – Set control to the left: less sensitive.

Safety
The headlight washers/wipers clean the
headlight lenses. When the ignition is switched off and then
back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts
After the ignition is switched on, the first and operating again when the windscreen wipers
every fifth time the windscreen washer is Fig. 142 Windscreen wiper lever: adjusting are in position 1 and the vehicle is travel-
switched on, the headlights are also washed. the rain sensor A ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). »
137
 Operation

Rain sensor modified behaviour Note CAUTION

Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen- In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 143 of sor regularly and check the blades for dam- rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid
the rain sensor include: age ››› Fig. 143 (arrow). may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces.
● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi-
● Damaged blades: a film of water on the ble.
mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.
damaged blades may lengthen the activation
time, reduce the washing intervals or result
in a fast and continuous wipe. Note

● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger Rear vision mirror ● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-
sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun
the windscreen wiper.
blind*, the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with
● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrors automatic setting will not operate perfectly.
roads may cause an extra long wipe when the ● When the interior lights are on or reverse
windscreen is almost dry. Read the additional information carefully
gear engaged, the rear vision mirrors do not
● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus ›››  page 19 darken with automatic adjustment for anti-
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may Your vehicle is fitted with an interior rear vi- dazzle position.
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or sion mirror with a manual or automatic* con-
make it react more slowly, later or not at all. trol for anti-dazzle position.
● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain Interior rear vision mirror with manual set-
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the ting for anti-dazzle position
reduction in the sensitive surface area and – Position the small lever of the lower edge
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen- of the mirror to face towards the rear.
sor will vary with the size of the damage
caused by the stone. WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
WARNING
rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain may leak. This could cause irritation to the
to switch on the wipers. skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually come into contact with this liquid, it must be
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- rinsed with large quantities of water. If neces-
bility. sary, get medial help.

138
 Lights and visibility

Adjusting the exterior rear view mir- ● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust- ● Select reverse gear.

Technical data
rors ment may need correcting. turn the control to ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror
position R1). so that you can see, for example, the kerb
● In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir- area well.
rors can be adjusted using the CAR button ● Release the reverse gear.
and the function button SETUP .
● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-
ror is stored.
Tilt function for front passenger exterior mir-
ror*

Advice
Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking
When parking backwards, and in order to be (convenience function)*
able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-
ror can be automatically tilted towards the The Easy Connect system, Menu CAR , func-
passenger to provide a better view of the tion “Rear view mirrors and windscreen wip-
Fig. 144 Driver door: control for the exterior kerb. The control must be in the position R1) ers” can be used to have the exterior mirrors
fold in when the vehicle is parked

Operation
mirror. for this feature to be operational.
››› page 112.
Read the additional information carefully The mirror returns to its original position as
When the vehicle is locked with the remote
›››  page 18 soon as you drive forwards at over 15 km/h
control, by pressing for more than approxi-
(10 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-
Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir- turns to its original position if the position of mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-
rors the control is adjusted. ded in automatically. When the vehicle is

Emergencies
opened with the remote control, the exterior
● In the Settings - Convenience menu,
mirrors are deployed automatically.
select whether or not the exterior mirrors Storing the rear view mirror settings for the
should move in synchronisation. tilt function
CAUTION
● Turn the knob to position L1). ● Switch the ignition on.
● If one of the mirror housings is knocked out
● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The ● Access the Easy Connect system, Menu of position (e.g. when parking), the mirrors
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the CAR , function “Rear view mirrors and wind- must first be fully retracted with the electric
screen wipers” and select “lower when re-

Safety
same time (synchronised). control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by
versing” ››› page 112. hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad-
● Select the R1) position on the control. juster function. »

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmet-

rical.
139
 Operation

● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic Seats and head restraints seats at a minimum of the next socket up
››› .
car wash, please make sure to retract the ex-
terior mirrors to prevent them from being
damaged. Electrically retractable exterior Adjusting the head restraint Adjusting the head restraints
mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand.
– To set the head restraint higher, grasp the
Always use the electrical power control. Adjusting the front head restraints sides with both hands and move it up-
wards, until you see it engage.
Note Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 17 – To set the head restraint lower down, press
If the electrical adjustment should fail to op- the 1 ››› Fig. 145 button and move it
erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by Adjust the head restraint ›››  page 17 so
downwards.
hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir- that as far as possible the top of the head re-
ror glass. straint is level with the top of your head.
When this is not possible, try to get as close Removing the head restraint
as possible to this position. To remove the head restraint, the correspond-
ing backrest must be partially folded forward.
– Unlock the backrest ››› page 144.
Adjusting the rear head restraints
– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-
rives to the top.
– Press the 1››› Fig. 145 button while at the
same time removing the head restraint
from the backrest ››› .
– Insert a screwdriver in the 2 ››› Fig. 145
position of the hole while at the same time
removing the head restraint from the back-
rest ››› .
– Move the backrest until it engages properly
Fig. 145 Rear centre head restraint: release ››› .
point.

When transporting people in the back seat,

place the head restraints of the occupied

140
 Seats and head restraints

Fitting the head restraint Seat functions The seat heating should not be engaged in

Technical data
To mount the external head restraints, the any of the following conditions:
corresponding backrest must be partially fol- Introduction ● The seat is unoccupied.
ded forward.
● The seat has a covering.
– Unlock the backrest ››› page 144. WARNING
● There is a child seat installed in the seat.
– Insert the head restraint bars into the Inappropriate use of the seat functions can
● The seat cushion is wet or damp.
guides until they perceptibly engage. It cause severe injuries.
● Assume the proper sitting position before ● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-
should not be possible to remove the head

Advice
restraint from the backrest. your trip and remain in it throughout. This al- er than 25 °C (77 °F).
so applies to the other occupants.
– Move the backrest until it engages properly Activate
● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other
››› . parts of the body away from the operating ra- Press the button  or . Seat heating is
dius and the adjustment of seats. switched on fully.
WARNING

Operation
● Please observe the general notes Adjusting the heating output
››› page 76. Seat heating Press the button  or  repeatedly until the
● Remove the rear head restraints only when
desired intensity level is reached.
it is necessary for the placement of a child
seat ››› page 87. After removing a child seat,
remount the head restraint immediately. Deactivating

Emergencies
Travelling with the head restraints removed Press the button  or  until all warning
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of lamps switch off.
severe injuries.
WARNING
People who, because of medications, paraly-
sis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) cannot
perceive pain or temperature, or have a limi-

Safety
Fig. 146 In the centre console: front seats
ted perception thereof, may suffer burns to
heating switch the back, buttocks or legs when using seat
heating, an occurrence that may entail a very
lengthy recovery period or from which it may
The seat cushions can be heated electrically
when the ignition is switched on. The back-
not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical »
rest is also heated in some versions.
141
 Operation

advice if you have doubts regarding your For the sake of the environment Folding down the passenger seat
health.
The seat heating should remain on only when
backrest*
● People with limited pain and temperature needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
thresholds must never use seat heating. waste.

WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad- Front centre armrest
versely affect the operation of the seat heat-
ing, increasing the risk of burns. The centre armrest can be adjusted to various
● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to levels.
using the seat heater.
Adjusting the centre armrest
● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp. – To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the
● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp starting position so that it is engaged.
Fig. 147 Front passenger seat: lever for fold-
on the seat. – To return the armrest to the starting posi- ing down the backrest.
● Do not spill liquid on the seat. tion, remove the armrest from the upper
fixed position and lower it. The front passenger seat can be folded down
to increase the storage space.
CAUTION
The armrest can be moved backwards and
● To avoid damaging the heating elements of forwards. ● Pull lever 1 ››› Fig. 147 and push the seat
the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the backrest until the backrest is horizontal.
seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point
on the seat cushion or backrest. WARNING
● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma- When the front passenger seat is folded
terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage down it cannot be occupied.
the seat heating.
● In the event of smells, switch off the seat
heating immediately and have it inspected by
a specialised workshop.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

142 огромный архив документации по автомобилям Volkswagen, Skoda, Seat, Audi
 Seats and head restraints

folding down and raising the rear seat Folding the backrest forwards compartment will not fly forward through the

Technical data
backrest – Place the side seat belts in the trim clip interior during sudden braking.
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC ››› Fig. 148.
– Slide the head restraint(s) downwards CAUTION
››› page 140. ● With the backrest inclined there is a danger
of damaging the rear head restraints when
– Press the release lever ››› Fig. 149 1 in the
adjusting the front seats backwards.
direction of the arrow.
● When folding the backrest forwards, make

Advice
– Fold the backrest forwards. sure to place the side seat belts in the trim
clip to prevent them from being damaged by
Converting the table to a seat becoming trapped in the backrest lock.
– Raise the backrest until it engages in its
upright position ››› . The red marking on
the tab ››› Fig. 149 2 should no longer be

Operation
Fig. 148 Clip to support the seat belt.
visible when the backrest is properly se-
cured.

WARNING
The safe driving chapter contains important

Emergencies
information, tips, suggestions and warnings
that you should read and observe for your
own safety and the safety of your passengers
››› page 72.

WARNING
Fig. 149 Backrest release lever. ● Make sure that the rear backrest is securely

Safety
locked in position so that the seat belt can
The backrests can be folded forward individu- provide proper protection on the centre rear
ally or together. seat.
● The rear backrest must always be securely
latched so that objects stored in the luggage

143
 Operation

Folding down and lifting the rear seat When the rear seat backrest is lowered no- ● It should not be possible to see the red
backrest body else can travel in the corresponding mark of the unlock button 2 .
seats (not even a child). ● The backrest must be properly engaged.
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un- WARNING

lock button
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat
● Lower the head restraint properly. backrest is lowered or lifted without due care
● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 150 1 for- and attention.
wards and at the same time lift the backrest. ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
● The rear seat backrest is not engaged when while driving.
the red marking of the button 2 is visible. ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrest.
Lowering the rear seat backrest with the re- ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat back-
mote release lever rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
Fig. 150 On the rear seat backrest: release body parts out of its path.
catch 1 ; red mark 2 . ● Lower the head restraint properly.
● For the rear seat seat belts to offer the nec-
● Open the rear lid.
essary protection all the parts of the rear
● Pull the remote release lever of the left part backrest must be properly engaged. This is
››› Fig. 151 1 or right part 2 of the backrest particularly important in the case of the cen-
in the direction of the arrow. The released tre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat
part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto- whose backrest is not properly engaged they
matically down and forwards. will fly forward, along with the backrest, dur-
ing an accident or a sudden driving or braking
● If this occurs, close the rear lid. manoeuvre.
● A red signal on the button 2 warns that
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when
the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 150 2 the backrest is not engaged. Always check
that the red marking is not visible when the
is visible.
Fig. 151 In the luggage compartment: levers backrest is in the upright position.
for remote release of the left part 1 and right ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is
Folding up the rear seat backrest
part 2 of the rear seat backrest. not properly engaged nobody else can travel
● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the in the corresponding seats (not even a child).
The rear seat backrest is split and each part lock until it engages ››› .
be lowered separately to extend the luggage
compartment.
144
 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION Transport and practical ● Do not drive with the drawer cover open.

Technical data
There is an injury risk for passengers if the
Serious damage can be caused to the vehicle
and other objects if the rear seat backrest is
equipment cargo is released in case of sudden braking or
an accident.
lowered or lifted without due care and atten-
tion. Storage compartments
● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al-
ways adjust the front seats so that neither Storage areas under the front seats* Folding table*
the head restraints nor the cushions of the 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Advice
rear backrest can hit them.

Operation
Fig. 152 Storage compartment under the
front seats. Fig. 153 Left-hand front seat: folding table.

Emergencies
There is a storage compartment with a cover – To open the tray, open it up in the direction
under each front seat. of the arrow ››› Fig. 153.
The drawer* is opened by pulling on the cov-
WARNING
er ››› Fig. 152.
● The folding trays may not be folded down
To close the drawer, press the cover until it whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is
locks into position.

Safety
seated on the second row of seats. There is a
risk of injury during a sudden braking ma-
WARNING noeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed
● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in
1.5 kg. motion. »

145
 Operation

● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. WARNING Opening/closing

During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, ● Do not place any hot drinks in the drink – To open the glove compartment, pull the
sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink handle in the direction of the arrow.
holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinks
could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
could spill and cause burns, which may cause – To close the glove compartment, move the
an accident.
cover upwards until it engages.
CAUTION ● Do not use hard china cups or glasses.
When driving, do not leave open cans in the These could cause injury in the event of an Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD
cup holders. The drink might be spilt on brak- accident. player is located in the glove compartment.
ing, for example, and could damage the vehi- Separate operating instructions are enclosed
cle. CAUTION for this equipment in the corresponding In-
struction Manual.
You should avoid putting open drinks con-
tainers in the cup holders. The drinks could WARNING
Drink holders otherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g.
the electrical equipment or the seat covers. The cover of the glove compartment should
always be closed while driving. Failure to fol-
low this instruction could result in an acci-
dent.
glove compartment

Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compart-
ments and supports in other parts of the ve-
hicle:
Fig. 154 Centre console: front drink holders.
● In the top of the glove compartment in ve-
hicles that do not have a CD reader. The load
Front drink holders
of the compartment should not exceed
– Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 154. 1.2 kg.
Placement of two drinks is possible. There Fig. 155 Glove compartment ● In the centre console under the centre arm-
is also the possibility of placing larger plas-
rest*.
tic bottles in the trims of the doors.
● In the driver side panel there is a remova-
ble box for access to fuses and relays. The
146
 Transport and practical equipment

load of the compartment should not exceed Power sockets – Insert the plug of the electrical appliance

Technical data
0.2 kg. into the power socket.
● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› .
In the luggage compartment (applies only to
● Other storage compartments are found in
the LEON ST model)
the rear seat, to the left and the right of the
seats. – Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 157.
– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
WARNING into the power socket.

Advice
● Please make sure that any items of clothing
hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct Electrical equipment can be connected to the
your view to the rear. 12 volt power socket. The appliances connec-
● The coat hooks should only be used for ted to each power socket must not exceed a
Fig. 156 Centre console: front/rear 12-volt power rating of 120 Watt.
lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy power socket.
or sharp objects in the pockets.

Operation
WARNING
● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the
clothing, as this could interfere with the func- The power socket works only when the igni-
tion of the head-protection airbags. tion is on. Improper use may cause serious
injury or even fire. Children should therefore
not be left in the vehicle unattended if the
button is also left behind. Otherwise there is

Emergencies
a possibility that they may be injured.

CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid
Fig. 157 Detailed view of the side trim in the damaging the sockets.
luggage compartment: 12-volt power socket
(applies only to the LEON ST model). Note

Safety
In the centre console The use of electrical appliances with the en-
gine switched off will cause a battery dis-
– Remove the connector located in the centre charge.
console of the power socket ››› Fig. 156.

147
 Operation

Storing objects vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in- ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
creased risk of injury will be further increased ing rings are commercially available.
Loading the luggage compartment if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-
ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.
››› table on page 2 Luggage compartment cover
● Please note that the centre of gravity may
All luggage and other loose objects must be shift when transporting heavy objects; this 3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
safely secured in the luggage compartment. may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
could impair the driving safety or driving your speed and driving style accordingly, to
characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the avoid accidents.
centre of gravity. ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
compartment. vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- juries and damage to the vehicle.
ble in the luggage compartment. ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
– Place the heavy objects first. could climb into the luggage compartment, Fig. 158 Rear lid open with the luggage com-
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening closing the door behind them; they will be partment cover.
rings ››› page 153. trapped and run the risk of death.
● Never allow children to play in or around The luggage compartment cover blocks the
WARNING the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and view into the luggage compartment.
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are Removing
gage compartment could cause serious inju- no adults or children in the vehicle.
ries. – Remove the straps A and unfasten the
● Always stow objects in the luggage com- cover of the support B by pressing up-
Note wards in the direction of arrow 1 .
partment and secure them on the fastening
rings. ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce
● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- fogging of the windows. Used air escapes Fitting
jects. through ventilation slits in the side trim of – Insert the cover horizontally so that it coin-
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, cides with the “plate” on the axis of the
ventilation slots are never covered.
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring supports B and press down until it engag-
es.
148
 Transport and practical equipment

– Attach the straps to the rear lid A ››› . Fitting the rear shelf

Technical data
● Place the rear shelf in the housing provided
WARNING in the left side cover.
● The luggage compartment cover must al- ● Engage the support of the rear shelf
ways be fixed properly (risk of accident). ››› Fig. 160 1 in the right housing.
● The luggage compartment cover should not
● Check that the support ››› Fig. 160 1 is
be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on
this cover could cause injury to vehicle occu-
properly engaged.
pants in an accident or if the brakes are ap-

Advice
plied suddenly. WARNING
Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: remov- Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ing the rear shelf. ried on the rear shelf can cause serious injury
in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or
Retractable rear shelf
Opening the rear shelf in case of an accident.
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Operation
● Press the release catch of the rear shelf ● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
(press) until it is released ››› Fig. 159 1 . The or in bags on the rear shelf.
shelf will automatically move towards the ● Never carry animals on the rear shelf.
end and will retract completely.

Closing the rear shelf

Emergencies
● Pull the unfolded shelf evenly backwards.

Removing the rear shelf

● Press the support of the rear shelf
››› Fig. 160 1 in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 159 In the luggage compartment: closing
the rear shelf. ● Remove the rear shelf through the support
and upwards.

Safety
● The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-
gage compartment variable floor when the
latter is in the top position (except for vehi-
cles equipped with natural gas engine CNG)
››› page 150.
149
 Operation

Storing the rear shelf ● Press the rear shelf until it engages in its
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
housing ››› Fig. 162.
● Put the left and right covers in their original
position.

Storing the rear shelf

3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: hous-

ing for storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 161 In the luggage compartment: covers The rear shelf cannot be stored under the
for storing the rear shelf. luggage compartment variable floor.
● Remove covers ››› Fig. 163 A left and right.
● Press the head of the rear shelf in the direc-
tion of the arrow until it engages in its hous-
ing ››› Fig. 164.
Fig. 163 In the luggage compartment: hous-
ing for storing the rear shelf. ● Put the left and right covers in their original
position.

Fig. 162 In the luggage compartment: fitting

the storage compartment shelf.

The rear shelf cannot be stored under the

luggage compartment variable floor.
● Remove the left and right covers
››› Fig. 161.
150
 Transport and practical equipment

Use of the net partition behind the ● Hook in the net partition on the right side WARNING

Technical data
front seat* 3 (magnified image).
● Always secure objects, even when the net
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST ● Hook in the net partition in the left side partition is properly assembled.
housing 1 pulling the rod.
● There should be nobody behind the assem-
The net partition is properly assembled when bled partition when the vehicle is moving.
the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings 3 and 1 . CAUTION

Advice
Incorrect handling of the net partition could
Retracting the net partition cause damage.
● Unhook the rod from the housings 3 and ● Do not “release” the net partition when
1 . lowering it, as the net and other vehicle parts
● Roll up the net into the casing 4 lowering could be damaged. Roll down the net parti-
it with your hand. tion by hand.

Operation
Fig. 165 In the luggage compartment: pulling
out and securing the net partition. Removing the net partition
● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
● Press the left or right release catch
››› Fig. 166 in the direction of the arrow 1 .

Emergencies
● Remove the casing from the support in the
direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 166 2 .

Fitting the net partition

● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
● Fit the casing in the right and left supports.
Fig. 166 In the luggage compartment: remov- ● Press the casing into the left and right sup-

Safety
ing the net partition. ports in the opposite direction to the arrow
››› Fig. 166 2 until it engages.
Pulling out and securing the net partition
The red markings on the release buttons
● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 165 2 to remove the
should no longer be visible.
net from the casing 4 .
151
 Operation

Use of the net partition with the rear ● Remove the net partition from the side sup- Removing the net partition
seat backrests lowered ports. ● Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cm
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST ● Place the net casing in the rail slots in the in the opposite direction to the arrow
direction of the arrows ››› Fig. 167 1 . ››› Fig. 1672 .
● Push the casing towards the left side of the ● Remove the casing from the rails by pulling
vehicle in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 167 in the opposite direction to the arrows
2 and as far as it will go. ››› Fig. 1671 .
● Check that the net is secure. ● Lift the rear seat backrests.

Pulling out and securing the net partition WARNING

● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 168 2 to remove the During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-
net from the casing ››› Fig. 168 4 . vre, or in the event of an accident, objects
● Hook in the net partition on the right side
could be flung though the interior and cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Fig. 167 Assembling the net partition in the ››› Fig. 168 3 (magnified image).
rear seat backrests. ● Always secure objects, even when the net
● Hook in the net partition in the left side
partition is properly assembled.
housing ››› Fig. 168 1 pulling the rod.
● There should be nobody behind the assem-
The net partition is properly assembled when bled partition when the vehicle is moving.
the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings ››› Fig. 168 3 and WARNING
1 .
The rear seat backrests should only be lifted
again once the net partition has been disas-
Retracting the net partition sembled.
● Remove the rod from the housings in the
trims of the roof side members. CAUTION
● Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 168
Incorrect handling of the net partition could
4 lowering it with your hand. cause damage.
Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: net ● Do not “release” the net partition when
partition hooked into the rear seat backrests. lowering it, as the net and other vehicle parts
could be damaged. Roll down the net parti-
Fitting the net partition tion by hand.
● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
152
 Transport and practical equipment

Tailboard for transporting long items To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects Fastening rings*

Technical data
should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before
they are inserted through the tailboard.
When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-
el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard

● Lower the centre armrest.

Advice
● Pull the release lever in the direction of the
arrow and push the tailboard cover
››› Fig. 169
1 down and forwards.
Fig. 169 On the rear seat backrest: opening ● Open the rear lid. Fig. 171 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
the tailboard. ing rings (LEON/LEON SC model except ver-
● Insert the long objects through the gap
sions with spare wheel and CNG).

Operation
from the luggage compartment.
● Secure the objects with the seatbelt.
● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard

Emergencies
● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The
red mark on the luggage compartment side
should never be visible.
● Close the rear lid.

Fig. 170 In the luggage compartment: open- ● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
ing the tailboard. Fig. 172 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
Note ing rings (LEON ST model).

Safety
On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, The tailboard can also be opened from the
there is a tailboard for transporting long luggage compartment. To do so, press the re- In the front and rear part of the luggage com-
items in the interior, such as skis. lease lever down, in the direction of the ar- partment there are fastening rings to secure
row, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 170. the luggage ››› Fig. 172. »

153
 Operation

In order to use the fastening rings, they must ● The fastening rings are rendered unusable
be lifted beforehand1). for versions with spare wheel and CNG.

WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining Retaining hooks
straps are used, they could break in the event
of braking or an accident. Objects could then
be launched across the passenger compart-
ment and cause serious or fatal injuries.
● Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition. Fig. 174 In the luggage compartment: retain-
● Belts and retaining straps should be se- ing hooks (LEON ST model).
curely fastened to the fastening rings.
● Objects in the luggage compartment that At the rear of the luggage compartment, on
are unsecured could move suddenly and mod- the left and right, there are fixed retaining
ify the handling of the vehicle. hooks ››› Fig. 174.
● Secure all objects, little and large. Fig. 173 In the luggage compartment: retain- The retaining hooks have been designed to
● Never exceed the maximum tensile load of ing hooks (LEON/LEON SC model). secure light shopping bags.
the fastening ring when securing objects. In the front and rear part of the luggage com-
● Never secure a child seat to the fastening partment there are fastening rings to secure
rings. the luggage ››› Fig. 171 and ››› Fig. 172.

Note WARNING
● The maximum tensile load that the fasten- Never use the retaining hooks as fastening
ing rings can support is 3.5 kN. rings. In case of sudden braking or an acci-
dent, the hooks could break.
● Belts and securing systems for the appro-
priate load can be obtained from specialised
dealerships. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership for this.

1) Valid only for the LEON ST model.

154
 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION The luggage compartment prevents light lug- WARNING

Technical data
gage from moving. The net bag has a zip and
Each hook is designed for a maximum load of can be used to store small objects. To secure the elastic net bag on the fastening
2.5 kg. rings it must be stretched out. Once hooked
The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un-
compartment in different ways. hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause in-
juries.
Net bag*
Hooking the net bag into the luggage com- ● Always secure the net hooks properly so
partment floor that they do not suddenly release from the

Advice
fastening rings when hooking or unhooking
● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings
them.
››› Fig. 175 2 .
● On hooking or unhooking them, protect
● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
your eyes and face in case the hooks are re-
2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up- leased suddenly.
wards. ● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the

Operation
● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings described order. If a hook is unexpectedly re-
1 . leased the risk of injury is increased.

Hook the net bag next to the load threshold

Fig. 175 In the luggage compartment: net
bag hooked up at floor level (LEON ST model). ● Secure the short net hooks to the fastening
rings ››› Fig. 176 1 ››› . The bag zip should

Emergencies
be facing upwards.
● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag

The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .
● Remove the hooks and the net bag straps

Safety
from the fastening rings and from the bag
hooks.
● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-
Fig. 176 In the luggage compartment: rings ment.
1 and hooks 2 for securing the net bag
(LEON ST model).
155
 Operation

Luggage compartment variable floor ● Lift the variable floor using handle
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
››› Fig. 177 1 , pull it back and push the
backrest of the rear seat until the movable
part of the floor is resting on it.
● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 178
(arrows).

Luggage compartment variable floor

3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 180 Luggage compartment variable
floor: grooves tilted.

Fig. 177 Luggage compartment: variable Variable floor in the high position
floor ● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 179 1
and pull it back until the front of the floor has
fully passed the supports 2 .
● Move the floor forward over the supports as
far as the rear seat backrest and then lower
the floor with the handle 1 .

Fig. 179 Luggage compartment variable Variable floor in the low position
floor: positions.
● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 179 1
and pull it back until the front of the floor has
fully passed the supports 2 .
Fig. 178 Luggage compartment: variable ● Now match the front part with the lower
floor grooves of the supports and slide the floor
forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and
Variable floor in the tilted position lower the floor at the same time with the han-
When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- dle 1 .
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

156
 Transport and practical equipment

Variable floor in the tilted position ● Do not let the luggage compartment floor WARNING

Technical data
When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it
When heavy or bulky loads are transported
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area. downwards in a controlled manner. Other-
on the roof carrier system, car driving per-
wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage
formance is affected, as the centre of gravity
● Lift the variable floor using handle compartment could be damaged.
shifts and there is greater wind resistance.
››› Fig. 179 1 and pull it back until the front
● Always secure the load properly using belts
of the floor has fully passed the tilted Note or retaining straps that are suitable and in a
grooves ››› Fig. 180 3 .
SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure good condition.
● Run the floor through these grooves with

Advice
objects to retaining rings. ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-
the help of handle 1 as the rear seat back- ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of
rest and until the floor is resting in the gravity and driving performance.
grooves. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Roof carrier ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
WARNING
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-

Operation
During a sudden driving or braking manoeu- Introduction fic conditions.
vre, or in the event of an accident, objects
could be flung though the interior and cause The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
serious or fatal injuries. mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross CAUTION
● Always secure objects, even when the lug- bars or conventional roof carrier systems can- ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier
gage compartment floor is properly lifted. not be secured to the roof water drains. system before entering a car wash.

Emergencies
● Only objects that do not protrude more As the roof water drains are integrated in the ● Vehicle height is increased by the installa-
than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and
ried between the rear seat and the raised lug- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems the load secured on them. For this purpose,
gage compartment floor. check that your vehicle's height does not sur-
can be used.
● Only objects that do not weigh than ap- pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-
derpasses or for entering garage doors.
proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri-
the rear seat and the raised luggage compart- ● Cross bars, a roof carrier system and the
er system should be disassembled.
ment floor. load secured on them should not interfere

Safety
● When they are not used. with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the
● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. panoramic sun roof ››› page 127 and the rear
CAUTION lid.
● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
● The maximum weight that can be loaded on ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it
mum height, for example, in some garages.
the luggage compartment variable floor in does not knock into the roof load. »
the top position is 150 kg.
157
 Operation

For the sake of the environment rear attachment points 3 are marked on the
top edge of the glass with arrow heads
When cross bars and a roof carrier system are
››› Fig. 181 B.
installed, the increased air resistance means
that the vehicle uses more fuel.
LEON ST model
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-
Attach the cross bars of the roof carri- ings. The attachment points can be seen on
bottom of the roof railing ››› Fig. 182.
er system
WARNING
Fig. 182 Leon ST: attachment points for the
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
roof railings for the roof carrier system.
bars and the roof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof and
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe- cause an accident and injuries.
cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
● Always take the manufacturer assembly in-
special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
structions into account.
port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or
● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-
boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can
be acquired at SEAT dealerships. tem when they are in perfect condition and
are properly secured.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- ● Always secure the crossbars and the roof
rier system properly. Always take the assem- carrier system properly.
bly instructions that come with the crossbars ● Check threaded joints and attachments
and the roof carrier system in question into travelling and if necessary tighten them after
account. you have travelled a short distance. When
making long trips, check the threaded joints
LEON model whenever you stop for a rest.
The front and rear attachment points 1 and ● Always fit the special roof carrier systems
2 are only visible when the doors are open correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.
››› Fig. 181 A. ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
Fig. 181 Leon/Leon SC: attachment points for
roof carrier system.
the roof railings for the roof carrier system.
Leon SC model
The front and rear attachment points 1 are
only visible when the doors are open. The
158
 Air conditioning

Note Distributing a load

Air conditioning

Technical data
Always read the assembly instructions that Distribute loads uniformly and secure them
correctly ››› .
come with the crossbars and the roof carrier Heating, ventilation and cool-
system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
cle. Check attachments ing
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system
have been installed, check the bolted con- Introduction
Loading the roof carrier system nections and attachments after a short jour-
Read the additional information carefully

Advice
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
The load can only be secured if the crossbars cy.
›››  page 51
and the roof carrier system are properly in-
stalled ››› . WARNING
Viewing Climatronic information

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load

On the screen of Climatronic control unit and
Maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and considerable vehi- on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con-

Operation
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. cle damage. nect system, the theoretical values of the
This figure comes from the combined weight ● Never exceed the maximum authorised
temperature zones are shown.
of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi- The unit of temperature measurement can be
itself on the roof ››› . cle's maximum authorised weight. changed in the Easy Connect system.
● Never exceed the load capacity of the cross
Always check the weight of the roof carrier
bars and the roof carrier system, even if the Dust and pollen filter

Emergencies
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
maximum authorised roof load has not been
load to be transported and weigh them if The dust and pollen filter with its activated
reached.
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against
● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-
thorised roof load. impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-
ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
terior.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be The dust and pollen filter must be changed
WARNING
able to carry the maximum authorised roof regularly so that air conditioner performance

Safety
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall is not adversely affected.
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is from the roof carrier system or cause acci-
dents and injuries. If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due
listed in the fitting instructions.
● Always use belts or retaining straps that
to use in areas with very high levels of air
are suitable and in a good condition. pollution, the filter must be changed more
frequently than stated in the Service Sched-
● Secure the load properly.
ule. »
159
 Operation

CAUTION Adjust using the Easy Connect sys- Func-

● Switch the air conditioner off if you think it tem* tion Function
may be broken. This will avoid additional 3 Applies to vehicles with a Touch/Colour Media button
damage. Have the air conditioner checked by System.
OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.
a specialised workshop.
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible The air conditioning settings submenu is
● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
to perform various adjustments to the Clima- opened. It is possible to make the following
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec-
tronic. adjustments:
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Function button Air conditioning profile. : to ad-
Open the air conditioner menu just the level of the fan in AUTO mode. You
Note can choose between low, medium and
● Press the Setup button. SETUP
high.
● When the cooling system is turned off, air Function button Automatic air recirculation to
● OR: press the MENU button in Easy Con-
coming from the outside will not be dried. To switch on and off automatic air recircula-
prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom- nect. With the rotating switch select the air tion ››› page 162.
mends leaving the cooling system (compres- conditioner menu and open it. BACK  function button to close the sub-
sor) turned on. To do this, press the button menu.
 . The button lamp should light up.
On the touch screen you can see and change
the current settings, for example, the temper-
● The maximum heat output required to de-
ature set for the driver and passenger sides,
frost windows as quickly as possible is only Adjust using the Easy Connect sys-
the air distribution and the fan speed. With
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature. button  the driver and passenger side tem*
temperatures are synchronised ››› Book- 3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Plus/Navi
● Keep the air intake slots in front of the
let Media System Touch/Colour, chapter Air System.
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-
conditioning.
sure heating and cooling are not impaired, In the Easy Connect system it is also possible
and to prevent the windows from misting To switch a function on or off, or to select a to perform various adjustments to the Clima-
over. submenu, you must press the corresponding tronic.
function button.
For more information about functions Open the air conditioner menu
››› page 112. ● Press the Setup button.

On the top of the screen you can see and

change the current settings, such as, for ex-
ample, the temperature set for the driver side
and for that of passenger. Temperatures up
160
 Air conditioning

to +22 ° C (+72 ° F) are shown with blue ar- Air conditioning user instructions ● The air conditioner compressor has been

Technical data
rows, and temperatures over +22 ° C (+72 ° F) temporarily switched off because the engine
with red arrows. The interior cooling system only works when coolant temperature is too high.
the engine is running and fan is switched on. ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
To switch a function on or off, or to select a
submenu, you must press the corresponding The air conditioner operates most effectively conditioner checked by a specialised work-
function button. with the windows and the panoramic sliding shop.
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has
Function heated up after standing in the sun for some Special Characteristics
Function
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-

Advice
button If the humidity and temperature outside the
ly by opening the windows and the panoram- vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
Air condi- Adjust the fan level in AUTO mode. You ic sliding sunroof briefly.
tioning pro- can choose between low, medium and the evaporator in the cooling system and
file high. form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
Climatronic: change the temperature unit on normal and does not indicate a leak!
OFF Climatronic is switched off. the screen of the radio or on the factory-fit-

Operation
ON Climatronic is switched on.
ted navigation system Note
Changing the temperature display from Cel- After starting the engine, any residual humid-
The air conditioning settings submenu
sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory- ity in the air conditioner could mist over the
is opened. It is possible to make the fol-
lowing adjustments: fitted navigation system is done using the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as
Function button Air conditioning profile. : to menu on the instrument panel soon as possible to clear the windscreen of
adjust the level of the fan in AUTO ›››  page 35. condensation.

Emergencies
mode. You can choose between low, me-
SETUP
dium and high. The cooling system cannot be activated
Function button Automatic air recirculation
to switch on and off automatic air recir- If the air conditioning system cannot be
culation ››› page 162. switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
BACK  function button to close the
lowing:
submenu.
● The engine is not running.
Activate/deactivate the automatic acti-

Safety
vation of the supplementary heating for ● The fan is switched off.
colder countries (only for engines with
Automatic ● The air conditioner fuse has blown.
supplementary heating). With the option
supplemen-
deactivated, depending on the outside ● The outside temperature is lower than ap-
tary heating
temperature the heating may need more proximately +3 ℃ (+3.33 ℃).
time than normal to reach a comfortable
temperature.
161
 Operation

Air outlets

Fig. 183 On the dash panel: air vents

Air vents Note When the outside temperature is very high,

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- selecting manual air recirculation mode for a
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi- short period refreshes the vehicle interior
lation in the vehicle interior, air vents tive objects should never be placed in front of
››› Fig. 183 1 should remain open. more quickly.
the air outlets as they may be damaged or
made unsuitable for use by the air coming For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is
● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de- from the air vents. switched off when the button  is press-
tail) in the required direction to open and ed or the air distributor turned to .
close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is
in the  position, the corresponding air vent
Air recirculation mode Switching the manual air recirculation mode
is closed.
on and off 
● Change the air direction using the ventila- Basic points To switch system on: press the  button un-
tion grille lever.
Air recirculation: til the warning lamp lights up.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air To switch system off: press the  button un-
vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell  Manual recirculation
til the warning lamp goes off.
and in the rear area of the interior.
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
air from entering the interior.
162
 Driving

Functioning mode of automatic air recircula- WARNING Driving

Technical data
tion (air conditioning menu)
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Impor-
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin
tant information regarding air-conditioning Ignition lock
on page 56.
interior is enabled. If the system detects a ● If the cooling system is switched off and air
high concentration of hazardous substances Switching the ignition on and starting
recirculation mode switched on, the windows
in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is can mist over very quickly, considerably limit-
the engine with the key
switched on automatically. When the level of ing visibility.
impurities drops to within a normal range, re-

Advice
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
circulation mode is switched off. not required.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant
smells. CAUTION
The air recirculation will not connect auto- Do not smoke when air recirculation is
matically in versions without humidity sensor

Operation
switched on in vehicles with an air condition-
and in the following external conditions: er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-
ing system vaporiser and on the activated
● The outside temperature is lower than charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-
+3 °C (+38 °F). ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant
Fig. 184 Ignition key positions.
● The cooling system is switched off and the smell.
outside temperature is below +10 °C Read the additional information carefully

Emergencies
(+50 °F). Note ›››  page 28
● The cooling system is switched off, the out- Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa- Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer
side temperature is below +15 °C (+59 °F) ted to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant
than usual to start on cold days. Therefore
and the windscreen wipers are switched on. odours from entering the vehicle interior
when it is in reverse and while the automatic
the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or the
Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir- windscreen wiper is working. brake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re-
culation is done in the air conditioner menu, main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur-

Safety
under Configuration. ing preheating, the warning lamp  remains
lit.
The preheating time depends on the coolant
and exterior temperatures. With the engine at
operating temperature, or at outside temper-
atures above +8 °C, the warning lamp  will »
163
 Operation

light up for about one second. This means Select N or P CAUTION

that the engine starts immediately. This message appears if you try to start or Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and
If the engine does not immediately start up, stop the engine when the selector lever of extreme load conditions until the engine has
interrupt the starting process and try again the automatic gearbox is not in position P or reached its normal operating temperature,
after 30 seconds. To start the engine again, N. The engine can only start or stop in certain otherwise this can damage the engine.
return the key to position 1 . positions.
For the sake of the environment
Start-Stop System* Engage position P; the vehicle
can move; doors can only close in Do not warm up the engine by idling it. You
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop should drive off as soon as you start the en-
position P.
system* switches off the engine, the ignition gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex-
remains switched on. For safety reasons, this driver message ap- haust emissions.
pears and an audible warning sounds if the
Automatic gearbox: before leaving the vehi- selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not
cle, make sure that the ignition is switched Note
in position P after you switch off the ignition.
off and the selector lever is in position P. Put the selector lever in position P, otherwise ● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to
the vehicle could roll away. the position 1 , turn the steering wheel to
Driver messages on the instrument panel both sides to release the steering lock.
display Gear change: selector lever in ● When starting from cold, the engine may be
the drive position! a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil
Press the clutch pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve
This driver message is displayed when the lifters. This is quite normal, and no cause for
This message appears on vehicles with a selector lever is not in the position P when concern.
manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the the driver door is opened. Additionally, a
engine without having the clutch pedal ● If the vehicle battery is disconnected and
buzzer will sound. Put the selector lever in reconnected, the key must remain in the posi-
pressed. The engine will only start if you position P, otherwise the vehicle could roll
press the clutch pedal. tion 1 for around 5 seconds before starting
away. up.
Press the brake ● Vehicles with automatic gearbox: after
Ignition is switched on switching off the ignition, you can only re-
This message appears on vehicles with an This driver message is displayed and a buz- move the ignition key if the selector lever is
automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start zer is sounded when the driver door is in position “P” (parking lock). Next, the se-
the engine without having the brake pedal opened with the ignition switched on. lector lever is locked.
pressed.

164
 Driving

Switching off the engine with the key ● Always take the key with you when you Braking and parking

Technical data
leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
Switching off the engine tant if there are children in the vehicle, as Using the handbrake
– Stop the vehicle. they might otherwise be able to start the en-
gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g.
– Turn the ignition key to position 1 the electric windows), which could cause in-
››› Fig. 184. juries.

Engaging the steering wheel lock CAUTION

Advice
In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni- If the engine has been running under high
tion key can only be removed when the selec- load for a long time, there is a risk of heat
tor lever is in position P. building up in the engine compartment after
– Remove the key from the ignition in posi- it has been switched off; this could cause en-
gine damage. For this reason, you should idle
tion 1 ››› Fig. 184 ››› . the engine for approximately 2 minutes be-

Operation
Fig. 185 Handbrake between the front seats.
– Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en- fore you switch it off.
gage.
The handbrake should be applied firmly to
Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the Note prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling
steering lock engaged. ● After the engine is switched off the radiator away.
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if Always apply the handbrake when you leave

Emergencies
WARNING the ignition is switched off. It is also possible
your vehicle and when you park.
● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- that the fan turns itself on once more if the
cle is stationary. The brake servo and power coolant temperature increases due to the
heat accumulated in the engine compartment Applying the handbrake
steering functions will not be completely cov-
ered under warranty. More force may also be or due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra- – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly
needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. diation. ››› Fig. 185.
As you cannot steer and brake in the normal ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
manner, there is a greater risk of accidents system* switches off the engine, the ignition Releasing the handbrake

Safety
and serious injury. remains switched on. Make sure that the igni-
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-
● Never remove the key from the ignition if tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-
cle, otherwise the battery could discharge. lease knob in the direction of the arrow
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- ››› Fig. 185 and guide the handbrake lever
ing could suddenly lock, making it impossible
to steer the vehicle: risk of accident!
down fully ››› . »

165
 Operation

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so Parking WARNING
there is less risk of driving off with it still en-
● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury
gaged ››› . The handbrake should always be firmly ap-
when you leave your vehicle unattended.
plied when the vehicle is parked.
The handbrake warning lamp  lights up ● Never park where the hot exhaust system
when the handbrake is applied and the igni- Always note the following points when park- could ignite inflammable materials, such as
tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off ing the vehicle: dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
when the handbrake is released. ● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in
– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with the vehicle when it is locked. They would be
– Apply the handbrake. unable to open the vehicle from the inside,
the handbrake on, the following message*
will appear on the instrument panel display: – Put it in 1st gear. and could become trapped in the vehicle in
HANDBRAKE ON. You will also hear an audi- an emergency. In the event of an emergency,
– Switch the engine off and remove the key locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle
ble warning. from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel occupants.
slightly to engage the steering lock. ● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
WARNING
– Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-
● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- ample, by releasing the handbrake or the
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gearbox lever.
is considerably longer, because braking is gradients: ● Depending on weather conditions, it may
only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-
dent!
rolls against the kerb if it started to roll. cle. This can be fatal.
● If the handbrake is only partially released,
this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,
which can impair the function of the brake
turn the front wheels so that they point to-
system and could lead to an accident. This al-
so causes premature wear on the rear brake wards the kerb. Manual gearbox
pads. ● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn
the front wheels so that they point away from Changing gear
CAUTION the kerb.
Read the additional information carefully
● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the ›››  page 49
Always apply the handbrake before you leave
the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.
In some countries the clutch pedal must be
fully pressed down for the engine to start.

166
 Driving

Selecting reverse gear ● Always press the clutch to the floor when The selector lever position engaged is high-

Technical data
● Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle changing gears. lighted on the display in the instrument clus-
is stopped. ● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on
ter. With the selector lever in the manual
hills with the engine on. gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged
Changing down gears gear is also indicated on the display.

While driving, changing down a gear must al- P – Parking lock

ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- Automatic gearbox/DSG auto-
rectly below and when the engine speed is When the selector lever is in this position,
matic gearbox* the driven wheels are locked mechanically.

Advice
not too high ››› in Manual gearbox on
page 49. Changing down while bypassing The parking lock must be engaged only when
one or various gears at high speeds or at Introduction the vehicle is stationary ››› .
high engine speeds can damage the clutch The interlock button (the button on the selec-
and the gearbox, even if the clutch pedal re- ››› table on page 2 tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-
mains depressed ››› . multaneously the brake pedal must be de-

Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- pressed before moving the selector lever ei-
CAUTION ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- ther in or out of position P.
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
When travelling at high speeds or at high en- mitted via two independent clutches. They re-
gine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low R – Reverse gear
place the torque converter found on conven-
can cause considerable damage to the clutch Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
tional automatic gearboxes and allow for
and the gearbox. This can also occur if the

Emergencies
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling
clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does
not engage. hicle. ››› .
The tiptronic system allows the driver to To move the selector lever to position R, the
CAUTION change gears manually if desired interlock button must be pressed in and at
››› page 169, Changing gears in tiptronic the same time the brake pedal must be de-
To prevent damage and avoid premature pressed. The reverse lights come on when
mode*.
wear, please observe the following: the selector lever is in the R position with the
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever ignition on.

Safety
while driving. The pressure applied by your
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector Selector lever positions
N – Neutral (idling)
forks.
Read the additional information carefully With the selector lever in this position, the
● Always ensure that the vehicle is complete-
ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.
›››  page 49 gear is in neutral. »
167
 Operation

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position power even at idling speed, and the vehicle Selector lever lock
The selector lever in the D/S position enables tends to “creep”). The accelerator pedal must
the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D) on no account be pressed inadvertently when
or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary.
the selector lever backwards. Moving the lev- The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
mediately (in some cases even if the parking
er again will select normal mode (D). The se-
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an
lected driving mode is shown on the instru- accident.
ment panel display.
● While you are selecting a gear and the vehi-
In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical- cle is stopped with the engine running, do
ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-
on the engine load, the road speed and the tion could result in an accident.
dynamic gear control programme (DCP). ● As a driver you should never leave your ve-
Fig. 186 Selector lever lock.
Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en-
gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while
driving style. This setting makes use of the The selector lever lock prevents gears from
the engine is running, you must apply the
engine's maximum power output. When ac- being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-
handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).
celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable. hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake
The brake pedal must be pressed when mov- and put the selector lever in position P before The selector lever lock is released as follows:
ing the selector lever from D/S to N if the ve- opening the bonnet and working on the vehi-
– Switch the ignition on.
hicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h cle with the engine running. Please always
(3 mph) ››› . observe the important safety warnings – Press the brake pedal and at the same time
››› page 245, Work in the engine compart- press in the interlock button.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- ment.
ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to Automatic selector lever lock
switch temporarily to tiptronic mode
Note With the ignition switched on, the selector
››› page 169, in order to manually select gear
lever is locked in the positions P and N. The
ratios to suit the driving conditions. ● If the selector lever is moved accidentally
to N when driving, release the accelerator and brake pedal must be pressed to release the
let the engine speed drop to idling before se- lever while pressing the release button if the
WARNING
lecting gear range D or S again. selector lever is in the position P. As a re-
● With selector lever in any position (except minder for the driver, with the lever in posi-
● Should the power supply to the selector
P) the vehicle must always be held with the tions P or N the following message will be
foot brake when the engine is running. This is lever be interrupted in position P, the selector
lever will be locked. If this should happen the shown on the display:
because an automatic gearbox still transmits
manual release can be used ›››  page 50.
168
 Driving

When stationary, apply footbrake Note Changing gears in tiptronic mode*

Technical data
while selecting a gear.
● If the selector lever lock does not engage,
The selector lever lock only works if the vehi- there is a fault. The transmission is interrup-
cle is stationary or driving at speeds up to 5 ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally
km/h. At higher speeds the selector lever moving. Follow the procedure below in order
lock in the N position is disengaged automat- for the selector lever lock to engage again:
ically. – With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake
pedal and release it again.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the

Advice
selector lever is moved quickly through posi- – With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake
tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This pedal. Move the selector lever to posi-
makes it possible, for instance, to rock the tion P or N and subsequently engage a
gear.
vehicle “backwards and forwards” if it is Fig. 187 Centre console: changing gear with
stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto- ● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle
tiptronic
matically if the brake pedal is not depressed does not move forwards or back. Proceed to

Operation
and the lever is in position N for more than the next mode:
about two seconds. – When the vehicle does not move in the
required direction, the system may not
Interlock button have the gear range correctly engaged.
Press the brake pedal and engage the
The interlock button on the selector lever gear range again.

Emergencies
handle prevents the driver from inadvertently – If the vehicle still does not move in the
engaging certain gears. Press the button in required direction, there is a system mal-
to disengage the selector lever lock. The se- function. Seek specialist assistance and
lector lever positions in which the interlock have the system checked.
button has to be pressed are shown in the il-
lustration, highlighted in colour ››› Fig. 186. Fig. 188 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox
levers
Safety interlock for ignition key

Safety
Once the ignition has been turned off, the The tiptronic gives the driver the option to
key may be removed only if the gear selector change gears manually. »
is in position P. While the key is not in the ig-
nition, the selector lever is locked in position
P.
169
 Operation

Changing gear manually with the selector When accelerating, the gearbox automatical- – Release the brake and press the accelerator
lever ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before ››› .
It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, the maximum engine speed is reached.
both when the vehicle is stopped and while Stopping briefly
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear-
driving. box will not shift down until there is no risk of – Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle
– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se- overrevving the engine. briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-
lector lever from position D/S to the right. fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.
When the kick-down feature is used, the
As soon as the change is made the selector gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-
level will be shown in the position M on the Stopping/Parking
ing on road speed and engine speed.
instrument panel display (for example M4 If the driver door is opened and the selector
means that the fourth gear is engaged). lever is not in position P, the vehicle could
Driving tips move. The driver message will be:  Gear
– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-
change: selector lever in the
lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 187.
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer
– Move the selector lever backwards – to ly as the vehicle moves. will sound.
select a lower gear.
The engine can only start with the selector – Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .
Changing gear manually with the gearshift lever in the position P or N. At low tempera- – Apply the handbrake.
paddles* tures, below -10 °C (50 °F), the engine can
only start with the selector lever in the posi- – Move the selector lever to position P.
The gearshift paddles can be used when the tion P.
selector lever is in the position D/S or M. Holding the car on a hill
– Press the gearshift paddle + to select a Starting the vehicle – Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
higher gear ››› Fig. 188. – Press and hold the brake pedal. vent the vehicle from “moving backwards;
if necessary, apply the handbrake” ››› .
– Press the gearshift paddle – to select a – Press and hold the interlock button (the Do not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back”
lower gear. button on the selector lever handle), move by increasing the engine speed when a
– With the selector lever in position D/S, if no the selector lever to the desired position, gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator)
paddle is operated during a short period of for instance D ››› page 167, and release the ››› .
time, the gearbox control system switches interlock button.
back to automatic mode. To switch to per- – Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a Moving off uphill in vehicles without Hill
manent manual gear change using the slight movement can be felt). start assistant*
gearshift paddles, move the selector lever
– Apply the handbrake.
from position D/S to the right.
170
 Driving

– Once you have engaged a gear press the ing power, increase braking distance or even When the accelerator pedal is pressed right

Technical data
accelerator carefully and disengage the result in the total failure of the brake system. down past the point of resistance at full throt-
handbrake. ● To avoid rolling back on gradients always
tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower
hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand- gear, depending on road speed and engine
Moving off uphill in vehicles with Hill start brake if you have to stop. speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is
assistant* delayed until the engine reaches maximum
– Once you have engaged a gear, release the
rpm.
CAUTION
footbrake and press the accelerator
● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not WARNING
››› page 181, Hill driving assistant*.

Advice
attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
Driving down hills: in some situations (on the accelerator when a gear has been selec-
pery or wet, the kick-down feature could
mountain roads or when towing a trailer or ted. This could cause overheating and dam-
cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand-
caravan) it can be advantageous to switch result in skidding.
brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order
temporarily to the manual gearbox pro-
to prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-

Operation
● If you allow the car to roll with the selector
ted manually to suit the driving conditions Launch control programme
lever in position N with the engine switched
››› .
off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed
On level ground it is sufficient to move the as it will not be lubricated. DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-
selector lever to position P. On slopes, first ● In certain driving situations or traffic condi- rol engines superior to 140 kW.
engage the parking brake and then put the tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged
The Launch control programme enables maxi-

Emergencies
selection lever into the P position. This “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with
avoids overloading the locking mechanism continuous stoppages, the gearbox could
mum acceleration.
and it will be easier to move the selector lev- overheat causing damage! If the warning Important: the engine must have reached op-
er from position P. lamp  lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as erating temperature and the steering wheel
possible and wait for the gearbox to cool must not be turned.
WARNING ››› page 174.
The engine speed for launch-control is differ-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selector ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the
lever positions on page 168.

Safety
launch-control you must disconnect the anti-
● Never allow the brake to rub and do not use
Kick-down feature slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-
the brake pedal too often or for long periods. nect system menu ››› page 112. The warning
Constant braking causes overheating in the
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
lamp  will stay switched on or will flash
brakes. This could significantly reduce brak- celeration to be reached.
slowly depending on whether or not the vehi-
cle has a driver information system*. »
171
 Operation

On vehicles with the driver information sys- make sure your manner of driving and accel- Downhill speed control*
tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or
the corresponding text message Stability endanger other road users. The downhill speed control function helps
control deactivated (temporary) ap- ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched the driver when driving down steep gradi-
pears on the instrument panel to indicate the on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC ents.
deactivation status. are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, Downhill speed control is activated when the
– When the engine is running, switch off the causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci- selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies
dent!
traction control (ASR)1). the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-
● After putting the vehicle into gear, the matically engages a lower gear that is suita-
– Turn the selector lever to the position “S” “sport” mode of the ESC should be deactiva- ble for the slope. The downhill speed control
or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv- ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but- function attempts to maintain the speed at
ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* ton. which the vehicle was travelling when the
››› page 203.
foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of
– Press the brake pedal firmly with your left Note physics and technical drive limitations). It
foot and hold it down for at least one sec- ● After using the Launch control programme, may be necessary to adjust the speed again
ond. the temperature in the gearbox may have in- using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-
– With your right foot, press the accelerator creased considerably. In this case, the pro- en that the downhill speed control can only
gramme could be disabled for several mi- change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-
down to the full throttle or kick-down posi-
nutes. The programme can be used again af- scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In
tion. The engine speed will stabilise at
ter the cooling phase. this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to
about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about
● Accelerating with the Launch control pro- 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and
2,000 rpm (diesel engine).
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of reduce the charge on the brakes.
– Take your left foot off the brake pedal. the vehicle. This can result in increased wear
Downhill speed control is deactivated as
and tear.
soon as the road levels out again or you
WARNING
press the accelerator pedal.
● Always adapt your driving style to the traf-
fic conditions. On vehicles with cruise control system*
● Only use the launch control programme
››› page 184, downhill speed control is acti-
when road and traffic conditions permit, and
vated when you set a cruising speed.

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the

warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in-

formation system: the warning lamp stays on.
172
 Driving

WARNING To make use of the braking force and switch Backup programme

Technical data
off the engine again, simply press the brake
The downhill speed control cannot defy the pedal briefly. A backup programme is in place if a fault
laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be
should occur in the control system.
maintained constant in all situations. Always Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
be prepared to use the brakes! section with less energy) and the switching If all the positions of the selector lever are
off using inertia (= shorter section without shown over a light background on the instru-
the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel ment panel display, there is a system fault
Inertia mode consumption and emission balance. and the automatic gearbox will operate in
with the backup programme. When the back-

Advice
The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy WARNING up programme is activated, it is possible to
of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and
● If the inertia mode has been switched on,
tain stretches to be driven without using the within a selected range of gears. In some ca-
take into account, when approaching an ob-
accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved. ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-
stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal,
Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll” that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu-
ble.

Operation
before, for example, arriving in a town. al manner: risk of accident!
CAUTION
● When using inertia mode while travelling
Switching on inertia mode down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-
Important: selector lever must be in position risk of accident! gramme, take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired without
D, gradients below 12 %. ● If other users drive your vehicle, warn them
delay.
about inertia mode.

Emergencies
– Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode
››› page 203.
Note
– Take your foot off the accelerator. Clutch
● Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT
The driver message Inertia will be dis- Drive Profile*) driving mode.  Clutch overheating! Please
played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 ● The driver message Inertia is only dis- stop!
mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- played with the current consumption. In iner-
gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed
The clutch has overheated and could be dam-

Safety
the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- (for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”). aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-
cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed. box to cool with the engine at idling speed
● On downhill sections with gradients above
and the selector lever in position P. When the
15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be
Stopping inertia mode warning lamp and the driver message switch
switched off temporarily.
off, have the fault corrected by a specialised
– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
workshop without delay. If the warning lamp »
173
 Operation

and the driver message do not switch off, do  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500
not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- driving accordingly km influences the future engine perform-
tance. ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderate
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
rate, especially when the engine is still cold:
the warning lamp switches off, you can con-
this will lead to less engine wear and tear
tinue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox malfunctions and will prolong its useful life.
 Gearbox: press the brake and
You should also avoid driving with the engine
 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve- engage a gear again.
speed too low. Change down to a lower gear
hicle and place the lever in the If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a when the engine no longer runs “smoothly”.
position P. high temperature, this driver message will be If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injection
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- displayed when the gearbox has cooled to protect the engine.
cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- again.
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
 Gearbox: System fault! You Environmental protection
may continue driving. Run-in and economical driving Environmental protection is a top priority in
Have the fault corrected by a specialised the design, choice of materials and manufac-
workshop without delay. Running-in the engine ture of your new SEAT.
 Gearbox: System fault! You A new vehicle should be run in over a dis-
can continue driving with re- Constructive measures to encourage recy-
tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first
strictions. Reverse gear disa‐ cling
1,000 km the engine speed should not ex-
bled ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine ● Joints and connections designed for easy
speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at full dismantling
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired without delay. throttle and do not drive with a trailer! From ● Modular construction to facilitate disman-
1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) you tling
 Gearbox: System fault! You can gradually increase the engine rpm and ● Increased use of single-grade materials.
can continue driving in D until road speed.
switching off the engine ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
During its first few hours of running, the in- accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away ternal friction in the engine is greater than ISO 1629.
from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- later on when all the moving parts have bed-
tance. ded down. Choice of materials
● Use of recycled materials.
174
 Driving

● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Exhaust gas filtration systems matic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the engine

Technical data
if its components are not easily separated. speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The rise
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials Catalytic converter in temperature causes the soot on the filter
originating from renewable sources. Applies to vehicles with petrol engine: the to burn. On completion of the cleaning the
vehicle must only be used with unleaded pet- warning lamp will switch off. If the warning
● Reduction of volatile components, includ-
rol, otherwise the catalytic converter will be lamp does not switch off, go immediately to a
ing odour, in plastic materials. specialised workshop to rectify the problem.
irreparably damaged.
● Use of CFC-free coolants.
Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu- WARNING

Advice
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus-
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive ● Because of the high temperatures which
tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reaches
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- can occur in the exhaust gas control system
the exhaust system, which can overheat and (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-
valent chromium. damage the catalytic converter. ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-
haust can come into contact with flammable
Manufacturing methods Diesel particulate filter materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at

Operation
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the Applies to vehicles with diesel engine: the the forest edge). Fire hazard!
protective wax for cavities. diesel engine particulate filter eliminates ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hicle transport. tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- hazard!

● Use of solvent-free adhesives. ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is
cleaned automatically without need for indi-

Emergencies
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
cation by the warning lamp . This may be Driving through flooded roads
tems. noticed because the engine idle speed in-
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- creases and an odour may be detected. To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-
dues (RDF). ing through water, for example, along a floo-
If automatic filter purification cannot be car-
● Improvement in the quality of waste water. ded road, please observe the following:
ried out (because only short trips are taken,
● Use of systems for the recovery of residual for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- ● The water should never come above the
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning

Safety
lower edge of the bodywork.
etc.). lamp will  switch on.
● Drive at pedestrian speed. »
● The use of water-soluble paints. Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-
ess by driving in the following manner: drive
for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum
speed of 60 km/h in 4th or 5th gear (auto-
175
 Operation

WARNING Economic and environmentally-friend- lights are red). This takes advantage of the
ly driving engine braking effect, reducing wear on the
After driving through water, mud, sludge, brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con-
etc., the braking effect can be delayed
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun
slightly due to moisture build-up on the discs
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- fuel cut-off.
and brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully
several times will remove the moisture and pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump-
restore the full braking effect. tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco- Changing gear to save energy
nomical driving style and proper anticipation An effective way of saving is to change in ad-
of traffic conditions. The following section vance to a higher gear. Running the engine at
CAUTION
gives you some tips on lessening the impact high rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-
● Driving through flooded areas may severely on the environment and reducing your oper- sary amount of fuel.
damage vehicle components such as the en- ating costs at the same time.
gine, transmission, running gear or electrical Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
system. gear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec-
Active cylinder management (ACT®)*display
● Whenever driving through water, the Start- ommend that you change to a higher gear
Stop system* must be switched off ››› table on page 2 upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the right
››› page 182. gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
possible gear appropriate for the driving sit-
cylinder management (ACT®) may automati-
Note uation (the engine should continue function-
cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders
ing with cyclical regularity).
● Check the depth of the water before enter- if the driving situation does not require too
ing the flooded zone. much power. When it is switched off, no fuel Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually and
● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or is injected into these cylinders, hence total without reaching the “kick-down” position.
stop the engine in any situation. fuel consumption may be reduced. The num-
ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in- Avoid driving at high speed
● Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite
strument panel display ›››  page 36.
direction may splash water that could exceed Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-
the maximum permitted water height for your sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful
vehicle. Foresight when driving gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-
● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- Acceleration causes the vehicle to consume tionately as speed is increased. Driving at
sion). more fuel. If you think ahead when driving, moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
you will need to brake less and thus acceler-
ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll Reduce idling time
slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in-
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling
stance when you can see that the next traffic
is automatically reduced. In vehicles without
176
 Driving

the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off A cold engine consumes a disproportionate any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that

Technical data
the engine, for example, at level crossings amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- use a lot of electricity includes the blower at
and at traffic lights that remain red for long ing temperature after about four kilometres a high setting, the rear window heating or
periods of time. When an engine has reached (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- the seat heating*.
operating temperature, and depending on turn to a normal level.
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already Check tyre pressure
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
ry for restarting.
correct pressures ››› page 253 to save fuel. If

Advice
The engine takes a long time to warm up the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
tant emissions are also especially high dur- rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
best to drive off immediately after starting
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they

Operation
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
speed.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Regular maintenance
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
before the engine is started. A well-serviced

Emergencies
to always check the luggage compartment to
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
ing transported.
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel Since the luggage rack increases the aerody-
than necessary. namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove
it when not needed. This will save, at a speed
Avoid short journeys of 100-120 km/h (60-75 mph), 12% of fuel.

Safety
The engine and catalytic converter need to
Save electrical energy
reach their optimal operating temperature in
order to minimise fuel consumption and The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen-
emissions. erating electricity. This implies that any in-
crease in power consumption also increases
fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off
177
 Operation

Driver assistance systems Brake assist system matically brake the towing vehicle within the
limits of the system and mitigate the sway.
The brake assist system can reduce the re-
quired braking distance. The braking force is Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available
Braking and stability systems automatically boosted if you press the brake in all countries.
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- Electronic self-locking*/Selective torque
ger has passed. control*
The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces
When driving around bends, an electronic
the tendency to skid and improves the stabil-
Traction control system (ASR) self-locking intervenes. The front wheel on
ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control the inside of the curve, or the two inside
detects critical handling situations, such as
system reduces the engine torque to match wheels, respectively, are selectively braked
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin
the amount of grip available. This helps the as required. This minimises the traction of
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi-
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra- the front wheels, allowing you to take bends
cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc-
dient. with greater precision and neutrality. In cer-
ing the engine torque. The warning lamp will
tain circumstances, where roads are wet or
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC
Electronic differential lock (EDL) snow-covered, the respective system may not
is intervening .
intervene.
ESC includes the Anti-lock brake system When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
(ABS), the brake assist system, the traction the spinning wheel and directs the power to Multi-collision brake
control system (ASR), electronic differential the other driven wheel. This function is active
up to approximately 100 km/h. In an accident, the multi-collision brake can
lock (EDL), electronic self-locking*, selective
help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of
torque control* and tractor-trailer sway miti- To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel skidding during the accident, which could
gation*. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- lead to further collisions.
by changing the torque. cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch The multi-collision brake works for front, side
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) on again automatically when the brake has or rear accidents, when the airbag control
cooled down. unit records its activation level and the acci-
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the
virtual standstill. You can continue to steer
vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-
the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-
Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not the following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway. board network.
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped- When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the
al pulsate while the ABS is working. vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-
178
 Driver assistance systems

The following actions control automatic brak- could spin, affecting the stability of the vehi- the engine is running and includes the ABS,

Technical data
ing during the accident: cle: risk of accident! EDS and ASR systems.
● When the driver presses the accelerator, The ASR and ESC function should only be
the automatic braking does not take place. Note switched off in situations in which traction is
● The ABS and ASR will only operate correctly
insufficient, among others:
● When the braking pressure through press-
ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any ● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces
tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake differences in the rolling radius of the tyres
that are not very firm.
automatically. can cause the system to reduce engine power

Advice
when this is not desired. ● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.
● Multi-collision braking will not be available
● The regulating processes of the systems
if ESC is malfunctioning. Then switch the ASR and ESC function back
can make noises when they intervene.
on.
WARNING ● If the warning lamp  lights up, or  alter-
natively, there could be a fault ››› page 110. Depending on finishes and versions, it is
● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDL, electronic self- possible either to disconnect only the ASR or

Operation
locking differential or selective torque control else activate ESC Sport mode.
systems cannot exceed the limits imposed by
the laws of physics. Always bear this in mind, Switching on/off the ESC and ASR ESC in “Sport” mode
especially on wet or slippery roads. If you no-
tice the systems cutting in, you should re- Sport mode can be connected via the Easy
duce your speed immediately to suit the road Connect ››› page 112 system menu. The ac-
and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged tion of the ESC and the ASR is limited ››› .

Emergencies
to take risks by the presence of more safety
The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles
systems. If you do, an accident may occur.
with a driver information system*, the driver
● Please remember that the accident risk al-
will be shown the electronic stability
ways increases if you drive fast, especially in
control (ESC) option: sport.
corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow
Warning! Limited stability.
too close behind the vehicle in front of you.
The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDL, electronic
self-locking and selective torque control sys- Disable ESC “Sport” mode

Safety
tems cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci- Fig. 189 Centre console: Button for switching Through the Easy Connect system menu
dents! on/off the ESC and ASR
››› page 112. The warning lamp  will switch »
● Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa-
ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De- The ESC is switched on automatically when
spite the control systems, the driven wheels the engine is started, and only works when

179
 Operation

off. For vehicles with a driver information sys- Stability programme (ESC), including the ASR braking capacity, and need to be “run in”
tem*, the driver will be shown the elec- function. first. However, you can compensate for the
tronic stability control (ESC) ● The ASR and ESC function are reconnected slightly reduced braking effect by applying
option: on. by pressing the button  ››› Fig. 189. more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid
overloading the brakes while running them
● OR: activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC
Disable ASR in.
function in the Easy Connect system by
The Easy Connect system is used to switch off means of the button  and the function
the ASR ››› page 112. The traction control sys- Wear
buttons Setup and ESC System .
tem will be disabled. The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
WARNING a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is
with a driver information system* the driver You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on-
a particular problem in urban traffic and
will be informed that ASR is disabled. ly if the traffic conditions and your driving
ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid- short stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Activate ASR ding! Depending on the speed, the braking force
● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising and the environmental conditions (for exam-
The Easy Connect system ››› page 112 is used
function will be limited to allow for a sportier ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.)
to switch on the ASR. The traction control sys-
drive. The driving wheels could spin and the noises may be produced on braking.
tem will be enabled. vehicle could “skid”.
The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles ● If the ESC/ASR is deactivated, the vehicle Wet roads or road salt
with a driver information system* the driver stabilisation function is not available.
In certain situations (for example, on driving
will be informed that ASR is enabled.
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
Note or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-
Disconnection of the ESC
If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport tion could be delayed if the discs and pads
In some versions of the model, besides the mode is selected, cruise control* will be are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the
traction control system (ASR), the electronic switched off. brakes should be “dried” by pressing the
stability programme (ESC) can also be brake pedal several times.
switched off.
At high speed and with the windscreen wip-
● Press the button  ››› Fig. 189 for approxi- Brakes ers activated, the brake pads will briefly
mately 1 second to switch off the ASR func- touch the brake discs. This takes place, al-
tion. New brake pads though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular
● Press the button  ››› Fig. 189 for approxi- For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brake intervals to improve the response time of the
pads have not yet reached their maximum brakes when they are wet.
mately 3 seconds to switch off the Electronic
180
 Driver assistance systems

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be Low brake fluid level and relieves the brakes. If you still have to

Technical data
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at
for some distance without using the brakes the brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu- intervals than to apply the brakes continu-
when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- id level is monitored electronically. ously.
ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the
discs and pads can be removed by gently ap- Brake servo Note
plying the brakes a few times.
The brake servo increases the pressure you ● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam-
Corrosion apply to the brake pedal. It works only when ple when the car is being towed, you will

Advice
the engine is running. have to press the brake pedal considerably
There may be a tendency for corrosion to harder than normal to make up for the lack of
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the WARNING servo assistance.
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently ● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces-
● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake
or the brakes are not used very often. sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers,
system only in a suitable traffic situation. Do
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if it is important that the flow of air to the front
not put other road users in danger: there is

Operation
wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the
rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable risk of causing an accident.
brakes can overheat.
to clean off the pads and disks by braking ● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
firmly a few times at a moderately high speed neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure
››› . to follow this instruction could result in an
accident. Hill driving assistant*
Fault in the brake system ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is

Emergencies
subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can This function is only included in vehicles with
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase ESC.
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two form in the brake system. This reduces the ef-
ficiency of the brakes. The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately
to the nearest specialised workshop and move off and upward on a hill when the vehi-
have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly CAUTION cle is stationary.
and remember that you will have to apply ● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
more pressure on the brake pedal and allow foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to proximately two seconds after the driver

Safety
for longer stopping distances. brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent
longer stopping distances and greater wear. the vehicle from lurching backward when it is
● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, started. During these 2 seconds, the driver
it is advisable to reduce speed and select a has enough time to release the clutch pedal
lower gear. This makes use of engine braking and accelerate without the vehicle moving
and without having to use the handbrake, »
181
 Operation

making start-up easier, more comfortable Note ● The vehicle cannot be towing a trailer.
and safer.
The Official Service or a specialist workshop WARNING
These are the basic operation conditions: can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with
this system. ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
● being on a ramp or hill/slope, cle is stationary. The brake servo and power
● doors closed, steering functions will not be completely cov-
ered under warranty. More force may also be
● vehicle completely stationary,
Start-Stop system* needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake.
● engine running and foot on the brake, As you cannot steer and brake in the normal
manner, there is a greater risk of accidents
● besides having a gear engaged or being in Description and operation and serious injury.
neutral for manual gear change and with the
● Never remove the key from the ignition if
selector lever at position S, D or R for an au- ››› table on page 2
tomatic gearbox. the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re- ing could lock making it impossible to steer
This system is also active when reversing up- duce CO2 emissions. the vehicle.
hill. ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- Stop system is switched off when working in
WARNING cally switch off when the vehicle stops, when the engine compartment ››› page 184.
stopping at traffic lights for example. The ig-
● If you do not start the vehicle immediately nition remains switched on during the stop-
after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the ping phase. The engine automatically CAUTION
vehicle may start to roll back under certain
switches back on when required. The Start-Stop system must always be
conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use switched off when driving through flooded
the hand brake immediately. As soon as the ignition is switched on, the areas ››› page 184.
● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped- Start-Stop function is automatically activa-
al or use the hand brake immediately. ted.
● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode Stopping/Starting the engine
want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back
accidentally when starting off, hold the brake ● The driver door must be closed. Vehicles with a manual gearbox
pedal down for a few seconds before starting
● The driver must have their seat belt fas- – When the vehicle is stopped, put it into
off.
tened. neutral and release the clutch pedal. The
● The bonnet must be closed. engine will switch off. The warning lamp 
● The vehicle must have travelled at more will appear on the instrument panel dis-
than 4 km/h (2 mph) since the last stop. play.
182
 Driver assistance systems

– When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- Note ● The interior temperature selected for the air

Technical data
gine will start up again. The warning lamp conditioner has not yet been reached.
● You can control whether the engine should
will switch off. ● The interior temperature is very high/low.
switch off or not by reducing or increasing the
brake force applied. While the vehicle re- ● Defrost function button activated
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox mains stopped, the engine will not stop if the ›››  page 51.
– Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams
● The parking aid* is switched on.
stop and keep the brake pedal pressed with frequent stopping and starting for exam-
down with your foot. The engine will switch ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied to ● The battery is very low.
off. The warning lamp  will appear in the the brake pedal, the engine will stop.

Advice
● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
display. ● In vehicles with manual gearbox, during ing turned.
the stopping phases the brake pedal must re-
– When you take your foot off the brake pedal ● If there is a danger of misting.
main depressed to prevent the vehicle from
the engine will start up again. The warning moving. ● After engaging reverse gear.
lamp will switch off. ● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man- ● In case of a very steep gradient.
ual gearbox, it can be directly started up

Operation
Additional information related to the auto- ● In the CUPRA version with automatic gear-
matic gearbox again by immediately pressing the clutch
box, when it is in Tiptronic mode or in its
pedal.
The engine stops when the selector lever is in sports driving position (S).
the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to The indication  is shown on the instrument
when in manual mode. With the selector lev-
General notes panel display, and in addition, the driver in-
er in position P, the engine will also remain

Emergencies
formation system* shows, .
switched off when you take your foot off the
The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode
brake pedal. In order to start the engine up
frequently for different reasons. The engine starts by itself
again the accelerator must be pressed, or an-
other gear engaged or the brake released. During a stopping phase the normal Start-
The engine does not switch off Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-
If the selector lever is placed in position R Before the stopping phase, the system veri- ing situations: The engine restarts by itself
during the stopping phase, the engine will fies whether certain conditions are met. The without involvement from the driver.
start up again. engine does not switch off, in the following

Safety
● The interior temperature differs from the
Change from position D to P to prevent the situations for example:
engine from accidentally starting when value selected on the air conditioner.
● The engine has not yet reached the mini- ● Defrost function button activated
changing and passing by position R.
mum required temperature for the Start-Stop ›››  page 51. »
mode.

183
 Operation

● The brake has been pressed several times – To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop Cruise control system (GRA)*
consecutively. system, press the button  . The button
● The battery is too low. symbol remains lit up yellow when the sys-
Operation
tem is switched off.
● High power consumption.
Note
Note
The system is automatically switched on each
In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the time the engine is deliberately stopped dur-
selector lever is placed in position D, N or S ing a stopping phase. The engine will start
after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must automatically.
be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (5
mph) for the system to return to conditions in
which the engine can be stopped.
Driver messages on the instrument
panel display
Manually switching on/off the Start-
Start-Stop system deactivated.
Stop system Start the engine manually
This driver message is displayed when cer- Fig. 191 Instrument panel display: CCS status
tain conditions are not met during the stop- indications
ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot
restart the engine. The engine must be star- Read the additional information carefully
ted manually. ›››  page 44
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
Start-Stop system: Fault! Func-
maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15
tion not available
mph).
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-
the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault
ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the
Fig. 190 Centre console: Start-Stop system repaired.
vehicle ››› in Operating the cruise control
button
system (CCS)* on page 45.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
switch it off manually.

184
 Driver assistance systems

Control lamp The value indicated in the table in brackets Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*

Technical data
When the warning lamp  is lit, cruise con- (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-
ment panels with indications in miles.
trol is active. Introduction
Several warning and control lamps light up Changing gear in CCS mode
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
verified. They will switch off after a few sec- pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
onds. cally after a gear is engaged.

Advice
Displayed on the CCS screen Travelling down hills with the CCS

Status Fig. 191: When travelling down hills the CCS cannot
maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle
A CCS temporarily switched off. The set down using the brake pedal and reduce
speed is displayed in small figures. gears if required.

Operation
Fig. 192 Detection area.
B System error. Contact a specialised work-
shop. Automatic off
The cruise control system (CCS) is switched ››› table on page 2
C CCS switched on. The speed memory is
empty. off automatically or temporarily: The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten-
D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is sion of the normal cruise control system
● If the system detects a fault that could af-
(CCS) ››› .

Emergencies
displayed in large figures. fect the working order of the CCS.
● If you press and maintain the accelerator The ACC function allows the driver to estab-
WARNING lish a cruise speed of between 30 and 160
pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
Observe the safety warnings ››› in On the the stored speed. km/h (18 and 100 mph), as well as the tem-
instrument panel on page 47. porary distance required with regard to the
● If the dynamic driving control systems in-
vehicle in front. The ACC function will adapt
tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC). the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, main-
● If the airbag is triggered. taining a safe distance with the vehicle in

Safety
Operating the cruise control system* front.
Read the additional information carefully The ACC function is based on a radar sensor
›››  page 44 that can measure the distance to the vehicles
in front. »
185
 Operation

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic ● The ACC does not react on approaching a Note
gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic ● If the ACC system does not work as descri-
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped
bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has
stops. at the traffic lights.
been checked by a specialised workshop.
● The ACC does not react to people or animal SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
Driver intervention prompt or vehicles crossing your path or which ap- for this purpose.
During driving, the ACC is subject to certain proach you head-on in the same lane. ● Maximum speed with the ACC activated is
limitations inherent in the system. In other ● If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient- limited to 160 km/h (100 mph).
words, in certain circumstances the driver will ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying ● When the ACC is switched on, strange
have to adjust speed him or herself, as well the pedal.
noises may be heard during automatic brak-
as the distance from other vehicles. ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, ing cause by the braking system.
the ACC system could automatically switch
In this case, the instrument panel screen will off during the journey. Switch off the system
warn you to intervene by applying the brake when starting off.
and a warning tone will be heard
● If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-
››› page 187. ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake
the vehicle by applying the pedal.
WARNING
● If the dash panel displays a driver interven-
The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.
overcome the system's inherent limitations
● The driver should be ready to accelerate or
or change the laws of physics. If used negli-
brake by him/herself at all times.
gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
accidents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness. CAUTION
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it
● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, adjusted.
on steep roads, with several bends or in slip- ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
loose gravel, or on flooded roads. mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
● Never use the ACC when driving off-road or pose.
on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-
signed for use on paved roads only.
186
 Driver assistance systems

Indications on the display, warning 2 Distance margin selected, the ACC is in- If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-

Technical data
and indication lamps active.  tive.
3 Vehicle detected in front. The ACC is ac-
A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts
tive.
speed and distance from the vehicle in front.
4 Adjustment of the temporary distance
from the vehicle in front with a program-
If the symbol is grey: the ACC is not
med speed.  active.
5 Temporary distance adjustment from the

Advice
vehicle in front with a programmed The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
speed.

Warning and control lamps
The ACC is active.
››› in On the instrument panel on page 47.

Operation
Some warning and control lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is switched on to
The speed reduction by the ACC to
check certain functions. They will switch off
 maintain the distance from the vehi-
after a few seconds.
cle in front is not sufficient.
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt. WARNING

Emergencies
Observe the safety warnings ››› in On the
 The ACC is not currently available. a) instrument panel on page 47.

Fig. 193 On the instrument panel display: (A) With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and
start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually for dirt, Note
ACC temporarily inactive, vehicle detected in
ice or knocks. If it is still unavailable, refer to a special- When the ACC is connected, the indications
front, temporary distance adjusted. (B) ACC
ised workshop to have the system inspected. on the instrument panel screen may be con-
active, vehicle detected in front, temporary
distance adjusted. a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in cealed by warnings from other functions,

Safety
colour. such as an incoming call.
Status display
Indications on the display ››› Fig. 193:  The ACC is active.
1 Vehicle in front, the ACC is inactive. No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed
remains constant.

187
 Operation

Radar sensor ample, in a closed car park or due to the ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
road or sheets used in road works). mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
pose.
The area in front of and around the radar sen-
sor should not be covered with adhesives, ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the
additional or similar headlights, as this may ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer
negatively affect ACC operation. spray.

If structural modifications are made to the ve-

hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-
ered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC op-
eration may be affected. So structural modifi-
Fig. 194 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
cations should only be made by specialised
workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- dealership for this purpose.
er to determine the traffic situation If work is done incorrectly on the front of the
››› Fig. 194 1 . This sensor can detect vehi- vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged
cles in front up to a distance of approximately or lose its settings, and ACC operation may
120 m. be affected. So repair work should only be
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired made by specialised workshops. SEAT recom-
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the pose.
adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.
The instrument panel displays the following CAUTION
message: ACC: No sensor vision! If If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
necessary clean the radar sensor ››› . sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-
connect the ACC. This will avoid possible
When the radar sensor begins to operate damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
properly again, the ACC will automatically be
● The sensor may become damaged or lose
available again. The message on the instru-
its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
will be reactivated again. mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-
dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex-
188
 Driver assistance systems

Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is The following settings can also be adjusted:

Technical data
ACC connected, the green control lamp  will
light up on the instrument panel, and the ● Distance.
programmed speed and ACC status will be ● Driving Programme.
displayed ››› Fig. 193. ● Driving style.

Conditions for the adaptive cruise control to Activating/Deactivating

be activated
Any speed1) between 30 and 160 km/h (19
● The selector lever must be at the D or S po-

Advice
and 100 mph) can be adjusted.
sition or in the tiptronic selection track. In
manual gearbox any forward gear must be Activating the ACC
engaged, except the 1st gear.
● In vehicles with manual gearbox, if there is
››› Fig. 195.
● Pull the lever to position 1
Fig. 195 On the left of the steering column: ACC standby will be shown on the instrument
no programmed speed, drive at least at
panel display.

Operation
third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise 30 km/h (18 mph).
Control.
Programme speed and activate control
Speed control
● Press the SET ››› Fig. 196 button to pro-
When the ACC is connected, speed can be
gramme current speed.
programmed and adjusted. The programmed
speed must be different from the speed at ● Automatic gearbox: apply the brake pedal

Emergencies
which the vehicle travels if the distance is be- to activate control with the vehicle stationary.
ing adjusted at the time.
Deactivating the ACC
What functions can be operated? ● Move the lever to position 0 until it en-
If you activate the ACC the current speed can gages. The text ACC: off appears.
be programmed as the “control speed”.
Fig. 196 On the left of the steering column: Altering speed

Safety
During driving, control can be operated at
third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise ● To increase or reduce speed step by step,
any time and the speed also modified.
Control. press the lever up/down briefly ››› Fig. 196. »

1) Different speed limits apply in each country and

depend on the unit indicated on the speedometer.

189
 Operation

Any modification to the programmed speed The following driving programmes items can tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case
is shown on the bottom left part of the instru- be selected: the brake pedal should be applied immedi-
ment panel display. ately.
● Normal
● The ACC may not be able to detect all situa-
Adjusting distance level ● Sport tions properly.
The distance according to speed with regard ● Eco ● “Stepping” on the accelerator may cause
to the vehicle in front can be controlled on the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver
the Easy Connect system on 5 levels In vehicles without driving profile selection, braking will have priority over intervention by
›››  page 32. acceleration behaviour can be influenced by the speed control or adaptive cruise control.
selecting a driving programme on the Easy
● Always be ready to use the brakes!
In wet road conditions, you should always set Connect system by means of the button 
a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in ● Observe country-specific provisions gov-
and the function buttons  and
front than when driving in dry conditions. Driver assistance ›››  page 32. erning obligatory minimum distances be-
tween vehicles.
The following distances can be preselected:
The following conditions may lead the ACC
● Very short not to react: Note
● Short ● If the accelerator is pressed. ● The programmed speed is erased once the
● Media ignition or the ACC are switched off.
● If there is no gear engaged.
● When the traction control system (ASR) is
● Long ● If the ESC is controlling.
deactivated during acceleration or else the
● Very long ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat ESC is activated in Sport* Mode
belt. (››› page 112), the ACC switches off automati-
You can use the Easy Connect system to ad- cally.
● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
just the level of distance that should be ad- ● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
justed when the ACC is switched on with the trically connected trailer are damaged.
engine switches off automatically during the
button  and the function buttons  and ● If the vehicle is reversing.
ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical-
Driver assistance ›››  page 32. ● Driving faster than 160 km/h (100 mph). ly to begin driving.

Adjusting the driving programme WARNING

In vehicles with driving profile selection There is a danger of rear collision when the Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
(SEAT Drive Profile), the profile selected can minimum distance to the vehicle in front is
influence acceleration behaviour exceeded and the speed difference between If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
››› page 203. both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc- gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until

190
 Driver assistance systems

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it CAUTION ● To resume the programmed speed, turn the

Technical data
stops. lever to position 2 .
● If your vehicle with ACC does not start up
The ACC will still be available for a few sec- as expected, you can drive off by briefly step-
Interrupt speed control with the vehicle sta-
onds. The vehicle will restart by itself if the ping on the accelerator.
tionary
vehicle in front moves (traffic jam assistant). ● The Start-Stop system usually acts if you
are driving with ACC. Applies to vehicles with automatic gearbox:
Disconnection criteria
● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC
The ACC will switch off if the driver applies standby message is displayed to the driver.

Advice
the brake pedal or the driver's door is Interrupting control ● To resume control, apply the brake and turn
opened.
the lever to position 2 .
If the vehicle in front remains stationary for
more than 3 seconds, the ACC will also WARNING
switch off for safety reasons. In this case the It is dangerous to activate control and resume

Operation
driver should take control and apply the the programmed speed if the road, traffic or
brake. weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of
In the latter case, when the ACC is switched accident!
off with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle
has to be braked by the pedal, since al-
though the car is idling it can move, as there Setting the distance

Emergencies
is a gear engaged. Fig. 197 On the left of the steering column:
third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise
Restarting the vehicle with the ACC manually Control.
The ACC can be activated again by moving
the lever to position 2 ››› Fig. 197. Important: the ACC is active.

WARNING Interrupting control during driving

Safety
Your vehicle can start up even if there is an ● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC
obstacle between your vehicle and the vehi- standby message is displayed to the driver.
cle detected in front. Risk of accident! or
● Brake.
Fig. 198 Control lever for: setting the dis-
tance. »
191
 Operation

● To display the distance currently program-  ACC: currently not available. No sensor vi-  ACC: Take action!
med, briefly press the rocking button sion The message for the driver is displayed if,
››› Fig. 198. when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a
● To increase/reduce the distance one level,  ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa- mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al-
press the rocking button again towards the ble. No sensor vision though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake
left/right. The instrument panel display This message will be displayed to the driver if to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding
modifies the distance between both vehicles. the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for with another vehicle.
example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.
If the vehicle approaches another vehicle de-  ACC: speed limit
Clean the sensor.
tected in front of it, the ACC reduces the
speed accordingly and then controls the ad- The message for the driver is displayed if, in
 ACC: currently not available. Gradient too vehicles with manual gearbox, the current
justed distance. If the vehicle detected in
steep speed is too low for the ACC mode.
front accelerates, the adaptive cruise control
will also accelerate up to the target speed The maximum road slope has been excee- The speed to be stored must be at least 30
programmed at most. ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be km/h. The cruise control system switches off
guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on. if the speed falls below 20 km/h.
The greater the speed, the greater the dis-
tance in metres should be ››› . We recom-
 ACC: only available in D, S or M  ACC: available as of the 2nd gear
mend the setting Distance 3.
Select the D/S or M position on the selector The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear
WARNING lever. (manual gearbox).
With regard to distance setting, the driver is
 ACC: parking brake applied  ACC: engine speed
responsible for observing country-specific
legislation. The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is The message for the driver is displayed if,
applied. The ACC is available once again after when the AAC accelerates or brakes, the driv-
the parking brake is released. er does not shift up or down a gear in time,
Message texts which means exceeding or not reaching the
 ACC: currently not available. Intervention permissible engine speed. The AAC switches
 ACC not available of stability control itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.
The system can no longer continue to guar- The message for the driver is displayed when
antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-  ACC: clutch pressed
activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the
damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised switched off. clutch pedal for longer abandons control
workshop and have the fault repaired. mode.
192
 Driver assistance systems

 ● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the Special driving situations

Technical data
Three white dots appear if a setting made vehicle in front might not be detected proper-
with the control lever cannot be performed. ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be
For example, if when the vehicle is stationary detected at all.
the ACC cannot be activated because the
driver is not wearing the seat belt. WARNING
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-
Door open tions described, serious accidents and inju-
ries may occur.

Advice
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC
● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-
cannot be activated with the vehicle station-
tions.
ary and the door open.

Note
Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con- If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore-

Operation
trol ACC temporarily in certain situa- mentioned situations, you may commit a le-
tions gal offence.
Fig. 199 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-
In the following situations the Adaptive clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor. »
Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated
due to the system's limitations ››› :

Emergencies
● When changing lanes, on tight bends and
roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-
tion lanes on motorways or in sections with
road works to prevent involuntary accelera-
tion to reach the programmed speed.
● When going through a tunnel, as operation

Safety
could be affected.
● On roads with several lanes, when other ve-
hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-
ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be
overtaken on the right.

193
 Operation

tem will inform the driver that he or she driver has to intervene by accelerating or in-
should take control of the vehicle by means terrupting the braking process by applying
of an audible and visual warning on the in- the brake or pushing the third lever back-
strument panel. wards ››› page 189.

Starting driving after a stopping phase (only Driving in tunnels

vehicles with automatic gearbox) When driving through tunnels the radar sen-
After a stopping phase the ACC may begin sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-
driving automatically when the vehicle in nels.
front drives off.
Narrow or misaligned vehicles
Overtaking The radar sensor can only detect narrow or
When the turn signal lights up before the ve- misaligned vehicles when they are within
hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the range ››› Fig. 199 B. This applies particularly
ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In
Fig. 200 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One
and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- these cases, you should brake as necessary.
vehicle turning and another stationary.
cle in front.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain Vehicles with special loads and accessories
When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,
physical limitations inherent in the system. if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in Special loads and accessories of other vehi-
For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or
certain circumstances, may be unexpected or grammed speed and maintains it. over the top may be out of the ACC's range.
come late from the driver's point of view. So
System acceleration can be interrupted at Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-
pay attention in order to intervene if necessa-
any time by pressing the brake or moving the cles with special loads and accessories or
ry.
third lever backwards ››› page 189. when overtaking them. In these cases, you
For example, the following traffic situations should brake as necessary.
call for the utmost attention: Driving through a bend
Other vehicles changing lanes
On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen-
Deceleration until the vehicle has stopped Vehicles changing lanes a short distance
sor may no longer determine the vehicle in
(only vehicles with automatic gearbox) away from your own can only be detected
front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane
If the vehicle in front slows down and stops, ››› Fig. 199 A. In these situations the vehicle when they are within range of the sensors.
the ACC will also slow down and halt the ve- may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re-
hicle. After approximately 3 seconds the sys- act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the
194
 Driver assistance systems

Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- When the radar sensor begins to operate the vehicle in front starts up, the vehicle will

Technical data
act ››› Fig. 200 C. In these cases, you should properly again, the ACC will automatically be start up automatically. In this case the radar
brake as necessary. available again. The message on the instru- sensor may not detect obstacles on the road.
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC This could cause an accident and serious in-
Stationary vehicles will be reactivated again. juries.
The ACC does not detect stationary objects ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- ● Before driving off, check that the road is
while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed clear. If necessary, apply the brake.
vehicles. car park.

Advice
If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or
Trailer towing
moves over and there is a stationary vehicle Monitoring system Front As-
in front of it, the ACC will not react to it When driving with trailer the ACC controls
››› Fig. 200 D. In these cases, you should less dynamically.
sist*
brake as necessary.
Overheated brakes Introduction

Operation
Vehicles driving in the opposite direction If the brakes overheat, for example after
and vehicles crossing your path ››› table on page 2
abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,
The ACC does not react to vehicles approach- the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The The Front Assist Monitoring system helps to
ing from the opposite direction or vehicles relevant text message will appear in the dash prevent rear collisions.
crossing your path. panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise
The Front Assist can warn the driver of colli-

Emergencies
control cannot be activated.
sion hazards, prepare the vehicle for emer-
Metal objects gency braking in case of danger, assist the
Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated
Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets once brake temperature has cooled suffi- driver on braking and cause automatic brak-
used in road works, can confuse the radar ciently. The message will disappear from the ing.
sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. instrument panel display. If the message ACC
The Front Assist is not a replacement for
not available remains on for quite a long
driver awareness.
Factors that may affect how the radar sensor time it means that there is a fault. Contact a
operates specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-

Safety
Distance warning
If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to iting a SEAT dealership.
If the system detects that safety is endan-
heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is
WARNING gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front,
deactivated temporarily. The relevant text
it may warn the driver by means of a message
message will appear in the dash panel dis- If the message ACC ready to start ap-
on the instrument panel when driving at a
play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor. pears on the instrument panel display and
speed of between approximately 60 km/h »
195
 Operation

(37 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph) (130 mph). By reducing speed in case of a dar sensor has lost its settings, the system
››› Fig. 201. possible collision, the system may contribute may issue unnecessary warnings and inter-
to reducing the consequences of an accident. vene inopportunely in the braking.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. ● During driving, the Front Assist does not re-
Front assist act to people or animals or vehicles crossing
Pre-warning If the Front Assist notices that the driver is your path or which approach you head-on in
not braking sufficiently in case of a collision the same lane.
If the system detects a possible collision with ● The driver must always be ready to take
hazard, the system can increase braking ef-
the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by over the control of the vehicle.
fect and thus avert the collision when driving
means of an audible warning and an indica-
at a speed of between approximately 5 km/h
tion on the instrument panel when driving at
(3 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). Front as- Note
a speed of between approximately 30 km/h
sist only acts while the brake pedal is press-
(18 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph) ● When the Front Assist causes a braking,
ed down hard.
››› Fig. 201. the brake pedal is “harder”.
The warning moment varies depending on WARNING ● Automatic interventions by the Front Assist
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing
The intelligent technology in the Front Assist the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a cannot change the laws of physics. The driver
possible emergency braking ››› . is always responsible for braking in time. If
● If the Front Assist does not work as descri-
the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de- bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several
Critical warning pending on the traffic circumstances, you times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the
must brake immediately or dodge the obsta- system checked by a specialised workshop.
If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
cle.
the system may actively intervene in the
brakes when driving at a speed of between ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
210 km/h (130 mph), generating a brief jolt bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
to warn of the imminent collision. ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
Automatic braking ● In complex driving situations, the Front As-
sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in-
If the driver also fails to react to the pre-warn-
tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in
ing, the system may brake the vehicle auto- traffic islands.
matically, by progressively increasing braking
● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
effect driving at a speed of between approxi-
paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-
mately 5 km/h (3 mph) and 210 km/h
196
 Driver assistance systems

On-screen warning lamps and mes- Radar sensor cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

Technical data
sages to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails
on the road or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar sen-
sor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect Front Assist operation.
If structural modifications are made to the ve-

Advice
hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-
ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As-
sist operation may be affected. So structural
Fig. 202 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
modifications should only be made by speci-
alised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting
Fig. 201 On the instrument panel display:
A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

Operation
Warning indications.
er to determine the traffic situation If work is done incorrectly on the front of the
Distance warning ››› Fig. 202 1 . This sensor can detect vehi- vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged
cles in front up to a distance of approximately or lose its settings, and Front Assist opera-
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
120 m. tion may be affected. So repair work should
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired only be made by specialised workshops.

Emergencies
. by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the for this purpose.
WARNING Front Assist monitoring system does not
work. The instrument panel displays the fol- CAUTION
Observe the safety warnings ››› in On the
instrument panel on page 47. lowing message: Front Assist: No If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
sensor vision! If necessary clean the ra- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-
dar sensor ››› . connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-
Note sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

Safety
When the radar sensor begins to operate
When the Front Assist is connected, the indi- ● The sensor may become damaged or lose
properly again, the Front Assist will automati-
cations on the instrument panel screen may its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
be concealed by warnings from other func- cally be available again. The message will
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
tions, such as an incoming call. disappear from the instrument panel display. mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. »
Front Assist operation may be affected by a
strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
197
 Operation

● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- Switching the Front Assist Monitoring Sys- Switching distance warning on and off
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- tem off in the following situations. If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
pose. Switching the Front Assist monitoring sys- appear on the instrument panel display
● Clean away the snow with a brush and the tem on and off . In this case, increase the safe dis-
ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer With the ignition switched on, the Front As- tance.
spray. sist can be switched on and off as follows: The distance warning function can be activa-
● Select the corresponding menu option us- ted or deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-
ing the button for the driver assist systems tem with the button  and the function but-
Operating the Front Assist monitoring ›››  page 36. tons  and Driver Assist ›››  page 32.
system ● OR: switch the system on or off in the Easy The system will store the setting for the next
Connect system with the button  and the time the ignition is switched on.
function buttons  and Driver Assist
›››  page 32. SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning switched on at all times.
When the Front Assist monitoring system is
switched off, the instrument panel will inform
that it has been switched off with the follow- Switching the Front Assist Monitoring
ing indicator  ››› Fig. 203. System off in the following situations
Switching the pre-warning function on or off In the following situations the Front Assist
The pre-warning function can be switched on Monitoring System should be deactivated
Fig. 203 On the instrument panel display: or off in the Easy Connect system with the due to the system's limitations ››› :
Front Assist switched off message. button  and the function buttons  and
● When the vehicle is to be towed.
Driver Assist ›››  page 32.
The Front Assist monitoring system is active ● If the vehicle is on a test bed.
whenever the ignition is switched on. The system will store the setting for the next
● When the radar sensor is damaged.
time the ignition is switched on.
When the Front Assist is switched off, so too ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for
are the pre-warning function (pre warning) SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning
example in a rear collision.
and the distance warning. function switched on at all times.
● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-
ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 198,

198
 Driver assistance systems

● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily ● If the ASR has been manually disconnec- City Emergency braking function

Technical data
with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ted.
ditional headlight or the like. ● If the ESC is controlling.
● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
ferry or train. trically connected trailer are damaged.
● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
WARNING
● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the
If the Front Assist is not switched off in the
road or sheets used in road works.

Advice
situations described, serious accidents and
injuries may occur. ● If the vehicle is reversing.
● Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa- ● If the vehicle over-accelerates.
tions. ● In case of snow or heavy rain. Fig. 204 On the instrument panel display:
● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- pre-warning message

Operation
bikes.
System limitations The City Emergency braking function is part
● Misaligned vehicles.
of the Front Assist monitoring and is active
The Front Assist Monitoring System has cer- ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. whenever the system is switched on.
tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tem. Thus, in certain circumstances some of Depending on the equipment, the pre-warn-
tion.
the system's reactions may be inopportune ing function can be switched on or off in the

Emergencies
● Special loads and accessories of other ve- Easy Connect system with the button  and
or be delayed from the driver's standpoint.
So pay attention in order to intervene if nec- hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards the function buttons  and Driver Assist
essary. or over the top. ›››  page 32.
The City Emergency braking function picks
The following conditions may cause the Front up, at speeds between 5 km/h (3 mph) and
Assist Monitoring System not to react or do 30 km/h (19 mph) approximately, the traffic
so too late: situation in front of the vehicle up to a dis-

Safety
● On taking tight bends. tance of about 10 m.
● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. If the system detects a possible collision with
● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares
aged. for a possible emergency braking ››› . »

199
 Operation

If the driver fails to react to a possible colli- ● If the operation of the City Emergency brak- ● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc-
sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto- ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt cur, the City Emergency braking function may
matically, by progressively increasing braking or because the radar sensor has lost its set- switch off automatically.
effect driving to reduce speed in the event of tings, the system may issue unnecessary
a collision. The system can thus help to re- warnings and intervene inopportunely in the
duce the consequences of an accident. braking.
● During driving, the City Emergency braking Lane Assist system*
Status display function does not react to people or animals
Automatic deceleration by means of the City
or vehicles crossing your path or which ap- Introduction
proach you head-on in the same lane.
Emergency braking function is displayed on
the instrument panel by means of the pre- ››› table on page 2
warning ››› Fig. 2041). Note
● When the City Emergency braking function WARNING
WARNING causes a braking, the brake pedal is “hard- The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist
The smart technology included in the City er”. system cannot change the limits imposed by
Emergency braking function cannot defy the ● Automatic interventions on the brakes by the laws of physics and by the very nature of
laws of physics. The driver is always respon- the City Emergency braking function may be the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of
sible for braking in time. interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera- the Lane Assist system may cause accidents
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the tor or moving the wheel. and injury. The system is not a replacement
for driver awareness.
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- ● The City Emergency braking function can
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. brake the vehicle until it stops completely. ● Always adapt your speed and the distance
● The City Emergency braking function alone However, the brake system does not halt the to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,
vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake! weather conditions, the condition of the road
cannot prevent accidents or serious injury.
● If several inopportune intervenes occur,
and the traffic situation.
● In complex driving situations, the City
switch off the Front Assist and with it the City ● Always keep your hands on the steering
Emergency braking function may issue unnec-
Emergency braking function. Take it to a spe- wheel so it can be turned at any time.
essary warnings and intervene inopportunely
in braking, such as in work areas or if there cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting ● The Lane Assist system does not detect all
are metal rails. a SEAT dealership. road markings. The road surfaces, road struc-
tures or objects in poor condition can be in-
correctly detected as road markings under

1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour

display is in colour.
200
 Driver assistance systems

certain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys- Indications on the display and lamps

Technical data
tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As-
sist system off immediately.
● Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
● When the area of vision of the camera be-

Advice
comes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane
Assist system function can be affected.

CAUTION
In order to avoid influencing the operation of
the system, the following points must be tak-

Operation
en into account:
● Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
● Do not cover the area of vision of the cam-

Emergencies
era. Fig. 206 On the instrument panel display: In-
● Check that the area of vision of the wind- dication on the Lane Assist system display
screen camera is not damaged. Fig. 205 On the instrument panel display: In- (example 2).
dication on the Lane Assist system display
(example 1). Status display
Note
– The system is active, but not available,
● The Lane Assist system has been exclusive-
either because the minimum speed has
ly developed for driving on paved roads only.
not been reached or because the lane

Safety
● If the Lane Assist system does not work as
lines are not recognised ››› Fig. 205 A.
described in this chapter, do not use it and
contact a specialised workshop. – The system is active and available, both
● If there is a fault in the system, have it
lane lines are recognised. The steering
checked by a specialised workshop.
angle is not being corrected at this mo-
ment ››› Fig. 205 B. »
201
 Operation

– The system is operational, the highligh- Operation ● When the maximum rotational torque dur-
ted line A indicates that there was a ing the corrective steering movement is not
risk of involuntarily crossing the lane enough to keep the vehicle inside the lane.
line and that the steering is being adjus- ● When no lane is detected during the correc-
ted to correct the angle ››› Fig. 206 C. tive steering movement.
– The two lines A light up simultaneously
when both lane lines are recognised and Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
the Lane Assist function is active
Through the Easy Connect system
››› Fig. 206 D.
● Push the Easy Connect button CAR
Control lamps ● Push the Setup function button
● Press the function button driver assistance to
Blinks or lights up yellow: Lane Assist Fig. 207 In the windscreen: field of vision of
 active but not available. open the menu.
the Lane Assist system camera.
The system can not accurately recognise the lane. Alternatively: through the driving assist
Please see page 203, the Lane Assist system is not Using the camera located in the windscreen, button on the turn signal level*.
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow). the Lane Assist system detects the possible
lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- The Lane centring guide is activa-
voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has ted/deactivated in the Easy Connect system
 Blinks or lights up green:
detected, the system notifies the driver with using the CAR button and the button on the
Setup function ››› page 112.
Lane Assist system active and available. a corrective steering movement. This move-
ment can be over-regulated at any time. Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system can
WARNING No warning is produced with the turn signals be automatically deactivated if there is a sys-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in On the activated, given that the Lane Assist system tem malfunction. The control lamp disap-
instrument panel on page 47. understands that a lane change is required. pears.

Steering wheel vibration Hands-Off Function

● If the driver does not exert any physical ac-
The following situations cause vibration in
the steering wheel and require the driver to tion on the steering wheel for approximately
take active control of driving: 10 to 12 sec. the function deactivates.
● Visual and audible warnings on the instru-
● When the limits of the very nature of the ment panel.
system are reached.
202
 Driver assistance systems

● The function switches off 2 seconds after Switching off the Lane Assist system tem Plus, the Comfort profile is also availa-

Technical data
the warning. in the following situations ble.
In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles are
The lane assist system is active but it is not Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, Comfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual.
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow) switch it off in the following situations:
● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38
The Individual profile can be configured
● When more attention is required of the according to personal preferences. The other
mph). driver profiles are fixed.
● When the Lane Assist system does not de-
● When driving in a sporty style

Advice
tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-
ple, in the event warnings indicating road ● In unfavourable weather conditions
Description
works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec- ● On roads in poor condition
tions. ● In areas of road works Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
● When the radius of a curve is too small. hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
● When no road markings can be seen. Note following functions:

Operation
● When the distance to the next marking to The Lane Assist system deactivates when
driving below 60 km/h (40 mph). Engine
too great.
● When the system does not detect any clear Depending on the profile selected, the en-
and active steering movement during a long gine responds more spontaneously or more
in harmony with the movements of the accel-
period of time. SEAT Drive Profile*

Emergencies
erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selec-
● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic ted, the Start-stop function is automatically
driving styles. Introduction activated.
● If a turn signal is activated.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
● With the stability control system (ESC) in ››› table on page 2 gear change points are modified to position
Sport mode or switched off. SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. »
choose between four profiles or modes, Nor-
Note

Safety
mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that
● Before starting a journey, verify that the modify the behaviour of various vehicle func-
field of vision of the camera is not covered tions, providing different driving experiences.
››› Fig. 207.
In the FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped
● Always keep the field of vision of the cam- with dynamic chassis control and Navi Sys-
era clean.
203
 Operation

Additionally, the Eco1) mode activates the In- Air conditioning Setting driving mode
ertia function, enabling consumption to be In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate
further reduced. in eco1) mode, especially restricting fuel con-
In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco1) mode cau- sumption.
ses the gear change recommendation indica-
tions that appear on the instrument panel to Ambient lighting
vary, facilitating more efficient driving. The ambient lighting guides located in the in-
terior front door panels of the Leon FR and
Dynamic chassis control (DCC) the Leon Cupra change colour from white to
››› table on page 2 red depending on the driving mode selected.

DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)2)
ers to the condition of the road and current Fig. 208 Centre console: MODE button.
According to the active driving profile, the ac-
driving conditions, according to the pre-set
celeration gradient of the adaptive cruise You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco
programme.
control varies. and Individual.
In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the instrument Electronic self-locking differential2) You can select the required mode either by
screen Fault: damping setting. repeatedly pressing the button MODE
The self-locking differential adapts its behav- ››› Fig. 208, or on the touch screen, in the
iour depending on the driving profile chosen. menu that opens when the above button is
Address Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selected pressed.
Power steering becomes more robust in to prioritise improved traction in sport driv-
Sport mode to enable a sportier driving ing. An icon on the Easy Connect system display
style. In the Leon Cupra the power steering informs about the active mode.
becomes more robust in Cupra mode. The MODE button light remains lit up yellow
when the active mode is different to Normal.

1) In the Leon Cupra model, Eco mode is selected

through the Individual profile.

2) Applies to the Leon Cupra model.
204
 Driver assistance systems

Driving ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev- You can select from Convenience, Sport,

Technical data
Characteristics ertheless, when the engine is restarted the Cupra and Individual.
profile
engine and the gear will not restart in its
Offers a balanced driving experience, suit- sportier mode in order to save fuel. For en- Cupra Drive Profile button
Normal
able for everyday use. gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode,
You can select the required mode either by
select the corresponding driving profile again
Provides a complete dynamic performance
on the Easy Connect system screen.
repeatedly pressing the button with the Cu-
Sport in the vehicle, enabling the user a more pra logotype ››› Fig. 209, or on the touch
sporty driving style. ● Your speed and driving style must always
screen, in the menu that opens when the
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic
above button is pressed.

Advice
Places the vehicle in a particularly low conditions.
state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-
Eco
saving driving style that is respectful to ● The eco mode is not available when towing An icon on the Easy Connect system display
the environment. a trailer. informs about the active mode.

Enables some configurations to be modi- The light of the button with the Cupra logo-
fied by pressing the Profile settings type remains lit up only when the Cupra pro-
Individ-
Setting driving mode

Operation
button. The functions that can be adjusted file is active.
ual
depend on the equipment fitted in the ve-
3 Applies to the model: Leon Cupra
hicle. Driving Characteristics
It permits more relaxed and comfortable profile
Conven- driving, for example for long motorway
It permits more relaxed and comfortable
iencea) journeys. Its main characteristic is the soft
Conven- driving, for example for long motorway

Emergencies
suspension setting (DCC).
ience journeys. Its main characteristic is the
a)Only for FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped with dynamic soft suspension setting (DCC).
chassis control and Navi System Plus.
It represents the vehicle's default behav-
Sport
iour, suitable for dynamic driving.
WARNING
It gives the vehicle a decidedly sportier
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-
Cupra nature, and makes for maximum perform-
tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause
ance.
an accident.

Safety
Fig. 209 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profile Enables some configurations to be modi-
button. fied by pressing the Profile settings
Note Individ-
button. The functions that can be adjus-
ual
● When the vehicle is switched off it will al- ››› table on page 2 ted depend on the equipment fitted in the
ways store the driving profile that was selec- vehicle. »
205
 Operation

WARNING WARNING
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten- Please note that if the road surface is slip-
tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause pery or wet, the kick-down feature could
an accident. cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
result in skidding.
Note
● When the vehicle is switched off it will al-
ways store the driving profile that was selec-
ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-
ertheless, when the engine is restarted the
engine and the gear will not restart in its
sportier mode in order to save fuel. For en-
gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode,
select the corresponding driving profile again
on the Easy Connect system screen.
● Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic
conditions.

Kick-down
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
celeration to be reached.
If the eco* ››› page 204 mode has been se-
lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler-
ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en-
gine power is automatically controlled to give
your vehicle maximum acceleration.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

206
огромный архив документации по автомобилям Volkswagen, Skoda, Seat, Audi
 Driver assistance systems

Traffic sign detection system system tempt you into taking any risks when ● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-

Technical data
driving. The system is not a replacement for era.
Introduction driver awareness. ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit in the area of the camera's field of vision.
The traffic sign detection system can help the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
driver with information on speed limits or if tions.
Note
overtaking is prohibited at that moment. ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog
● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-
may lead to the system failing to display traf-
The traffic signs and additional information tion system may cause the system to show
fic signs or not displaying them correctly.

Advice
detected by the system are represented on traffic signs incorrectly.
● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
the instrument panel display and in the visu- ● In the route points mode of the navigation
ered or damaged, system operation may be
al presentation of the Infotainment system system, the traffic sign detection system is
impaired.
(representation of the navigation system only partly available.
map).
WARNING

Operation
Countries in which it works The driving recommendations and traffic indi-
When this instruction manual went to print, cations shown on the traffic sign detection
the traffic sign detection system was operat- system may differ from the actual current
ing in the following countries: traffic situation.
● The system may not detect or correctly
Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, show all the traffic signs.

Emergencies
Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France,
● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Lux-
priority over the recommendations and dis-
embourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland, plays provided by the system.
Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Slovakia,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, the
United Kingdom and the Vatican City. Note
In order not to compromise the system's op-
WARNING eration, please take the following points into

Safety
The technology in the traffic sign detection account:
system cannot change the limits imposed by ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the
the laws of physics and only works within the camera and keep it in a clean state, without
system's limits. Do not let the extra conven- snow or ice.
ience afforded by the traffic sign detection

207
 Operation

Indication on display Traffic sign de- Cause and solution Note

tection system Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
messages sponding text messages when they light up
may result in damage to the vehicle.
There are no The system is booting up.
traffic signs OR: the camera has not recog-
available nised any obligation or prohibi-
tion signs.
Operation
Error: Detec- There is a fault in the system.
tion of traffic Have the system checked by a The traffic sign detection system does not
signs specialised workshop. work in all countries ››› page 207, Countries
in which it works. Keep this in mind when
Detection of The windscreen is dirty in the
traffic signs: camera area.
travelling abroad.
Clean the wind- Clean the windscreen.
screen! Display of traffic signs
Traffic sign The navigation system is not When the traffic sign detection system is con-
detection is transmitting any data. nected, a camera located on the base of the
currently limi- Check that the navigation sys- interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
ted tem has up-to-date maps. signs in front of the vehicle. After checking
OR: The vehicle is currently in a and evaluating the information from the cam-
region that is not included in the
navigation system's map.
era, the navigation system and the current
vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs
Fig. 210 On the instrument panel display: ex-
Function not The traffic sign detection system are displayed ››› Fig. 210  in conjunction
available does not work in the current with their corresponding additional signs.
amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
country.
tions with their respective additional signs.
First: The sign that is currently valid for the
Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions with WARNING driver is shown in the left side of the
their respective additional signs may be screen For example, a maximum speed
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall
shown on the instrument panel display in traffic and cause accidents and severe inju-
limit of 130 km/h (100 mph)
››› Fig. 210 and, depending on the navigation ries. ››› Fig. 210 .
system installed in a vehicle, also on the in- ● Never ignore the messages displayed. Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-
fotainment system display ›››  page 32. ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is
shown second, together with the addi-
and in a safe place.
tional rain sign.
208
 Driver assistance systems

Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is Trailer mode ● Never drive if you are tired.

Technical data
working while you are driving, the signal In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ● The system does not detect the tiredness of
with the additional rain sign will be device from the factory and a trailer that is the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-
shown first, on the left, as it is the one electrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos- formation in the section ››› page 210, System
that is applicable at the time. sible to activate or deactivate the display of limitations.
Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, ● In some situations, the system may incor-
No overtaking at certain times, will be such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-
displayed third ››› Fig. 210 . tions. Activation or deactivation is performed vre as driver tiredness.
on the infotainment system by means of the

Advice
● No warning is given in the event of the ef-
Town or city entrance and exit signs activate button  and the function buttons Setup fect called microsleep!
the display of current speed limits in the and Driver Assistance ›››  page 32.
country's cities or roads. If there is an addi- ● Please observe the indications on the in-
tional speed limit sign next to the town or strument panel and act as is necessary.
city entrance and exit signs, this sign will al-
so be displayed. Tiredness detection (break rec- Note

Operation
Signs indicating the end of a speed limit or ommendation)* ● Tiredness detection has been developed for
the end of an overtaking prohibition are not driving on motorways and well paved roads
displayed. Introduction only.
● If there is a fault in the system, have it
No warning will be given if the speed limit
checked by a specialised workshop.
sign displayed is exceeded. The correspond- ››› table on page 2

Emergencies
ing legal provisions are applicable. The Tiredness detection informs the driver
when their driving behaviour shows signs of
Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis- fatigue.
play on the instrument panel
The permanent display of traffic signs on the WARNING
instrument panel can be activated or deacti- Do not let the comfort afforded by the Tired-
vated on the infotainment system by means ness detection system tempt you into taking

Safety
of the button  and the function buttons any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
Setup and Driver Assistance . sufficient in length when making long jour-
neys.
● The driver always assumes the responsibil-
ity of driving to their full capacity.

209
 Operation

Function and operation The message can be recalled to the instru- Tiredness detection will be restored when the
ment panel display using the multifunction vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
display ›››  page 35. when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
Conditions of operation opened the door.
Driving behaviour is only calculated on In the event of slow driving during a long pe-
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to riod of time (below 65 km/h (40 mph) the
around 200 km/h (125 mph). system automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
Switching on and off speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
Tiredness detection can be activated or deac- ted.
tivated in the Easy Connect system with the
Fig. 211 On the instrument panel display:
button  and the function button 
tiredness detection symbol.
››› page 112. A mark indicates that the ad- Parking aid
Tiredness detection determines the driving justment has been activated.
behaviour of the driver when starting a jour- General information
ney, making a calculation of tiredness. This is System limitations
constantly compared with the current driving The Tiredness detection has certain limita- Various systems are available to help you
behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- tions inherent to the system. The following when parking or manoeuvring in tight
er is tired, an audible warning is given with a conditions can limit the Tiredness detection spaces, depending on the equipment fitted
sound and an optic warning is shown with a or prevent it from functioning. on your vehicle.
symbol and complementary message on the
● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) The rear parking aid is an audible assistant
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 211. The
that warns about obstacles located behind
message on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
the vehicle ››› page 212.
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● When cornering
pending on the case, is repeated. The system During parking, Parking System Plus assists
● On roads in poor condition the driver by visually and audibly warning
stores the last message displayed.
● In unfavourable weather conditions them about obstacles detected in front and
The message on the instrument panel display
● When a sporty driving style is employed behind the vehicle ››› page 212.
can be switched off by pressing the 
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the ● In the event of a serious distraction to the
button  on the multi function steering driver
wheel ›››  page 35.

210
 Driver assistance systems

WARNING – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- – with rough or cobbled floors or ground

Technical data
● Always pay attention, also when looking
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- with long grass;
der snow. – with external ultrasound sources, such as
straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle
surroundings. The assistance systems are not ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;
a replacement for driver awareness. When in- do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- – In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-
serting or removing the vehicle from a park- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- haust gases;
ing space, or when performing similar ma- rectly, these objects or people wearing such
– if the registration plate (front or rear) is
noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- clothes.
not properly affixed to the bumper sur-
sponsibility. ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected

Advice
face;
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all by external sound sources. In certain circum-
– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- stances this may prevent them from detect-
fic conditions. ing people or objects. ● In order to guarantee good system opera-
● Please note that low obstacles detected by tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in
the system may no longer be registered by of snow or ice, and do not cover them with
which obstacles and people are not regis-
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the adhesives or other objects.
tered. Pay special attention to children and

Operation
animals. system will not give any further warning. In ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
certain circumstances, objects such as high ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply
● Always keep visual control of the vehicle
kerbs that could damage the bottom of the it directly only very briefly and always from a
surroundings: use the rear vision mirrors for
vehicle are not detected either. distance of more than 10 cm.
additional help.
● If the first warning from the Park Pilot is ig- ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable such as a bicycle carrier, may interfere with

Emergencies
CAUTION damage. the operation of the Parking Aid.
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- ● The knocks or damage on the radiator ● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-
fected by different factors that may lead to grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- tem, it is advised that you practice parking in
damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- body can adjust the orientation of the sen- an area or car park that is free from traffic.
rounds: sors. This can affect the parking aid function. There must be good weather and light condi-
● Under certain circumstances, the system Have the function checked by a specialised tions.
does not detect or display certain objects: workshop. ● The volume and tone of the warnings can

Safety
– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, be modified, in addition to the indications
fences, posts and thin trees. Note ››› page 215.
– Objects that are located above the sen- ● In vehicles without a driver information
● In certain situations, the system can give a
sors, such as protrusions in a wall. warning even though there is no obstacle in system, these parameters can be modified in
the detected area, e.g: a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
workshop. »
211
 Operation

● Please observe information on towing a information on page 211, ››› in General in- There are sensors integrated in the front and
trailer ››› page 215. formation on page 211 ! rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,
● The display on the Easy Connect screen
you are alerted by audible warnings and visu-
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
shows a slight time delay. ally on the Easy Connect system.
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
of the constant warning). the audible warnings come from the front of
Rear parking aid* the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
Activating/Deactivating a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid Make particularly sure that the sensors are
parking by means of audible warning is automatically switched on. This is con- not covered by adhesives, residues and the
sounds. firmed with a short warning. like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 232.
Description On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid
system is disconnected immediately. The approximate measurement range of the
There are sensors integrated in the rear sensors is:
bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. A 1.20 m
Parking system plus*
Make particularly sure that the sensors are B 0.90 m
not covered by adhesives, residues and the C 1.60 m
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
D 0.90 m
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 232.
The approximate measurement range of the As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
rear sensors is: val between the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
side area 0.90 m warning will be constant: do not continue to
move forward (or backward)!
central area 1.60 m
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- the volume of the warning begins to reduce
Fig. 212 Represented area. after four seconds (does not affect the tone
val between the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the of the constant warning).
Parking system plus assists you audibly and
warning will be constant: Do not continue to visually when parking.
move forward (or backward) ››› in General

212
 Driver assistance systems

Parking Aid operation Automatic connection of Parking Aid ● OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve-

Technical data
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector hicle rolls back1).
lever to position R. ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
● OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve-
hicle rolls back1). If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image
(Rear View Camera “RVC”)
● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle
that is in its forwards path at a speed below ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 214, Automatic ac- lever to position R.

Advice
tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis- ● OR: Press the RVC function button.
tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-
nection is activated in the infotainment sys- A short confirmation signal will be heard and
tem. A reduced display is shown. the button symbol will light up yellow when
Fig. 213 Centre console: parking aid button. the system is switched on.
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

Operation
Manual connection of Parking Aid
● Press the  button once. ● Move the selector lever to position P.
● OR: accelerate to more than approx.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid 10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
● Press the  button again.
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking

Emergencies
Aid
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display
(the audible sounds remain active) ● Press the  function button.
● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
Change from reduced view to full view
tory-assembled infotainment system.
● OR: Press the BACK function button. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.

Safety
1) With certain equipment, the system will be activa-

ted automatically when the vehicle reverses for a cer-

tain distance (about 10 cm if an obstacle is detected
in the rear area and about 20 cm if no obstacle is de-
tected in the rear area).
213
 Operation

Automatic activation ● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- Segments of the visual indication
fore reducing speed below this number
again.
● OR: place the selector lever in position P
and then move it from this position.
● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aid

miniature indication can be switched on and
off from the Easy Connect system menu
›››  page 32:
Fig. 215 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
Fig. 214 Miniature indication of automatic ac-
tivation ● Switch the ignition on. nect system screen.
● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parking
When the Parking System Plus is switched on The distance of separation from the obstacle
and manoeuvring.
automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will can be estimated using the segments around
● Select the Automatic activation op- the vehicle.
be displayed and the segments will be
tion. When the function button check box is
shown on the left side of the screen The optical indication of the segments works
activated , the function is on.
››› Fig. 214. as follows:
Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- If the system has been activated automatical-
ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv- White segments: a white segment is dis-
proaching an obstacle located in front of the played when the obstacle is not within
vehicle. It only operates every time the speed en when obstacles in front are at a distance
of less than 50 cm. the vehicle's trajectory or the direction
is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 of travel is in the opposite direction to
mph) for the first time. its location.
CAUTION
If the parking aid is switched off using the  Yellow segments: obstacles located in the
The automatic connection of the Parking Aid
button, the following actions must be carried vehicle's trajectory and which are more
only works when you are driving slowly. If
out in order for it to automatically switch on: driving style is not adapted to the circum- than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
stances, an accident and serious injury or displayed in yellow.
● Switch off the ignition and switch it on
damage may be caused. Red segments: obstacles that are less than
again.
30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-
played in red.

214
 Driver assistance systems

Moreover, with the SEAT Media System Front volume* the fault will only be indicated with the flash-

Technical data
Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- Volume in the front and rear area. ing LED on the  button.
cates the vehicle's expected journey based
on the steering wheel angle. Front sound settings/sharpness* Parking System Plus*
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is
cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding area. displayed on the Easy Connect display in
audible warning will sound. front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is
Rear volume* faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
B are displayed ››› Fig. 212. If a front sensor

Advice
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. Volume in the rear area. is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
and D are displayed.
this means that the vehicle has reached the Rear sound settings/sharpness*
collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- Have the fault corrected by a specialised
stacles are represented in red, including Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear workshop without delay.
those out of the path. Do not continue to area.

Operation
move forward (or backward) ››› in General
information on page 211, ››› in General in- Adjust volume
Towing bracket
formation on page 211 ! With the parking aid switched on, the active
audio/video source volume will be reduced In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
to the intensity of the selected setting. device from the factory, when the trailer is
Adjusting the display and audible connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear

Emergencies
warnings sensors will not be activated when reverse
Error messages gear is engaged, when the selector lever is
The settings for the display and audible turned to position R or when the button  is
warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- When the Parking Aid is activated or when it pressed.
nect*. is switched on, if a message reporting a Park-
ing aid error is displayed on the instrument Parking System Plus
Automatic activation panel (additionally, in the case of Parking The distance to possible obstacles at the rear

Safety
system Plus, the LED of the  button flash- of the vehicle will not be displayed on the
 on – activates the Automatic activa-
es), there is a fault in the system. screen and nor will it be indicated by means
tion option ››› page 214.
If the fault does not disappear before switch- of audible sound signals. »
 off – deactivates the Automatic ac-
ing off the ignition, the next time the parking
tivation option ››› page 214.
aid is switched on by engaging reverse gear

215
 Operation

The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon- – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
play objects detected at the front, and the ve- itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all rear.
hicle's trajectory will be hidden. times. – When the vehicle approaches objects
● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and that are not on the ground surface or are
snow, and do not cover it. jutting out from it. These objects may al-
so be outside the camera's angle of vi-
Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- ● The system is not a replacement for driver
sion when reversing.
awareness. Supervise the parking operation
era”* at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-
ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style Note
Operating and safety warnings at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
● It is important to take great care and pay
and traffic conditions.
special attention if you are not yet familiar
WARNING ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by
with the system.
looking at the screen.
● The Rear Assist does not make it possible ● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-
to precisely calculate the distance from ob- ● The images on the rear assist screen are
cle's rear lid is open.
stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial
overcome the system's own limits, hence us- depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
ing it may cause serious accidents and inju- for example, are more difficult to detect or
ries if used negligently or without due care. may not be seen at all. Instructions for use
The driver should be aware of his/her sur- ● Vehicle load modifies the representation of
roundings at all times to ensure safe driving. the orientation lines displayed. The width
● The camera lens expands and distorts the represented by the lines diminishes with ve-
field of vision and displays the objects on the hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-
screen in a different, vague manner. The per- cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-
ception of distances is also distorted by this hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying
effect. a heavy load.
● Some objects may, due to the resolution of ● In the following situations, the objects or
the display screen - not be displayed in a sat- other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
isfactory manner or may not be displayed at tem display appear to be further away or
all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, closer than they really are: Pay special atten-
railings or trees that might not be displayed tion:
Fig. 216 On the rear bumper: location of the
on screen and could damage the vehicle. – On moving from a horizontal plane to a rear assist camera
● The rear assist has blind spots where it is slope.
not possible to represent people or objects – On moving from a slope to a horizontal A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
(small children, animals and certain objects plane. during reverse parking or manoeuvring
216
 Driver assistance systems

››› Fig. 216. The camera image is viewed to- ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or CAUTION

Technical data
gether with orientation lines projected by the is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
● Never use abrasive cleaning products to
system on the Easy Connect system screen. lens.
clean the camera lens.
The bottom of the screen displays part of the ● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
bumper corresponding to the registration ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
played very clearly or is incomplete.
plate area that will be used as reference by or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. damage the camera.
the driver.
● If the position and installation angle of the
Rear assist settings: camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-

Advice
end collision. Have the system checked by a Parking and manoeuvring with the
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
specialised workshop. rear assist
change the image's brightness, contrast and
colour settings.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To change these settings: To familiarise yourself with the system, the
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-

Operation
● Park the vehicle in a safe place.
ommends practising parking and manoeu-
● Apply the parking brake.
vring with the rear assist in a place without
● Switch the ignition on. too much traffic or in a car park when there
● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect are good weather and visibility conditions.
system.

Emergencies
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector Cleaning the camera lens
lever to position R. Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow
and ice: Fig. 217 Display on the Easy Connect system
● Press the  function button displayed on screen: orientation lines.
the right of the image. ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
● Make the desired adjustments on the menu based glass cleaning product and clean the Switching the system on and off
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by lens with a dry cloth. ● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
moving the corresponding scroll button. ● Remove snow using a small brush. tion is on or the engine running, on engaging

Safety
● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-
Necessary conditions for parking and ma- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-
noeuvring with the matic gearbox).
The system should not be used in the follow- ● The system switches off 8 seconds after
ing cases: disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) »
217
 Operation

or removing the selector lever from the R po- ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
sition (automatic gearbox). The system will lever's position, engage reverse again or so that the side orientation lines lead to-
also disconnect immediately after the igni- move the selector lever to position R. wards the parking space.
tion is switched off. ● OR: Press the RVC function button1) ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
● The camera will stop transmitting images that the side orientation lines run parallel to
above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- Meaning of the orientation lines it.
verse engaged.
››› Fig. 217
In combination with the Parking System Plus 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
››› page 210, the camera image will cease to approximate width of the vehicle plus the
be transmitted immediately when reverse rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
gear is disengaged or when the selector lever 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in
is moved from the R position, and the optical green ends approximately 2 m behind
information provided by the Parking Aid sys- the vehicle on the road surface.
tem will be displayed.
3 Intermediate line: indicates a distance of
Also in combination with the system, the rear approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on
assist image can also be concealed: the road surface.
● By pressing one of the Infotainment system 4 Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-
buttons on the display. tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
of the vehicle on the road surface.
● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
appears on the left of the screen (which
Parking manoeuvre
switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-
ing System Plus's optical system). ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space and engage reverse gear (manual
If you wish to display the rear assist image gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-
again: tion (automatic gearbox).

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be ac-

tivated and available when the reverse gear is en-
gaged or the selector lever is set to position R.
218
 Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device CAUTION Depending on the country or version, the

Technical data
towing bracket device's detachable ball joint
Handle the detachable ball joint with care in is located:
Towing bracket device* order to avoid damaging the bumper paint-
work. ● underneath the floor panel of the luggage
Introduction compartment.
Note ● or else on the surface of the floor panel of
The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi- Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball the luggage compartment in a bag secured
cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac- joint ››› page 93. to the fastening rings.

Advice
cessory, meets all the national technical and
legal requirements for towing. The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector Description The towing device bracket is supplied with a
for the electrical connection between the key.
trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-
Key to ››› Fig. 218

Operation
ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the
corresponding available adaptor that is a 1 13-pin connector
genuine SEAT accessory. 2 Safety lug
The maximum authorised towing load is 3 Hook housing
80 kg. 4 Hook housing cap

Emergencies
WARNING
5 Ball protective cover
6 Detachable ball
● Before each journey, make sure that the de-
tachable ball joint is properly fitted and se- 7 Locking lever
cured in its housing. 8 Lock cover
● If the detachable ball joint is not properly 9 Release bolt
fitted and secured, do not use it.
10 Lock
● Do not use the towing bracket device for

Safety
towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. 11 Locking balls
● Do not modify or adapt the towing device 12 Key »
connection.
● Never unhook the detachable ball joint
when the trailer is hitched. Fig. 218 Towing bracket device support / de-
tachable ball joint / key
219
 Operation

Note Before assembling it, place the detachable Standby position

ball in the standby position with the follow-
Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you ing two steps.
lose your key.
Step 1
● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un-
Placing in standby position
til the part of the key with the holes reaches
the top position ››› Fig. 219.

Step 2
● Grip the detachable ball below the protec-
tive cover.
● Press the release bolt B in the direction of
arrow 2 , and at the same time press lever
C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will
go ››› Fig. 220.

Fig. 219 Step 1 The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Fig. 221 Standby position: Position of the lev-

er and the release bolt

Standby position adjusted properly

● Key A ››› Fig. 221 is in the released posi-
tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-
ing upwards).
● Lever B ››› Fig. 221 is in the bottom posi-
tion.
Fig. 220 Step 2 ● The release bolt C ››› Fig. 221 can be
moved.

220
 Towing bracket device

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready ing following the direction of arrow 1 until it Assembling the detachable ball - Step

Technical data
for installation. engages audibly ››› . 2
CAUTION Lever A turns automatically in the direction
of arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B
The key cannot be removed or turned in the moves outwards (the red and green part will
standby position.
be visible) ››› .
If lever A does not turn automatically or the
release bolt B does not come out, the de-

Advice
Assembling the detachable ball - Step
tachable ball A should be removed by turn-
1 ing the lever as far as possible downwards
from the housing cavity, and the detachable
ball's support surfaces and the cavity should
then be cleaned. Fig. 223 Locking the lock

Operation
WARNING
● When attaching the detachable ball, keep
your hands well away from the reach of the
lever's rotation. There is a risk of injuring
your fingers!

Emergencies
● Never try to pull the lever upwards by force
to turn the key. The detachable ball would not
Fig. 222 Fitting the detachable ball / Release be secured properly!
bolt in the deployed position

Fitting the detachable ball

● Remove the hook housing cap 4 Fig. 224 Placing the cover over the lock.
››› Fig. 218 downwards.
Do not omit this first step ››› page 221, As-

Safety
● Set the detachable ball to its standby posi- sembling the detachable ball - Step 1!
tion ››› page 220.
● Grip the detachable ball from below ● Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 un-
››› Fig. 222 and insert it into the hook hous- til the part of the key with the holes reaches
the bottom position ››› Fig. 223. »
221
 Operation

● Remove the key in the direction of arrow Checking proper attachment Removing the detachable ball - Step 1
2 .
● Place cover B in the lock in the direction
of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 224 ››› .
● Check that the detachable ball is secure
››› page 222.
CAUTION
● After removing the key, always place the
cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-
comes soiled it will be impossible to insert
the key.
Fig. 225 Detachable ball properly attached Fig. 226 Removing the lock cover
● Keep the towing bracket device's housing
cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-
Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,
vent the detachable ball from being properly
make sure that it is properly attached first.
secured!
● If the detachable ball is removed, always
Detachable ball properly attached
place the cap on the hook's housing.
● The detachable ball will not fall out of the
housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.
● Lever A ››› Fig. 225 is fully raised.
● The release bolt B ››› Fig. 225 is sticking
fully out (the red and green part is visible).
● The key has been removed. Fig. 227 Releasing the lock
● Cover C ››› Fig. 225 is placed over the lock.
● Remove cover A from the lock in the direc-
WARNING tion of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 226.
● Insert key B into the lock in the direction
The towing bracket device should only be
used if the detachable ball has been properly of arrow 2 ››› Fig. 227.
locked! ● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un-
til the part of the key with the holes is facing
upwards.
222
 Towing bracket device

WARNING time press lever B in the direction of arrow ● When operating the lever, do not apply too

Technical data
2 as far as it will go. much pressure (for example, do not stand on
Never remove the detachable ball joint when
it)!
the trailer is hitched. In this position, the detachable ball is loose
and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this
does not occur when you release it, press it Note
Note
with the other hand from above. Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be-
Before you remove the detachable ball, you
fore you put it away with the vehicle tools.
are advised to place the protective cover on The detachable ball locks into the standby
the ball coupling. position at the same time and is therefore

Advice
ready to be reinserted into the hook housing
››› . Operation and care
Removing the detachable ball - Step 2 ● Fit the cap 4 ››› Fig. 218 onto its housing. Put the cover on the housing cavity so that
dirt cannot get in.
WARNING

Operation
Before hooking up a trailer, always check the
Never leave the detachable ball loose in the ball coupling and apply suitable grease if
luggage compartment. It could cause damage necessary.
in the luggage compartment in the case of
abrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen- Use the protective cover when putting the de-
ger safety! tachable ball away to keep the luggage com-
partment clean.

Emergencies
CAUTION Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-
● If you hold the lever and do not press down faces and use a suitable cleaning product.
Fig. 228 Releasing the detachable ball on it as far as you can, after you remove the
detachable ball, the latter will continue up- CAUTION
Do not omit this first step ››› page 222, Re- wards and will not lock into the standby posi- The top part of the hook housing is greased.
moving the detachable ball - Step 1! tion. The detachable ball should be placed in Make sure that the grease has not been re-
this position before the next assembly. moved.

Safety
Releasing the detachable ball ● Keep the detachable ball in the standby po-
sition, with the key inserted into the box
● Grip the detachable ball from below. while you place it facing downwards with the
● Press the release bolt A in the direction of side opposite to the one where the key is in-
arrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same serted. The key could get damaged!

223
 Operation

Trailer towing duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or Exterior mirrors
part thereof). The gross combination weight Check whether you can see enough of the
is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus
What do you need to bear in mind road behind the trailer with the standard rear
the actual weight of the laden trailer. When vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
when towing a trailer? possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors
when fitted with the correct equipment.
specified limit. to give sufficient vision to the rear.
If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con-
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar
sult ››› page 227.
loads that are given on the data plate of the Tow rope
towing bracket are for certification purposes Always use a cable between the vehicle and
Connectors
only. The correct figures for your specific the trailer ››› page 225.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector model, which may be lower than these fig-
for the electrical connection between the ures for the towing bracket, are given in the Trailer rear lights
trailer and the vehicle. vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech-
nical Data. The trailer's rear lights should comply with
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to the statutory safety regulations ››› page 225.
use an adapter cable. It is available at any
Technical Service. Distributing the load
WARNING
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
Trailer weight/drawbar load objects are as near to the axle as possible. Never transport people in a trailer. This could
result in fatal accidents.
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If Loads carried in the trailer must be secured
you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- to prevent them moving.
Note
mum permitted trailer weight, you can then
climb correspondingly steeper slopes. Tyre pressure ● Towing a trailer places additional demands
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi- on the vehicle. We recommend additional
The maximum trailer weights listed are only services between the normal inspection inter-
ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in-
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-
side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres-
sea level. With increasing altitude the engine ing a trailer.
sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the
power and therefore the vehicle climbing ● Find out whether special regulations apply
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
ability are impaired because of the reduced to towing a trailer in your country.
air density. The maximum trailer weight has
to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the
vehicle and trailer combination must be re-
224
 Towing bracket device

Hitching and connecting the trailer Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 229: Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Technical data
Pin Meaning Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

12 Unassigned
Side lights (total) 100 Watts
13 Earth, pin 9
Rear lights (total) 42 Watts
Electrical socket for trailer
Rear fog light 42 Watts

Advice
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the electrical connection between Never exceed the values indicated!
the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-
Fig. 229 Schematic diagram: assignment of tects that a trailer has been connected elec- Note
the pins of the trailer's electrical socket. trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-
will receive voltage through this connection. rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may

Operation
Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 229: Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for be damaged.
example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-
Pin Meaning
is only powered when the engine is running. rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam-
1 Left turn signal The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam- aged.
ple, a caravan battery. ● Never connect the trailer's electric system
2 Rear fog light
directly to the electrical connections of the

Emergencies
Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to tail lights or any other power sources. Only
3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8
each other to avoid discharging or damaging use the connections intended for providing
4 Right turn signal the vehicle's battery. electric current to the trailer.
5 Tail light, right The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13,
should never be connected to each other to
6 Brake lights
avoid overloading the electrical system. Ball coupling of towing bracket de-
7 Tail light, left If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you vice*

Safety
8 Reverse lights will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not The ball coupling is provided with instruc-
9 Permanent live be available. tions on fitting and removing the ball cou-
pling of the towing bracket. »
10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10
225
 Operation

WARNING Before driving WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and ● Never use the safety lug to tow!
stored securely in the luggage compartment remove it in the direction of the arrow
● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-
to prevent them being flung through the vehi- ››› Fig. 230. fic conditions.
cle and causing injury. ● Remove the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 218 ● All work on the electrical system must be
upwards. carried out only by specialised workshops.
Note ● Never connect the trailer's electric system
● By law, the ball coupling must be removed
After driving to the electrical connections of the rear lights
if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and or any other power sources.
the number plate. insert it in the opposite direction to the arrow ● After hooking up the trailer and connecting
››› Fig. 230. the socket, check that all the trailer's rear
● Fit the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 218 on lights are working properly.
Driving with a trailer the ball coupling.
Note
Safety lug ● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,
The safety lug B ››› Fig. 230 is used to hook check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse
up the trailer's retainer cable. box ›››  page 61.
● The contact between the retainer cable and
On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain-
the safety lug may give rise to mechanical
er cable should have slack in all the trailer
wear in the lug's surface protection. This
positions with respect to the vehicle (sharp
wear will not prevent the safety lug from op-
bends, reverse gear, etc.). erating properly or cause any fault and is ex-
cluded from the warranty.
Headlights ● When connecting and disconnecting the
Fig. 230 Turn the 13-pin connector The front part of the vehicle may be raised trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake
when the trailer is connected and the light should be applied.
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range rotary adjuster1).

1) This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenon

headlights.
226
 Towing bracket device

Anti-theft alarm system Weight distribution Electronic stability control*

Technical data
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. in case of skidding or rocking.
gered when the electrical connection be- However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-
tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted. tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight
Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system distribution. Retrofitting a towing bracket*
before connecting or disconnecting a trailer
››› page 122. Speed

Advice
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-
Conditions for the integration of a trailer in duced with increasing speed. For this reason,
the anti-theft alarm system. it is advisable not to drive at the maximum
● The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an- permissible speed in an unfavourable road,
ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket weather or wind conditions. This applies es-
device. pecially when driving downhill.

Operation
● The trailer is connected electrically to the You should always reduce speed immediately
towing vehicle by the trailer connector. if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-
● The electrical system of the vehicle and the ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-
trailer are prepared for operation. creasing speed.
● The vehicle is locked with the ignition key Always brake in due course. If the trailer has

Emergencies
and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at
first and then, firmly. This will prevent the
CAUTION jerking that can be caused by locking of trail-
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear
er wheels. Select a low gear in due course
LED lights are not integrated in the anti-theft before going down a steep downhill. This en-
alarm system. ables you to use the engine braking to slow
down the vehicle.

Safety
Reheating
Driving tips
At very high temperatures and during pro-
Driving with a trailer always requires extra longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high
care. engine speed, always monitor the coolant Fig. 231 Attachment points for towing brack-
temperature gauge ››› page 110. et. »
227
 Operation

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- ● The legal requirements in your country your SEAT dealer in case additional modifica-
hicle is purchased, this must be completed must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- tions to your vehicle are necessary.
according to the instructions of the towing rate control lamp). ● Due to the specific design of the exhaust,
bracket manufacturer. ● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear the fitting of a conventional towing hook is
The attachment points for the towing bracket bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. not recommended for some sportier versions.
A are on the lower part of the vehicle. The towing bracket securing bolts must be Please consult your Technical Service.
tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-
The distance between the centre of the ball er socket must be connected to the vehicle
coupling and the ground should never be electrical system. This requires specialised
lower than the indicated value, even with a knowledge and tools.
fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-
● Figures in the illustration show the eleva-
mum drawbar load.
tion value and the attachment points which
Elevation values for securing the towing must be considered if you are retrofitting a
bracket: towing bracket.

B 65 mm (minimum) WARNING
C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-
cialised workshop.
D 1,040 mm
● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-
E 317 mm led, there is a serious danger of accident.
● For your own safety, please observe the tow
LEON/LEON SC LEON ST
F bracket manufacturer's instructions.
319 mm 596 mm
CAUTION
Fitting a towing bracket
● If the power socket is incorrectly installed,
● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-
for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a trical system.
towing bracket, please contact a Technical
Service to check whether your cooling system Note
needs modification.
● SEAT recommends that the towing hooks
be fitted at a specialised workshop. Consult

228
 Care and maintenance

Advice Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct wear of components, and also invalidate your

Technical data
effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv- vehicle registration documents.
en, such as a cruise control system or elec-
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
Care and maintenance tronically-controlled suspension, must be
cannot be held liable for any damage caused
approved for use in your vehicle and bear the
by modifications and/or work performed in-
e mark (the European Union's authorisation
Accessories and modifications symbol).
correctly.
to the vehicle If any additional electrical devices are fitted
We therefore recommend that all work should
be performed by a SEAT Official Service using

Advice
which do not serve to control the vehicle it-
Accessories, replacement parts and genuine SEAT parts®.
self (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or
repair work ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the 
WARNING
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer the European Union). Incorrectly performed modifications or other
for advice before purchasing accessories and work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions
replacement parts. and cause accidents.

Operation
WARNING
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high Accessories, for example telephone holders
standard of active and passive safety. For this or cup holders, should never be fitted on the
reason, we recommend that you ask a SEAT covers, or within the working range of the air- Radio transmitters and office equip-
Official Service for advice before fitting ac- bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if ment
cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of- the airbag is triggered in an accident.

Emergencies
ficial Service has the latest information from Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
the manufacturer and can recommend acces- Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters
sories and replacement parts which are suita- Technical modifications in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
ble for your requirements. They can also an- generally authorises in-vehicle installations
swer any questions you might have regarding Modifications must always be carried out ac- of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
official regulations. cording to our specifications. ded that:
We recommend you to use only SEAT acces- Unauthorised modifications to the electronic ● The aerial is installed correctly.

Safety
sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has components, software, wiring or data transfer
tested these parts and accessories for suita- ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official to the way the electronic components are vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth-
Services have the necessary experience and linked together in networks, other indirect er with non-reflective aerial trimming).
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed systems may be affected by the faults. This ● The effective transmitting power does not
correctly and professionally. can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. »
229
 Advice

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- WARNING WARNING

shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters Mobile telephones or radio equipment which ● Cleaning products and other materials used
is operated inside the vehicle without a prop- for car care can be damaging to your health if
with a higher transmitting power.
erly installed external aerial can create exces- misused.
sive magnetic fields that could cause a health ● Always keep care products in a safe place,
Mobile radio transmitters hazard. out of the reach of children. Failure to comply
Commercial mobile telephones or radio could result in poisoning.
equipment might interfere with the electron- Note
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
● The posterior fitting of electric and elec- For the sake of the environment
This may be due to:
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- ● If possible, use environmentally friendly
● No external aerial. cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the products.
vehicle registration document under certain
● External aerial incorrectly installed. ● The remains of car care products should not
circumstances.
● Transmitting power more than 10 W. be disposed of with ordinary household
● Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-
waste.
erating instructions.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial ››› . Vehicle exterior care
Care and cleaning
Please note also that the maximum range of Washing the vehicle
the equipment can only be achieved with an General information
external aerial. The longer substances such as insects, bird
Regular and careful care helps to maintain droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-
Business equipment the value of the vehicle. This may also be one dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and
of the requirements for upholding any war- other aggressive materials remain on the ve-
Retrofit installation of business or private
ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint hicle, the more damage they do to the paint-
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
defects. work. High temperatures (for instance due to
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and SEAT Official Services and specialist retailers strong sunlight) further intensify the corro-
that any such equipment carries the  mark. carry stocks of suitable car care materials. sive effect.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence Please follow the instructions for use on the After the period when salt is put on the roads
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a packaging. it is important to have the underside of the
type approval for your vehicle and must carry vehicle washed thoroughly.
the e mark.
230
 Care and maintenance

Automatic car washes Special car soap should only be used for very not wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. It

Technical data
Before going through a car wash, be sure to persistent dirt. is best to use soapy water.
take the usual precautions such as closing Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of- ● Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays the
the windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe- ten. water out in a direct stream. This could dam-
cial accessories such as spoilers or a roof age the tyres even if the spray is kept at a
rack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisa- Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned distance and only used for a very short time.
ble to consult the car wash tunnel operator. last. Use a second sponge for this. ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, please make sure to retract the ex-
It is best to use a car wash without revolving WARNING terior mirrors to prevent them from being

Advice
bristles if possible. ● The vehicle should only be washed with the damaged. Electrically retractable exterior
ignition switched off. Failure to follow this in- mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand,
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure struction could result in an accident. always use the electrical power control.
cleaner
● Do not clean the underside of chassis, the
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- inside of wheel arches or wheel trims without CAUTION
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- protecting your hands and arms. You may cut

Operation
● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
structions for the equipment. This applies yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other-
wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts. car wash, please proceed as follows to lock
particularly to the operating pressure and the the wiper arms so that they are not moved to-
spraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle too ● When washing the car during the winter wards the top of the windscreen:
close to soft materials such as rubber hoses season: water and ice in the brake system
– the bonnet must be closed.
or seals. The same applies to the parking aid can reduce braking effectiveness: risk of acci-
sensors*, which are located in the rear bump- dent! – switch the ignition on and off.

Emergencies
er. – press the windscreen wiper lever forward
CAUTION briefly (windscreen washer function).
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out This will lock the wiper arms.
in a direct stream or one that has a rotating ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight –
jet for forcing off dirt. otherwise the paint can be damaged.
For the sake of the environment
● Do not use sponges, abrasive household
Washing the car by hand sponges or similar to clean insect remains. The car should only be washed in special
This could damage the surface. wash bays. These areas are prepared to pre-

Safety
When washing the car by hand, use plenty of
● Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from vent oily water from getting into the public
water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as
the headlights at regular intervals, for in- drains. In some places, washing vehicles out-
well as possible. side the areas intended for this purpose is
stance when filling the fuel tank. The head-
Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, lights should only be washed with water, do prohibited.
glove or brush using only slight pressure.
You should start on the roof and work down.
231
 Advice

Camera sensors and lenses ger forms droplets and rolls off the clean Trims
paintwork.
● Use a small brush to remove snow and a In respect for the environment, the silver-
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the
de-icer spray to remove ice. plated trims on the body are made of pure
vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-
● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- aluminium (they do not contain chrome).
tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least
uct and a soft, dry cloth. twice a year. Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings should
● Moisten the camera lens using a standard be removed with a cleaning product with a
In the summer, you will find it is much easier
alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and neutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner).
to remove dead insects (which accumulate
clean the lens with a dry cloth. In the active Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trim
on the bumper and the front of the bonnet) if
lane assist*, the area in front of the lens is mouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of-
the car has been treated with care products
normally cleaned with the windscreen wash- ten used before the car goes into a car wash
recently.
er. may contain alkaline substances, which can
cause dull or milky patches when they dry
Polishing
CAUTION out.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning
lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
washer: products which have been tested for use on
brought back by putting on wax.
– Stay a suitable distance from the sensors your vehicle and are not harmful to the envi-
on the front and rear bumpers. If the polish does not contain wax, a wax ronment.
– Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-
product should be applied after polishing.
rounding area with the pressure washer.
CAUTION Plastic parts
● Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, ● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-
as it could crack the lens. ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic Plastic parts are cleaned with a power wash-
● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the parts. er. If this is not sufficient, plastic parts
lens. ● Do not apply paint polishes to the side trim should only be treated with a special solvent-
that runs around the panoramic roof and ends free plastic cleaning agent. Do not use paint-
on the windscreen. However, it can be treated work cleaners, polishes or wax on plastic
with hard wax. parts.
Waxing and polishing
Care
Waxing protects the paintwork. It is time to
apply a coat of good wax when water no lon-
232
 Care and maintenance

Carbon parts be removed with a special cleaner. Your SEAT Wheels

Technical data
Official Service will be able to provide you
The carbon parts on your vehicle have a pain- with more detailed information. The wheels require regular attention to pre-
ted surface. They do not need any special serve their appearance. It is important to re-
The windows should also be cleaned on the
care and are cleaned just like any other pain- move road salt and brake dust by washing
inside at regular intervals.
ted part ››› page 230. the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the
Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the finish will be impaired.
windows. Cloths used for waxing and polish-
After washing, the wheels should only be
Paint damage ing contain residues that will cause smears
cleaned with an "acid-free" cleaning agent

Advice
on the glass.
for alloy wheels. This is available from SEAT
Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches Official Services and specialist retailers. Nev-
or stone chips, should be touched up without WARNING
er leave the cleaning agent on the rims for
delay before the metal starts to corrode. Suit- Do not use water-repellent coatings on the any longer than specified in the instructions
able touch-up brushes or sprays for your car windscreen. In bad visibility conditions (e.g. before rinsing it off. If the wheel cleaner fluid
can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service. in the rain, dark or with a low sun), these

Operation
contains acid it can attack the surfaces of the
coatings may cause dazzle: risk of accident! wheel bolts.
The number of the original paint finish on the
Such coatings can also cause the windscreen
vehicle is given on the data sticker wiper blades to make noise. Car polish or other abrasive agents should
››› page 263. not be used for maintaining the rims. If the
If corrosion is already visible it must be thor- CAUTION protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying
oughly removed by a specialised workshop. stones, the damaged area should be re-

Emergencies
● Remove snow and ice from windows and ex- paired immediately.
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches caused by dirt on the glass, WARNING
Windows the scraper should only be pushed in one di-
rection and not moved to and fro. Please note when cleaning the wheels that
Clear vision is an essential safety factor. ● The heating element for the rear window is water, ice and road salt can impair the effec-
tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci-
The windscreen must not be cleaned with in- located on the inner side of the window. To
dent.
sect remover or wax, otherwise the wind- avoid damaging them, do not apply stickers

Safety
screen wipers will not function properly (jud- to these heating elements.
dering). ● Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This Exhaust tail pipe
Traces of rubber, oil, grease or silicone can could cause the glass to crack!
be removed with a window cleaning solution It is important to remove road salt and brake
or a silicone remover. Wax residue can only dust by washing the wheels at regular »
233
 Advice

intervals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe ma- Plastic and leatherette parts vacuum off any residue once the surface is
terial could be damaged. To remove impuri- completely dry.
ties, do not use rim, paint or chrome cleaners Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleaned
or other abrasive products. Clean the exhaust with a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, Cleaning stains
tail pipes with cleaning products that are plastic parts and leatherette should only be
Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit
suitable for stainless steel. treated with a special solvent-free plastic
juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli-
cleaner.
SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning cate fabrics. This solution should be applied
products that have been tested and ap- with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re-
proved for use on your vehicle. move, a washing paste can be applied direct-
Textile covers and trim parts ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric.
The surface will then have to be wiped with
Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door clear water to remove any residue left by the
Caring for the vehicle interior trim) should be cleaned regularly with a vac- paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge
uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt and then dab the stain with an absorbent
Radio display/Easy Connect* and con- which could otherwise be rubbed into the cloth.
trol panel* textile material during use. Do not use steam
cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a
deeper into the textile material. cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re-
The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth
move the soap with water (wet sponge).
and a professionally available “LCD cleaner”.
Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the Normal cleaning A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove
cleaning fluid. We recommend that you use a soft sponge or grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then
a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre dab the dissolved grease or colour particles
The Easy Connect control panel* should first
cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You
be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes
on floor coverings and mats, as other textile may also have to treat the stain once more
into the device or between the keys and
surfaces could become damaged. using washing paste and water.
housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the
Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth In the case of normal surface dirt you can use If the covers or textile trim panels are badly
dampened with water and washing-up liquid. a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the soiled we recommend that you have them
foam on the textile surface and to work it into cleaned by a professional cleaning company
CAUTION the material lightly. However, make sure that with a shampoo and spray.
● To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipe the textile material does not become soaking
the display with a dry cloth. wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab-
● To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and
goes into the Easy Connect control panel*.
234
 Care and maintenance

Note natural characteristics of the surface are less Note

Technical data
apparent, though this does not affect quality.
Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage ● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul-
the seat upholstery. Make sure they are tra-violet protection at regular intervals and
Cleaning and care
closed. after cleaning. The cream nourishes and
Due to the natural properties of the specially moisturises the leather, keeps it supple and
selected hides employed, the finished leath- able to breathe. A protective film will also
er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, form.
Natural leather
etc. so a degree of care is required in every- ● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and
day use and when looking after the leather.

Advice
General information remove fresh dirt as soon as possible.
Dark clothing (especially if damp or incorrect- ● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth-
Our range of leathers is large. The main type ly dyed) may stain leather upholstery on the er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar
used is particularly nappa in various forms, seats. Dust and grit in the pores and seams stains as soon as possible.
that is, leather with a smooth surface in dif- can scratch and damage the surface. There- ● Preserve the colour of the leather. A special
ferent colours. fore leather should be cleaned at regular in- coloured cream will renew the colour of the

Operation
The amount of dye used determines the ap- tervals, depending on the actual amount of leather when required and will eliminate dif-
pearance and properties of leather. If the use. When they have been in use for a certain ferences in colour.
leather is left in a more natural state, it re- time, your car seats will acquire a typical and
tains its typical natural napped appearance unmistakable patina. This is characteristic for
and confers excellent all-weather properties leather as a natural product and is a sign of
Cleaning and care of leather uphols-
to the seats. Fine veins, healed scars, insect genuine quality.
tery

Emergencies
bites, wrinkles and a subtle variation in shad- To maintain the value of natural leather you
ing remain visible; these are the characteris- should note the following points: Natural leather requires an extra degree of at-
tic features of genuine natural leather. tention and care.
Natural napped leather does not have a pro- CAUTION
tective surface coating of dye. It is therefore ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight Normal cleaning
somewhat more prone to damage. This for long periods, otherwise it may tend to – Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-
should be borne in mind if children or pets lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.

Safety
often travel in the car, or if there are other prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best
factors that could lead to damage. to cover the leather.
More stubborn dirt
● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as
Types of leather with a coloured surface coat- – More stubborn dirt can be removed using a
belts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can also
ing are likely to be more resistant to damage.
leave permanent scratches and rough marks mild soap solution (pure liquid soap: two »
This has a great advantage for day-to-day
on the surface of the leather.
use. However, this means that the typical
235
 Advice

tablespoons dissolved in one litre of Should you have questions regarding the – Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.
water). care and cleaning of the leather upholstery in
your vehicle, we recommend that you contact Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-
– Do not let the water soak through the leath- cantara seat covers.
your SEAT Official Service. Our representa-
er or penetrate into the seams.
tives will be happy to advise you and tell you You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth. about the product range for leather conserva-
tion, for example: Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
Removal of stains scratch and damage the surface. If the car is
● Cleaning and care set. left standing in the sun for long periods, Al-
– Remove fresh water-based stains such as cantara leather should be protected against
● Coloured leather-care cream.
coffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab- direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How-
sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use the ● Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe cream
ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-
cleaning agent from the care set for dried- etc. mal use.
on stains. ● Grease dissolving spray.
– Remove fresh grease-based stains that ● New products and further developments CAUTION
have not penetrated the surface such as ● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe
butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an CAUTION cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod-
absorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with the On no account use solvents (such as petrol, ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.
cleaning agent from the care set. turpentine), wax polish, shoe cream or simi- ● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should
– Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease- lar materials. be removed by a specialised workshop.
dissolving spray. ● On no account use brushes, hard sponges
or similar utensils.
– Treat less common stains on leather, such
as ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens, Cleaning Alcantara upholstery
nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream
Removing dust and dirt Seat belts
etc. with a special leather stain remover.
– Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe down
the seat covers. – Keep the seat belts clean.
Leather maintenance
– The leather should be treated regularly – For cleaning, use a mild solution of soap
Removing stains and water.
(about twice a year) with a special leather-
care product. – Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di- – Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-
luted white spirits. ular intervals.
– Apply these products very sparingly.
– Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
work inwards.
236
 Intelligent technology

The retract function may not operate properly Intelligent technology Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and

Technical data
in very dirty belts. Make sure that the inertia have the fault repaired.
reel seat belts are completely dry before al-
lowing them to retract. Electromechanical steering  (in yellow) Steering lock:
fault! Go to an Official Service
Electro-mechanical power steering assists
CAUTION The electronic steering lock is malfunction-
the driver when steering.
● Do not remove the seat belts from the vehi- ing.
cle to clean them. Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
Go to a specialised workshop as soon as
electronically to the speed of the car, torque
possible and have the fault repaired.

Advice
● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the
and turning angle.
seat belts, as this can damage the webbing.
Ensure that the seat belts do not come into If the power steering should fail at any time WARNING
contact with corrosive fluids. or the engine is switched off (for instance Take it immediately to a specialised work-
● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, when being towed), the car can still be shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci-
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, steered. However, more effort than normal dent!

Operation
the belt in question must be replaced by a will be required to turn the steering wheel.
specialised workshop.
Note
Driver warning lamps and messages
If the lamp  (in red) or else  (in yellow)
 (in red) Faulty steering! To
lights up briefly, you may continue driving.
park the vehicle

Emergencies
If the warning lamp remains on and the driver
indication appears, the power steering could Progressive steering
be faulty.
Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
sistance. progressive steering can adapt steering hard-
ness to the current driving situation. The
 (in yellow) Steering: System power steering only works when the engine
fault! You may continue driving. is running.

Safety
If the warning lamp comes on, the steering In city traffic you do not need to turn so much
could react with more difficultly or more sen- on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight
sitivity than normal. In addition, when driving turns.
in a straight line the steering wheel may be
off-centre. On the road or on the motorway, progressive
steering transmits, for example, in bends, a »
237
 Advice

sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy- season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to still has good acceleration in these condi-
namic driving sensation. give even better braking response. tions. Risk of accident!
● On wet roads bear in mind that the front
Snow chains wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
Four-wheel drive On roads where snow chains are mandatory, contact with the road if the car is driven too
3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive fast. If this should happen, there will be no
›››  page 67. sudden increase in engine speed to warn the
driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car.
››› table on page 2 For this reason you should always choose a
Changing tyres
On all-wheel drive models, the engine power driving speed suitable for the road condi-
is distributed to all four wheels On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tions. Risk of accident!
tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
General notes ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
tread depths ››› page 255.
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine Power Management
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
Off-roader?
distribution of power is controlled automati- This system helps to ensure reliable
cally according to your driving style and the Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it does
not have enough ground clearance to be starting
road conditions. Also see ››› page 178, Brak-
ing and stability systems. used as such. It is therefore best to avoid
rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as The power management controls the distribu-
The all-wheel drive is specially designed to possible. tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en-
complement the superior engine power. This sure that there is always enough power avail-
combination gives the vehicle exceptional WARNING able to start the engine.
handling and performance capabilities, both If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
● Even with all-wheel drive, you should al-
on normal roads and in more difficult condi- tem is left parked for a long time, the battery
ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per- will gradually lose its charge because certain
tions. Do not let the extra safety features
haps especially for this reason), it is impor- electrical devices, such as the electronic
tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
tant to observe certain safety points ››› . Risk of accident! gearbox lock continues to draw current even
● The braking capability of your vehicle is when the ignition is off. In some cases there
Winter tyres may not be enough power available to start
limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
Thanks to all-wheel drive, your vehicle will different from a car without four-wheel drive. the engine.
have plenty of traction in winter conditions, So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, or slippery roads just because the vehicle
power management system to control the
we still recommend that winter tyres or all-
238
 Intelligent technology

distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- Dynamic power management In these situations you will be aware that the

Technical data
cantly improves reliability when starting the While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- power management system is intervening to
engine, and also prolongs the useful life of tributes the available power to the various control the distribution of electrical power.
the battery. electrical devices and systems according to
their requirements. The power management When the vehicle is parked for long periods
The main functions incorporated in the power
management system are battery diagnosis, ensures that on-board systems do not con- If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of
residual current management and dynamic sume more electrical power than the alterna- several days or weeks, the power manage-
power management. tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi- ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-
mum possible battery power level. vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur-

Advice
Battery diagnosis rent they are using. This limits the amount of
Note power consumed and helps to ensure relia-
The battery diagnosis function constantly
● Neither is the power management system ble starting even after a long period. Some
registers the condition of the battery. Sen-
able to overcome the given physical limits. convenience functions, such as remote vehi-
sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-
Please remember that the power and useful cle opening, may not be available under cer-
rent and battery temperature. This enables

Operation
life of the battery are limited. tain circumstances. These functions will be
the system to calculate the current power lev-
● When there is a risk that the vehicle will restored when you switch on the ignition and
el and charge condition of the battery.
not start, the alternator power failure or low start the engine.
battery charge level warning lamp will be
Residual current management
shown  ››› page 110. With the engine switched off
The residual current management reduces
For example, if you listen to the sound sys-

Emergencies
power consumption while the vehicle is
tem with the engine switched off the battery
parked. It controls the supply of power to the
various electrical devices while the ignition is
Flat battery will run down.
switched off. The system takes the battery di- If the energy consumption means there is a
Starting ability has first priority.
agnosis data into consideration. risk that the engine will not start, a text will
Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures appear in vehicles with a driver information
Depending on the power level of the battery,
all place a heavy load on the battery. In these system*.
switch off the individual electrical devices
conditions a large amount of power is con-
one after the other to prevent the battery This driver indicator tells you that you must

Safety
sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.
from losing too much charge and to ensure start the engine so that the battery can re-
The situation is also critical if electrical devi-
that the engine can be started reliably.
ces are in use when the engine is not run-
charge. »
ning. In this case power is consumed when
none is being generated.

239
 Advice

When the engine is running

Checking and refilling levels WARNING
Although the alternator generates electrical Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-
power, the battery can still become dis-
charged while the vehicle is being driven.
Filling the tank ous burns and other injuries.
● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a
This can occur when a lot of power is being canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the
consumed but only a small amount supplied, Filling up
vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
especially if the battery is not fully charged
Read the additional information carefully ● Observe legislation governing the use,
initially.
›››  page 57 storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister
To restore the necessary energy balance, the in the vehicle.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-
system will then temporarily shut off the elec- ● For safety reasons we do not recommend
rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.
fuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- In an accident the canister could be damaged
fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill and could leak.
ing systems in particular use a large amount
the expansion chamber in the fuel tank.
of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have
that the seat heating* or the rear window The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe
heater is not working, they may have been en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank the following points:
temporarily switched off or regulated to a flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at – Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister
lower heat output. These systems will be ››› page 242. if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. An
available again as soon as sufficient electri- electrostatic charge could build up during
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
cal power is available. filling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite.
en in ›››  page 57.
Danger of explosion. Always place the
You may also notice that the engine runs at a canister on the ground to fill it.
slightly faster idling speed when necessary. Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-
– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible
This is quite normal, and no cause for con- brids
into the spare fuel canister.
cern. The increased idling speed allows the
Every 12 months it is necessary to run on pet- – If the spare fuel canister is made of met-
alternator to meet the greater power require-
rol until the control lamp switches off  and al, the filling nozzle must be in contact
ment and charge the battery at the same
then the tank must be refilled. This is neces- with the canister during filling. This
time.
sary to ensure that the system works proper- helps prevent an electrostatic charge
ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv- building up.
ing with petrol. – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex-
plosive. Risk of fatal accident!

240
 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION try a different pump or request specialist elling with natural gas, make sure you add

Technical data
help. the appropriate type of fuel ››› page 242.
● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it
should be removed immediately. It could oth- ● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canis-
ter, the protective device will not open. One Opening the fuel tank cap
erwise damage the paintwork.
● Never run the tank completely dry. An irreg-
way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel
slowly. tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.
ular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As a
result, unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust
● Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the
system and damage the catalytic converter.
central locking button  situated on the driv-
Refuelling with natural gas

Advice
● When filling the fuel tank after having run it
er door ››› page 117.
completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-
gine, the ignition must be switched on for at ● Press on the rear area of the flap and open
least 30 seconds before starting the engine. it.
When you then start the engine it may take
longer than normal (up to one minute) to Refuelling
start firing. This is because air needs to be

Operation
bled from the fuel system while starting. Special feature: if the ambient temperature is
very high, the natural gas pump protection
against overheating disconnects this auto-
For the sake of the environment matically.
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the
● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth
fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Emergencies
Fig. 232 Tank flap open: gas filler mouth 1 , ››› Fig. 232 1 .
filler mouth retainer 2 ● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas
Note
filler mouth.
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective de- Before refuelling, the engine and the igni- ● The fuel tank will be full when the pump
vice that prevents the insertion of the wrong tion, mobile telephone and heating must be
fuel hose1). It is only possible to refuel with compressor automatically cuts the supply.
switched off separately ››› .
Diesel nozzles. ● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,
● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if
Read the instructions on how to use the natu- press the button on the pump to stop the

Safety
it is very small, it is possible that it will not ral gas pump carefully. flow. »
be able to open the protective device. Before The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with
trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, liquefied natural gas (LNG) ››› . Before refu-

1) Depending on country
241
 Advice

Closing the fuel tank cap ● The vehicle natural gas system is prepared Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95
● Check that the gas filler mouth retainer 2 both for refuelling with a small compressor octanes
is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If neces- (slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast re- You should use super petrol with a minimum
sary, place it in the filler mouth again. fuel) in natural gas service stations. of 95 octanes.
● Insert the plug in the filler mouth. If super is not available, in an emergency you
● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
click into place. Fuel this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
WARNING Types of petrol as possible.
Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flam-
mable substance. Incorrect handling of the The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-
natural gas can cause accidents serious fuel tank flap. tane unleaded petrol
burns and other injuries. The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- We recommend you use super plus 98 octane
● Before refuelling with natural gas, engage verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-
the filling mouth correctly. If you can smell rol. The petrol must comply with European tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
gas, stop refuelling immediately. Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN If super is not available, in an emergency you
51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
WARNING fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of this case only use moderate engine speeds
10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied
natural gas (LNG), and this fuel must not be
ated by their octane rating (RON). as possible.
added under any circumstances. Liquefied The following titles appear on the corre-
natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: Petrol additives
explode, resulting in serious injury.
The quality of the fuel influences the behav-
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- iour, power and service life of the engine.
Note tane unleaded petrol This is why the petrol you use should carry
● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- suitable additives already included by the
can differ in the way they are operated. If you rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-
do not know, ask a qualified employee at the petrol, with a slight decrease in power. tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
petrol station to do the refuelling. fuel system clean and prevent deposits from
● Noises heard when refuelling are normal building up in the engine.
and do not indicate the presence of a fault in If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-
the system.
tives is not available or engine problems
242
 Checking and refilling levels

arise, the necessary additives must be added ● Only use fuel additives that have been ap- phur content of the fuel must be below 50

Technical data
when refuelling ››› . proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- parts per million.
Not all petrol additives have been shown to knock additives may contain metal additives
that could seriously damage the engine or Winter-grade diesel
be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-
the catalytic converter. These additives must
ditives may cause significant damage to the Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it
not be used.
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- is more difficult to start the engine. For this
● High engine speed and full throttle can
ditives should never be used. Metal additives reason, petrol stations in some countries al-
damage the engine when using petrol with an so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity
may also be contained in petrol additives for
octane rating lower than the correct grade for
when cold (winter-grade diesel).

Advice
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
the engine.
ratings ››› .
Water in the fuel filter1)
SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen Note
Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
● You may use petrol with a high octane num- equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa-
These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-
ers, where information on how to use them ber than the one recommended for your en- rator, the instrument panel may display the

Operation
gine.
can also be obtained. following warning:  Water in the
● In those countries where unleaded petrol is
fuel filter. If this is the case, take the
CAUTION not available, you may refuel with a fuel with
a low lead content. vehicle to a specialised workshop so that
● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the they can drain the fuel filter.
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of CAUTION

Emergencies
metal additives. Using them may damage the Diesel fuel
● The vehicle is not designed for the use of
engine!
Please note the information on the inside of FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would
● Never refuel with fuels containing a large be damaged if you used biodiesel.
proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). the fuel tank flap.
● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called
This could damage the fuel system. We recommend the use of diesel fuel which “thinners”, petrol or similar additives with
● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or complies to European standard EN 590. If diesel fuel.
fuel containing other metal additives would diesel fuel which meets European standard ● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be

Safety
seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-
converter. (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine quently than is specified in the Maintenance
is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- Programme. We recommend having this done »

1) Valid for the market: Algeria.

243
 Advice

by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed the natural gas, the lower the consumption ● Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault
to collect in the filter, this can cause engine will be. repaired.
performance problems. However, the heating power and the propor-
WARNING
tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc-
tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve- Failure to act when you can smell gas in the
Natural gas hicle consumption can also vary when using vehicle or when refuelling can cause serious
a single type of gas only. injuries.
››› table on page 2 ● Carry out the necessary operations.
The engine management automatically
● Leave the danger zone.
adapts to the natural gas used according to
Natural gas its quality. Therefore, different quality gases ● If necessary, warn the emergency services.
Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid can be mixed in the tank, without the need
form, addition to others. for comprehensive draining before applying a WARNING
different quality gas.
Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is the result of The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied
heavy cooling of natural gas. Therefore its Updated information relating to natural gas natural gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be
volume is considerably reduced compared quality is displayed on the instrument panel added under any circumstances. Liquefied
with compressed natural gas (CNG). In vehi- ›››  page 35. natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to
cles with a natural gas engine, liquefied nat- explode, resulting in serious injury.
ural gas cannot be directly refilled, as the gas Natural gas and safety
would expand excessively in the vehicle gas If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a Note
tank. leak ››› : Have the natural gas system checked regular-
Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas engine ly by a specialised workshop, according to
● Stop the vehicle immediately.
must only be refuelled using compressed the Maintenance Programme.
natural gas ››› . ● Switch the ignition off.
● Open the doors to appropriately ventilate
Natural gas quality and consumption the vehicle.
Natural gas is divided into the groups H and ● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.
L depending on its quality. ● Move away from the vehicle or switch off
Gas type H has a superior heating power and objects that may cause sparks or a fire.
inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content ● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-
than type L. The higher the heating power of ue driving!

244
 Checking and refilling levels

Engine compartment

Technical data
Checking levels

Advice
Operation
Fig. 233 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different Overview gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten-
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never You will find further explanations, instruc- tially hazardous area ››› .
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious tions and restrictions on the technical speci-
damage to the engine may be caused. fications as of ››› page 263. WARNING

Emergencies
● Observe the following additional warnings
1 Coolant expansion tank
if work on the fuel system or the electrical
2 Engine oil dipstick system is necessary:
Work in the engine compartment
3 Engine oil filler cap – Always disconnect the battery from the
4 Brake fluid reservoir Read the additional information carefully on-board network.
5 Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
›››  page 14 – Do not smoke.

Always be aware of the danger of injury and – Never work near naked flames.

Safety
6 Windscreen washer reservoir
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire – Always keep an approved fire extinguish-
The checking and refilling of service fluids when working in the engine compartment er immediately available. »
are carried out on the components men- (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al-
tioned above. These operations are descri- ways observe the warnings listed below and
bed in ››› page 245. follow all general safety precautions. The en-
245
 Advice

CAUTION WARNING Engine oil

When topping up fluids make sure the correct Never open the bonnet if you see steam or
fluid is put into the correct filler opening, oth- drips of coolant being released from the en- General notes
erwise this can cause serious malfunctions or gine compartment. Failure to comply could
engine damage. result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
can be seen before opening the bonnet. oil that can be used all year round.
For the sake of the environment Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle tial for the correct operation of the engine
regularly so that any leaks are detected at an Closing the bonnet and its long useful life, when topping up or
early stage. If you find spots of oil or other changing oil, use only those oils that comply
fluids in the area where it was parked, have – Slightly lift the bonnet. with VW standards.
your vehicle inspected at the workshop. – Release the bonnet stay before pressing it The specifications (VW standards) set out in
back into its support. the following page should appear on the con-
Note – Carefully close the bonnet. tainer of the service oil; when the container
In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu- displays the specific standards for petrol and
– Press the bonnet down until it locks into diesel engines together, it means that the oil
id reservoirs are on the other side of the en-
gine compartment ››› Fig. 233.
place. can be used for both types of engines.
– Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its We recommend that the oil change indicated
clasp. Do not press down too hard ››› . in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
Opening the bonnet formed by a technical service or specialised
WARNING workshop.
Read the additional information carefully ● For safety reasons the bonnet must always
The correct oil specifications for your engine
›››  page 14 be completely closed when the vehicle is
are listed in the ›››  page 58, Oil proper-
moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet,
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- ties.
always check that the locking element is
cle. properly engaged. This is the case if the bon-
Check that the windscreen wiper arms are net is flush with the adjacent body panels. Service intervals
not unfolded. Otherwise the paint may be ● Should you notice that the bonnet is not Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
damaged. safely secured when the vehicle is moving, service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-
stop the vehicle immediately and close the tance travelled).
The bonnet can only be unlocked when the bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction
driver door is open. could result in an accident. If the PR code that appears on the back of the
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,
246
 Checking and refilling levels

this means that your vehicle has the LongLife (whatever comes first) ››› Booklet Mainte- Checking engine oil level

Technical data
service programmed. If it lists the codes QI1, nance Programme.
QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is
dependent on time/distance travelled. ● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
oil level is too low ››› page 247 and you can-
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
intervals*) you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
Special oils and processes have been devel- (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
oped which, depending on the characteris-

Advice
sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
tics and individual driving profiles, enable
the extension of the oil change service (Long- Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
Life service intervals).
The Maintenance Programme states whether Fig. 234 Engine oil dipstick.
Because this oil is essential for extending the your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
service intervals, it must only be used ob- filter. Read the additional information carefully

Operation
serving the following indications: ›››  page 58
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- formation, may be used in diesel engines The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
tervals. equipped with particulate filter. Using other the oil.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
engine oil level is too low ››› page 247 and tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- Checking oil level

Emergencies
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to fore:
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
vals ›››  page 58 (up to a maximum of 0.5 – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until
litres). ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the the operating temperature is reached and
engine oil level is too low ››› page 247 and then stop.
Fixed service intervals* you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
– Wait for about two minutes.
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with

Safety
service interval” or it has been disabled (by VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
request), you may use oils for fixed service ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l). in as far as it will go.
intervals, which also appear in
›››  page 58, Oil properties. In this case, – Then pull it out once more and check the oil
your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed in- level ››› Fig. 234. Top up with engine oil if
terval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles) necessary. »
247
 Advice

Depending on how you drive and the condi- Topping up engine oil  CAUTION
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil If the oil level is above the area A do not
start the engine. This could result in damage
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
a specialised workshop.
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a jour-
ney. For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area A .
WARNING Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the
Any work carried out in the engine compart- crankcase breather and escape into the at-
ment or on the engine must be carried out mosphere via the exhaust system.
cautiously. Fig. 235 In the engine compartment: Engine
● When working in the engine compartment, oil filler cap Note
always observe the safety warnings Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
››› page 245. Read the additional information carefully engine oil that conforms to the correspond-
›››  page 58 ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
CAUTION Before opening the bonnet, read and observe ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
the warnings ››› in Work in the engine gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
If the oil level is above the area A do not needed.
start the engine. This could result in damage compartment on page 245.
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a Technical Service.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corresponding engine compartment il- Changing engine oil
lustration ››› page 245.
Engine oil specification ›››  page 58. Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 58.
WARNING The engine oil must be changed at the inter-
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil vals given in the service schedule.
comes into contact with hot engine compo- We recommend that you have the engine oil
nents when topping up.
changed by a Technical Service.
The oil change intervals are shown in the
Maintenance Programme.
248
 Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment Topping up coolant ● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a

Technical data
● Because of disposal problems and the spe- – Wait for the engine to cool down. health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze
should be stored in the original container in a
cial tools and specialist knowledge required, – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with safe place out of reach of children. Failure to
we recommend that you have the engine oil a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left comply could result in poisoning.
and filter changed by a Technical Service.
››› . ● If working inside the engine compartment,
● Never pour oil down drains or into the
– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- remember that, even when the ignition is
ground.
ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-
● Use a suitable container when draining the tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-
could damage the engine. If there is no

Advice
used oil. It must be large enough to hold all jury.
the engine oil. coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professio-
nal assistance ››› . CAUTION
– If there is still some coolant in the expan- Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-
Cooling system sion tank, top up to the upper mark. ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the

Operation
cooling system. In this case, stop driving.
– Top up with coolant until the level becomes Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there
Topping up coolant
stable. is a risk of engine damage.
Read the additional information carefully – Screw the cap back on correctly.
›››  page 59 CAUTION
Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a
Top up coolant when the level is below the The original additives should never be mixed

Emergencies
leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle
MIN (minimum) mark. with coolants which are not approved by
straight to a specialised workshop to have
SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing
the cooling system examined. If there are no
Checking coolant level severe damage to the engine and the engine
leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of cooling system.
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. coolant can only occur if the coolant boils
● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-
and is forced out of the system as a result of
– Switch the ignition off. ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates
overheating.
that the G 13 additive has been mixed with
– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be

Safety
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the WARNING changed as soon as possible if this is the
coolant level should be between the marks. ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do case! This could result in serious faults and
When the engine is hot, it may be slightly not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- engine damage. »
above the upper mark. sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!

249
 Advice

For the sake of the environment it replaced at a SEAT Official Service, during Recommended windscreen wipers
an Inspection Service. ● For the hottest seasons we recommend
Coolants and additives can contaminate the
environment. If any fluids are spilled, they summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
CAUTION tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
should be collected and correctly disposed
of, with respect to the environment. Brake fluid should not come into contact with 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive. ter).
● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear
glass. Approximate proportion of the winter
Brake fluid mixture, up to -18 °C (0 °F): 1:2 (1 part con-
Windscreen washer reservoir centrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4
Topping up brake fluid proportion of mixture in the washer fluid
Checking and topping up the wind- tank.
Read the additional information carefully screen washer reservoir
›››  page 59 Capacity
Read the additional information carefully
Checking the brake fluid level ›››  page 60 The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in
versions without headlight washer and 5 li-
The brake fluid level must be between the Check the water level in the windscreen tres in versions with headlight washer.
MIN and MAX markings. washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-
quired. CAUTION
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the The container for the windscreen washer con- ● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-
MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen, ded by SEAT with other products. This could
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warn- the rear window and the headlight washer lead to flocculation and may block the wind-
ing light on the instrument panel display system*. screen washer jets.
monitors the brake fluid level ››› page 110. ● When topping up service fluids, make abso-
● Open the bonnet  ››› page 245.
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid lutely certain that you fill the fluids into the
● The windscreen washer reservoir is marked correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids
reservoir is on the other side of the engine
with the symbol  on the cap. could cause serious malfunctions and engine
compartment.
● Check there is enough windscreen water in damage!
the reservoir. ● Not having windscreen wiper fluid reduces
Changing brake fluid
visibility through the windscreen, and leads
The regular intervals at which the brake fluid to loss of visibility in headlights in models
should be replaced are listed in the Mainte- with headlight washer.
nance Programme. We recommend you have
250
 Checking and refilling levels

Battery Function Reprogramming The battery must not be opened. Never try to

Technical data
change the fluid level of the battery. Other-
Digital clock ››› page 108. wise explosive gas is released from the bat-
General information
tery that could cause an explosion.
After driving for a few me-
Read the additional information carefully ESC warning lamp tres, the warning lamp goes
›››  page 60. out again.  Wear eye protection.

The battery is located in the engine compart-  Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear
ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is If the vehicle is not used for long periods protective gloves and eye protection. In the event
of electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty of

Advice
checked as part of the Inspection Service. The vehicle has a system for monitoring the water.
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean current consumption when the engine is left
and have the correct tightening torque, espe- unused for long periods of time ››› page 238.  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-
cially in summer and winter. Some functions, such as the interior lights, or hibited.
the remote door opening, may be temporarily
Disconnecting the battery disabled to prevent the battery from running
 The battery should only be charged in a well-ven-
tilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Operation
flat. These functions will come back on as
The battery should only be disconnected in
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
soon as the ignition is switched on and the  Keep children away from acid and batteries!
engine started.
connected, some of the vehicle's functions
CAUTION
are “lost” (››› table on page 251). These
functions will require resetting after the bat- Winter conditions ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition
tery is reconnected. During the winter, the starting power may be is switched on or if the engine is running.

Emergencies
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should This could damage the electrical system or
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you electronic components.
be charged ››› in Battery on page 60
disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm
will be triggered.

Function Reprogramming Important safety warnings for han- Charging the battery
dling a vehicle battery
One-touch function of ››› page 126, One-touch Terminals for charging the battery are fitted

Safety
the electric windows opening and closing*. All work on batteries requires specialist in the engine compartment.
If the vehicle does not re- knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official – Note the warnings ››› in Battery on
spond to the key, they Service or a workshop specialising in batter- page 60 and ››› .
Remote control key
should be synchronised ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
››› page 122. – Switch off all electrical devices. Remove the
ignition key. »
251
 Advice

– Raise the bonnet ››› page 246. Note the vehicle may not stop on repeated occa-
– Open the battery cover. sions.
Use only the terminals in the engine compart-
ment to charge the battery. ● Make sure that the vent hose is always at-
– Connect the charger clamps as described
tached to the original opening on the side of
to the positive pole of the battery (+) and the battery. Gases or battery acid can other-
exclusively to an earth on the bodywork wise escape and possibly cause damage.
(–). Replacing the battery ● The battery holder and clamps must always
– Only use a charger which is compatible for be correctly secured.
The new battery should have the same speci-
use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. fications (amperage, load and voltage) as the ● Before starting any work on the battery, al-
The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15 used battery. ways observe the warnings listed under
V. ››› page 251, Important safety warnings for
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent handling a vehicle battery.
– Now connect the battery charger to the
power management system to control the ● Do not forget to replace the battery cover-
power socket and switch on. distribution of electrical energy ››› page 238. ings, where applicable. It is a protection for
– After charging the battery: switch off the The power management function ensures high temperatures. This in turn extends the
battery charger and disconnect the power that the battery is charged much more effi- vehicle service life.
socket cable. ciently than on vehicles without a power
management system. To maintain this func-
– Finally disconnect the charger cables from For the sake of the environment
tion after replacing the battery, we recom-
the battery.  Batteries contain toxic substances includ-
mend that the replacement battery used is of
– Replace the battery cover correctly. the same make and type as the original fitted ing sulphuric acid and lead. They must be
battery. To make proper use of the power disposed of appropriately and must not be
– Close the bonnet ››› page 246. disposed of with ordinary household waste.
management function after the battery has
Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tip
Important: Before you charge the battery been changed, have the battery coded to the
over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!
make sure you read the manufacturer's in- power management mode at a specialised
structions for using the battery charger. workshop.

WARNING CAUTION

Never charge a battery that has frozen: re- ● Some vehicles, for example those with the
place battery! Failure to do so may lead to an Start-Stop system* are fitted with a special
explosion. battery (AGM-type or EFB-type battery). If any
other type of battery is fitted, the Start-Stop
function may be considerably reduced and

252
 Wheels

Wheels driving carefully and at moderate speeds for Tyre useful life

Technical data
about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will
also increase the useful life of the tyres. Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
Wheels and tyres ing habits will increase the useful life of your
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-
tyres.
cording to the type and make of tyre and the
General notes – Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
tread pattern.
– When driving with new tyres, be especially
and also prior to any long trip.
careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). Concealed damage – The tyre pressure should only be checked

Advice
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the pressure of warm tyres.
obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
car pulling to one side, this may indicate that
possible at a right angle to the obstacle. – Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-
one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed
– Check from time to time if the tyres are
ried by the vehicle.
immediately if there is any reason to suspect
damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or that damage may have occurred. Inspect the – In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,

Operation
dents). Remove any foreign objects embed- tyres for damage. If no external damage is save the pressure of modified tyres
ded in the treads. visible, drive slowly and carefully to the near- ››› page 257, ››› page 253.
– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
est specialised workshop and have the car
– Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
placed immediately. inspected.
– Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Tyres with directional tread pattern time to time.

Emergencies
– Replace any missing valve caps as soon as An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- The useful life of your tyres depends on the
possible. rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- following factors:
– Mark the wheels before taking them off so
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
that they rotate in the same direction when when mounting the wheel. This guarantees Tyre pressure
put back. optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-
ing, excessive noise and wear. Tyre pressure values are indicated on the
– When removed, the wheels or tyres should sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

Safety
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark Retrofitting accessories Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
place. duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-
New tyres
with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice rect inflation pressures are very important,
New tyres do not give maximum grip straight
regarding current techniques. especially at high speeds. »
away and should therefore be “run in” by
253
 Advice

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as Wear indicators
be adjusted (“comfort” tyre pressure) to in- they otherwise cause excessive wear on
crease driving comfort. When driving with steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
increase slightly. or if a tyre is repaired.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according
Incorrect wheel alignment
to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi-
cle is going to carry the maximum load, the Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive
tyre pressure should be increased to maxi- tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle.
mum value indicated on the sticker on the in- If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should
side of the fuel tank flap. check wheel alignment at a SEAT Official
Service.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
Fig. 236 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators
the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
WARNING
flated to the highest pressure required for the Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is
road wheels. ● Always adapt the tyre pressure accordingly
when the vehicle load changes.
worn.
In the case of a minimised temporary spare The original tyres on your vehicle have
● A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a lot
wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” running
more when the vehicle is heavily loaded or at
a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre high speeds, therefore causing overheating across the tread. Depending on the manufac-
pressure label on the fuel tank flap. to occur. Under these conditions, the tyre turer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced at
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. equal distances around the tyre. Markings on
Driving style Risk of accident! the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard “TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions of
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre For the sake of the environment the tread wear indicators.
wear. The minimum tread depth required by law is
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption. 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next
Wheel balance to the tread wear indicators). (Different fig-
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. ures may apply in other countries.)
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.

254
 Wheels

WARNING Changing wheels – Do not use tyres whose effective size ex-

Technical data
ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap-
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when proved makes of tyre.
the tread is worn down to the tread wear indi-
cators. Failure to follow this instruction could – If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims or
result in an accident. tyres different to those installed in manu-
● Especially in difficult driving conditions facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of-
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that ficial Service before purchasing them.
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential

Advice
approximately the same on the tyres of both
the front and the rear axles. part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and
● The scant driving safety due to insufficient rims approved by SEAT are specially matched
tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle to the characteristics of the vehicle and make
handling, when there is a risk of “aquaplan- Fig. 237 Interchanging tyres. a major contribution to good roadholding
ing” in deep puddles of water and when driv- and safe handling ››› .
ing through corners, and braking is also ad- To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres

Operation
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
versely affected. the wheels should be changed round from your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-
● The speed has to be adapted accordingly, time to time according to the system mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or
otherwise there is a risk of losing control over ››› Fig. 237. The useful life of all the tyres will COC document1)). The vehicle documentation
the vehicle. then be about the same time. varies depending on the country of resi-
dence.

Emergencies
New tyres or new wheels Note for Italy: A SEAT Service Centre should
be consulted whether different sized wheels
– All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of or tyres to those originally fitted by SEAT may
the same type, size (rolling circumference) be fitted, as well as the combinations al-
and preferably the same tread pattern. lowed between the front axle (axle 1) and
back axle (axle 2).
– Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs
and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

Safety
both rear tyres together). easier to choose the correct tyres. The follow-
ing wording can be read on the sides of the
tyre: »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.

255
 Advice

205/55 R16 91V tyres rub against the bodywork, in certain serious safety risk. Risk of accident! It may
circumstances the tyres , suspension or also invalidate the vehicle's registration for
This contains the following information:
bodywork and pipes may be damaged, and use on public roads.
vehicle safety could be severely impaired ● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are
205 Tyre width in mm
››› . more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna-
55 Height/width ratio in % tive, you should drive slowly and with extra
If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT
R Tyre construction: Radial you can be sure that the actual tyre dimen- care at all times.
sions will be correct for your vehicle. If you ● If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur-
16 Rim diameter in inches chased, ensure that there is an adequate flow
decide to fit a different type of tyre, you must
obtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif- of air for cooling the brake system.
91 Load rating code
icate from the tyre retailer to confirm that
V Speed index the tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keep For the sake of the environment
this certificate in a safe place.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad- the laws in the country concerned.
part): vise you on which tyres may be fitted to your
vehicle. Note
DOT ... 2212 ...
It is best to have all servicing of wheels and ● Never mount used tyres if you are not sure
it means, for example, that the tyre was man- tyres performed by a specialised workshop. of their “previous history”.
ufactured in the 22nd week of 2012. They are familiar with the procedure and ● For technical reasons, it is not generally
But note that with some types of tyre, the ac- have the necessary special tools and spare possible to use the wheels from other vehi-
tual tyre size can differ from the nominal size parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- cles. In some cases, this may also be true for
marked on the tyre (for instance 205/55 R 16 posing of the old tyres respecting the envi- the same model of wheel.
91 W), and there may be significant differen- ronment.
ces in the contours of the tyres, even though
the tyres are marked with the same nominal WARNING
Wheel bolts
size designation. When replacing the tyres, ● It is very important to ensure that the tyres
it is therefore important to make sure that you have chosen have adequate clearance. The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.
the actual size of the new tyres does not ex- When selecting replacement tyres, do not re- When installing different wheels (for instance
ceed the dimensions of the factory-approved ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
makes of tyre. the tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif- important to use the correct wheel bolts with
fer significantly depending on the manufac-
Failure to observe this requirement can af- the right length and correctly shaped bolt
turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in
fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If the heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted
damage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing a
256
 Wheels

securely and that the brake system functions ● Never exceed the maximum permitted Tyre monitoring indicator

Technical data
correctly. speed or loads specified for the type of tyre
fitted on your vehicle. If a light appears
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-
ly. The pressure in one or more tyres has
For the sake of the environment clearly reduced in comparison to the
A special adapter is required to turn the anti- 
theft wheel bolts* ›››  page 65. Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel tyre pressure set by the driver or the
consumption and tyre wear. tyre has structural damage.
Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a text

Advice
Note message can be seen on the instrument panel display.
Tyre monitoring systems  Stop the vehicle! Reduce speed immediately! Stop
● Driving for the first time with new tyres at a
the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden
Introduction high speed can cause them to slightly ex- manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres and pressures.
pand, which could then produce an air pres- Replace any damaged tyres.
sure warning.
WARNING

Operation
● Only replace used tyres with those author-
If flashing
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi-
may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to cle.  System malfunction
tread separation or even to a blow-out. ● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys-
● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure The control lamp flashes for approximately one minute
tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensure
and then lights up permanently.
they are maintained at the pressures indica- that the tyre pressure is correct and that the If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and on
ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause

Emergencies
tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni-
overheating, resulting in tread detachment or tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the system
even burst tyres. from the tyres only when they have not checked by a specialised workshop.
● Tyre pressure should be that indicated on pierced the tyres.
the label when the tyres are cold at all times Several warning and control lamps light up
››› page 265. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
● Regularly check the cold inflation pressure ed on while the function is verified. They will
of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre switch off after a few seconds.

Safety
pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are
cold. WARNING
● Regularly check your tyres for damage and When the tyres are inflated at different pres-
wear. sures or at a pressure that is too low then a
tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of »
257
 Advice

control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too Tyre monitoring indicator
accident. low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-
● If the warning lamp  lights up, stop im- ing vehicle performance.
mediately and check the tyres. ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it does
● If the tyres are inflated at different pres- not have to be changed immediately, drive to
sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will the nearest specialised workshop at a moder-
increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi- ate speed and have the tyre checked and in-
cle stability and increasing braking distan- flated to the correct pressure.
ces.
● If tyres are inflated at different pressures or WARNING
a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam- Observe the safety warnings ››› in On the
aged and burst resulting in a loss of control instrument panel on page 47.
of the vehicle. Fig. 238 Instrument panel: warning of loss of
● The driver is responsible for ensuring that tyre pressure.
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated Note
to the right pressure. The recommended tyre ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detected The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel
pressure is indicated on the label with the ignition on, an audible warning will revolutions and, with this information, the
››› page 265. sound. In the event that there is a fault in the tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If
● The tyre monitoring system can only oper- system, an audible warning will sound. the rolling circumference of one or more
ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in-
the correct pressure when cold. time or driving in a sporty style can tempora- dicator will indicate this on the instrument
● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp panel through a warning lamp and a warning
can damage them and result in an accident. shows a fault, but disappears when road con- to the driver ››› Fig. 238. When only one spe-
Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres ditions or the driving style change. cific tyre is affected, its position within the
correspond to the vehicle load. vehicle will be indicated.
● Before starting a journey, always inflate  Loss of pressure: Check left
tyres to the correct pressure. tyre pressure!
● Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjec-
ted to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre Wheel tread change
could become excessively hot, causing tread
separation and also tyre blow-out. The wheel tread changes when:
● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed, ● Tyre pressure is manually changed
the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in
● Tyre pressure is insufficient
a loss of vehicle control.
258
 Wheels

● Tyre structure is damaged Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica- speeds the programmed values are collected

Technical data
● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a tor and monitored.
load With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
● The wheels on an axle are subject to a tyre pressure must be increased to the total
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). recommended tyre pressure before the cali-
● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains bration ››› page 265.
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted Note

Advice
● The wheel on one axle is changed ● The tyre monitoring indicator does not
function when there is a fault in the ESC or
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
ABS ››› page 178.
tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not in-
● An erroneous indication may be given when
dicate anything under certain circumstances
(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- snow chains are in use because they increase
Fig. 239 Glove compartment: tyre control the tread of the wheel.
paved roads, or when driving with snow

Operation
switch.
chains).
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-
cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for
example, when the front and rear wheels are

Emergencies
swapped.
● Switch the ignition on.
● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy
Connect system with the button  and the
function button Setup ›››  page 32 or us-
ing the switch located in the glove compart-
ment1) ››› Fig. 239.

Safety
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied

1) In vehicles without the Infotainment system:

259
 Advice

Temporary spare wheel – Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise. Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi-
– Take out the temporary spare wheel. cles with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers
General information (with subwoofer)*
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not – Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel
be used on the temporary spare wheel. (carpet) as follows:

If you have a puncture on one of the front – LEON/LEON SC model: first, pull the carpet
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- in the direction of the backrest and then
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear pull it upwards to remove it. LEON ST mod-
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel el: lift and secure the floor storage com-
that you have removed and replace the punc- partment as explained in ››› page 157.
tured front wheel with this wheel. – Disconnect the subwoofer's speaker cable.

WARNING – Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise.

Fig. 240 Compact temporary spare wheel:
● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, – Remove the subwoofer speaker and the
raised floor panel.
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. spare wheel.
The temporary spare wheel has been de- Failure to do so may cause an accident. The
– When replacing the spare wheel, place the
tyre pressures are listed on the inside of the
signed to be used for short periods of time. subwoofer speaker in the direction indica-
fuel tank flap.
Have the tyres checked, and if necessary, re- ted by the arrow and with the word
● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
placed as soon as possible at a SEAT Official “FRONT” facing forward.
Service or at a specialised workshop. when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on
the vehicle: risk of accident! – Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
Please note the following restrictions when ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and tate the securing wheel clockwise so that
using the compact temporary spare wheel. fast cornering: risk of accident! the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly
The compact temporary spare wheel is de- ● Never use more than one temporary spare
in place.
signed specifically for this model. For this wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
reason, do not use a temporary spare wheel
● No other type of tyre (normal summer or
from a different type of vehicle.
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
Removing the temporary spare wheel
● If you are driving using the spare wheel,
– Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the ACC system could automatically switch
the temporary spare wheel ››› Fig. 240. off during the journey. Switch off the system
when starting off.
260
 Wheels

Winter service ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds

Technical data
COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies de- must have an appropriate sticker attached so
pending on the country of residence. See al- that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers
Winter tyres
so ››› page 255. are available from the SEAT Official Service
– Winter tyres must be fitted on all four and specialised workshop. Please note the
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
wheels. regulations to this effect in your country.
ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
– Only use winter tyres that are approved for of 4 mm. “All-weather” tyres can also be used instead
your vehicle. of winter tyres.
The performance of winter tyres is also se-

Advice
– Please note that the maximum permissible verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is Using winter tyres with V-rating
speed for winter tyres may be lower than still much deeper than 4 mm.
Please note that the generally applicable
for summer tyres. Winter tyres are subject to the following max- 240 km/h (150 mph) speed rating for winter
– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- imum speed limits according to speed rating tyres with the letter V is subject to technical
fective when the tread is worn down. code letter: ››› restrictions; the maximum permissible

Operation
speed for your vehicle may be significantly
– After fitting the wheels you must always Speed rating lower. The maximum speed limit for these
check the tyre pressures. The correct tyre code letter Maximum speed limit tyres depends directly on the maximum axle
pressures are listed on the sticker on the ››› page 255 weights for your car and on the listed weight
inside of the fuel tank flap ››› page 253. rating of the tyres being used.
Q 160 km/h
In winter road conditions winter tyres will It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to

Emergencies
S 180 km/h check the maximum speed which is permissi-
considerably improve vehicle handling. The
design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- T 190 km/h ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice the basis of this information.
and snow. This applies particularly to vehi- H 210 km/h
cles equipped with wide section tyres or with 240 km/h (150 mph)
WARNING
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on V
(note restrictions) Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for
the sidewall). the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause
W 270 km/h

Safety
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these Y 300 km/h the vehicle – risk of accident. »
tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-

1) COC = certificate of conformity.

261
 Advice

For the sake of the environment

Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon
as possible after the winter period; they give
better handling on roads which are free of
snow and ice. Summer tyres perform with
less rolling noise, tyre wear and – most im-
portant – reduce fuel consumption.

262
 Technical specifications

Technical data Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi- Vehicle identification data

Technical data
cations section

Ab- Meaning
Technical specifications brevia-
tion
Important
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
The information in the vehicle documentation
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used to
always takes precedence over the informa- PS

Advice
denote engine power.
tion in this Instruction Manual.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-
l/100 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70
ded in the Maintenance Programme or the
km miles).

Operation
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle. g/km
Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km
(mile) travelled.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for CO2 Carbon dioxide
different models, for special vehicles and for Fig. 241 Vehicle data sticker (boot).
Cetane number, indication of the diesel com-
other countries. CN

Emergencies
bustion power.

Research octane number, indication of the

RON
knock resistance of petrol.

Safety
Fig. 242 Chassis number. »

263
 Technical data

VIN in the Easy Connect 2 Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine Vehicle fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
– Select: Function button CAR > control but- type, finish, engine power and gearbox appear on the vehicle data sticker in the
ton (Car)* Systems > Service & Con- type spare wheel well, inside the boot and on the
trol > Chassis number. 3 Engine code, gearbox code, external rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
paint code and internal equipment code The fuel consumption and CO2 emission val-
Chassis number
4 Optional extras and PR numbers ues refer to the weight category assigned to
The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the your vehicle according to the engine and
5 Consumption (l/100 km) and CO2 emis-
vehicle data sticker and under the wind- gearbox combination, as well as the specific
sions (g/km)
screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 242. Addi- equipment fitted, and is only used to com-
tionally, the chassis number is located in the A Urban cycle consumption pare between the different models.
engine compartment, on the right-hand side. B Out-of-town consumption
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions do
The number is engraved on the top side rail, C Combined consumption and CO2 not depend only on the performance of the
and is partially covered. emissions vehicle, they can also differ from the estab-
lished values depending on other factors
Type plate Identifying letters such as driving style, road conditions, traffic
The type plate is located on the right side The identifying letters of the engine can be conditions, environmental conditions, load
door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun- viewed on the instrument panel when the en- and number of passengers.
tries do not have a type plate. gine is switched off and the ignition is on.
Calculation of fuel consumption
Vehicle data sticker ● Hold down the 0.0/SET 4 ››› Fig. 124 but- The consumption values have been calcula-
The vehicle data sticker is under the carpet ton for more than 15 seconds.
ted based on measurements performed or
trim in the luggage compartment, in the supervised by certified CE laboratories ac-
spare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicle cording to the latest version of directives
data is attached to the inside cover of the Information on fuel consump- 715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more in-
Maintenance Programme. formation consult the European Union Publi-
tion cations Office at EUR-Lex: © European Union,
The following information is provided on the
vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 241 http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and
Fuel consumption are valid for the kerb weight indicated for the
1 Vehicle identification number (chassis vehicle.
number) The consumption and emission details
shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from
one vehicle to another.

264
 Technical specifications

Note Driving with a trailer WARNING

Technical data
In practice, and considering all the factors ● For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80
mentioned here, consumption values can dif- Trailer weights km/h (50 mph) limit. This is also valid in
fer from those calculated in the current Euro- countries where higher speeds are permitted.
pean regulations. Trailer weight ● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle
proved are selected in intensive trials accord- load or the permissible total weight is excee-
Weights ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle

Advice
proved trailer weights apply to vehicles in the may change, leading to accidents, injuries
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a EU and generally for maximum speeds of 80 and damage to the vehicle.
fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without km/h (100 km/h in certain circumstances).
optional extras. The figure quoted includes The figures may be different in other coun-
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. tries. All data in the official vehicle documen-
tation takes precedence over these data at all
Wheels
Special versions, optional equipment fittings

Operation
times ››› .
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel
weight of the vehicle ››› . bolts
Drawbar loads
WARNING The maximum permitted drawbar load on the Tyre pressures
● Please note that the centre of gravity may ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-
ceed 80 kg. The sticker with the tyre pressure values can

Emergencies
shift when transporting heavy objects; this be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- In the interest of road safety, we recommend The tyre pressure values given there are for
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving that you always tow approaching the maxi- cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of
style to suit road conditions and require-
ments.
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- warm tyres must not be reduced. ›››
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating load is too small. The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar
or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer
missible axle load or the permissible total If the maximum permissible drawbar load tyres.

Safety
weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
tics of the vehicle may change, which could light-weight single axle trailers or tandem Snow chains
lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
vehicle. Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
wheels, and only for the following tyres: »
load.
265
 Technical data

195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm Note

205/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm We recommend that you ask your Technical
Service for information about appropriate
205/50 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
225/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

225/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

225/35 R19 Chains with links of maximum 7 mm

205/55 R17 Snow chains are not permitted

225/45 R18 Snow chains are not permitted

Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the
tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel
and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-
portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
low, there is an increased danger of accidents
- particularly at high speeds.
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.

266
 Technical specifications

Engine data

Technical data
Petrol engine 1.2 63 kW (86 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
63 (86)/4,300-5,300 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Advice
Performance LEON LEON SC LEON ST
Top speed (km/h) 178 (V) 178 (V) 178 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.5 7.8

Operation
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 11.8 12.1

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,700 1,700 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,188 1,168 1,233

Emergencies
Gross front axle weight 880 880 880

Gross rear axle weight 870 870 970

Permitted roof load 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 590 580 610

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,300 1,300 1,300

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,100 1,100 1,100

267
 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
81 (110)/4,600-5,600 175/1,400-4,000 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Performance
Manual Start-Stop Automatic Manual Start-Stop Automatic Manual Start-Stop Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (VI) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.7 6.7 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.7 9.7 9.7 10.1 10.1 10.1

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,740 1,740 1,760 1,710 1,720 1,750 1,790 1,800 1,820

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,206 1,213 1,241 1,186 1,193 1,221 1,240 1,247 1,275

Gross front axle weight 890 900 930 880 890 920 880 890 920

Gross rear axle weight 900 890 880 880 880 880 960 960 950

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 600 600 620 590 590 610 610 620 630

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300

268
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST

Performance
manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 190 (IV) a) 190 (IV) a) 190 (IV) a)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 7.4 6.6 7.3 6.7 7.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.5 11.4 10.3 11.2 10.5 11.4

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,740 1,770 1,710 1,730 1,790 1,830

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,192 1,230 1,175 1,210 1,228 1,275

Gross front axle weight 880 920 880 910 870 910

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 910 900 880 870 970 970

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 590 610 580 600 610 630

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

269
 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Performance LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 198 198 198

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) a)

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,720 1,710 1,770

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,202 1,180 1,236

Gross front axle weight 890 880 880

Gross rear axle weight 880 880 940

Permitted roof load 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 600 590 610

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,300 1,300 1,300

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000 1,000

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

270
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) Start-Stop

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
92 (125)/5,000-6,000 200/1,400-4,000 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON ST
Performance LEON LEON SC LEON ST
X-PERIENCE

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 202 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1 6.4 6.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.1 8.9 9.4 9.6

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,770 1,750 1,830 1,870

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,233 1,213 1,257 1,293

Gross front axle weight 910 910 910 a)

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 910 890 970 a)

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 610 600 620 630

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

271
 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 hp) ACT®

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST

Performance
manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic
Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 7.9 7.9

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,770 1,840 1,860

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,243 1,277 1,297

Gross front axle weight 920 940 910 930 910 930

Gross rear axle weight 900 900 890 890 980 980

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 620 630 610 620 630 640

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

272
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST

Performance
manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.6 5.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8 8

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,760 1,840 1,860

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,238 1,277 1,297

Gross front axle weight 920 940 910 930 910 930

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 900 900 890 880 980 980

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 620 630 610 620 630 640

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

273
 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.8 132 kW (180 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
132 (180)/5,100-6,200 250/1,250-5,000 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON SC LEON ST

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST
Performance Without Without Without
Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Automatic
Start-Stop Start-Stop Start-Stop
Top speed (km/h) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.2 5.2 5.7 5.6 5.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.2 7.2 7.4 7.1 7.1 7.8 7.7 7.2

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,830 1,850 1,850 1,830 1,840 1,840 1,900 1,890 1,910

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,310 1,327 1,322 1,290 1,307 1,302 1,355 1,372 1,367

Gross front axle weight 960 980 980 960 980 980 960 970 980

Gross rear axle weight 920 920 920 920 910 910 990 970 980

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 650 660 660 640 650 650 670 680 680

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

274
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.8 TSI 132 kW (180 hp) All-wheel drive

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
132 (180)/4,500-6,200 280/1,350-4,500 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

LEON ST
Performance
X-PERIENCE 4WD

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 221 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.2

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,040

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,486

Gross front axle weight 1,000

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 1,090

Permitted roof load 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,700

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500

275
 Technical data

Petrol engine 2.0 195 kW (265 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
195 (265)/5,350-6,600 350/1,700-5,300 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Performance LEON LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST
manual automatic automat- manual automatic automat- manual automatic automat-
ica) ica) ica)
Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.7 4.4 4.4 4.6 4.4 4.4 4.8 4.5 4.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 6.0 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.8 5.8 6.2 6.1 6.1

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,890 1,910 1,910 1,870 1,890 1,890 1,970 2,000 2,000

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,395 1,421 1,421 1,375 1,395 1,395 1,440 1,466 1,466

Gross front axle weight 1,020 1,050 1,050 1,010 1,040 1,030 1,020 1,040 1,040

Gross rear axle weight 920 910 910 910 900 900 1,000 1,010 1,010

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes – – – – – – – – –

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% – – – – – – – – –

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% – – – – – – – – –

a) Intended for warm countries with bad roads.

276
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 2.0 206 kW (280 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
206 (280)/5,600-6,500 350/1,700-5,600 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Performance LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST

manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.7 4.5 4.6 4.3 4.8 4.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 5.9 5.8 5.8 5.7 6.1 6.0

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,890 1,910 1,870 1,890 1,980 2,000

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,395 1,421 1,375 1,395 1,440 1,466

Gross front axle weight 1,020 1,050 1,010 1,040 1,020 1,040

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 920 910 910 900 1,010 1,010

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes – – – – – –

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% – – – – – –

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% – – – – – –

277
 Technical data

Petrol/CNG engine 1.4 TSI 81 kW (110 hp)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Super 95 RON/Nor-
81 (110)/4,800-6,000 200/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 CNG
mal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Performance LEON LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9 11

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,840 1,900

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,359 1,395

Gross front axle weight 910 900

Gross rear axle weight 980 1,050

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 670 690

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,700 1,700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400

278
 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 1.6 66 kW (90 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
66 (90)/2,750-4,800 230/1,400-2,750 4/1,598
51 CN

Performance LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 178 (IV) 178 (IV) 178 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.2 8.0 8.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.6 12.4 13.0

Weights (in kg)

Operation
Gross vehicle weight 1,800 1,780 1,880

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,281 1,261 1,326

Gross front axle weight 970 970 970

Gross rear axle weight 880 860 960

Emergencies
Permitted roof load 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 640 630 660

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,700 1,700 1,700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400 1,400

Safety
279
 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
77 (105)/3,000-4,000 250/1,750-2,750 4/1,598
51 CN

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Performance
Manual Automatic Manual Manual
Top speed (km/h) 191 (V) 191 (VI) 191 (V) 191 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3 7.2 7.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.7 10.6 11.1

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,800 1,820 1,770 1,880

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,281 1,306 1,261 1,326

Gross front axle weight 970 990 970 970

Gross rear axle weight 880 880 850 960

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 640 650 630 660

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

280
 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 1.6 81 kW (110 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
81 (110)/3,200-4,000 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,598
51 CN

LEON LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON SC

Performance
Start-Stop Ecomotive Ecomotivea) Start-Stop Ecomotive Ecomotivea)

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 199 (V) 200 (V) 194 (V) 199 (V) 200 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7 7 7.3 6.9 6.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.5 10.5 10.7 10.4 10.4

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,810 1,780 1,750 1,780 1,770 1,730

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,260 1,260 1,260 1,240 1,240 1,240

Gross front axle weight 970 970 960 970 970 950

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 890 860 840 860 850 830

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 630 630 630 620 620 620

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,800 1,300 1,300 1,800 1,300 1,300

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,000 1,000 1,500 1,000 1,000
a) Valid for the market: The Netherlands.

281
 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
81 (110)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,598
51 CN

LEON ST LEON ST
LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST
Performance X-PERIENCE X-PERIENCE
Start-Stop Ecomotive Ecomotivea) All-wheel drive
Start-Stop 4WD
Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 199 (V) 200 (V) 190 (VI) 191 (V) 187 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.1 7.1 7.5 7.5 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.1 10.6 10.6 12 11.1 11.6

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,870 1,810 1,810 2,010 1,900 2,030

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,305 1,280 1,280 1,455 1,355 1,472

Gross front axle weight 970 940 940 1,000 b) 1,000

Gross rear axle weight 950 920 920 1,060 b) 1,080

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 650 640 640 720 660 730

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,800 1,300 1,300 1,900 1,800 1,900

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,000 1,000 1,700 1,500 1,700
a) Valid for the market: The Netherlands.
b) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

282
 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
105 (143)/3,500-4,000 320/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
51 CN

Performance LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 211 (V) 211 (V) 211 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1 6.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.7 8.6 9.0

Weights (in kg)

Operation
Gross vehicle weight 1,830 1,800 1,910

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,301 1,281 1,353

Gross front axle weight 990 990 990

Gross rear axle weight 890 860 970

Emergencies
Permitted roof load 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 650 640 670

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,800 1,800 1,800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,600 1,600 1,600

Safety
283
 Technical data

Diesel engine 2.0 110 kW (150 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
110 (150)/3,500-4,000 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
51 CN

LEON LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST

Performance
Manual Start-Stop Automatic Manual Start-Stop Automatic Manual Start-Stop Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 215 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 215 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (sec-

6.1 6.1 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.2 6.2 6.2
onds)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

8.4 8.4 8.4 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.6 8.6 8.6
onds)

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,800 1,820 1,850 1,800 1,810 1,810 1,910 1,910 1,940

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,300 1,305 1,335 1,280 1,285 1,305 1,345 1,358 1,388

Gross front axle weight 1,000 990 1,020 990 990 1,010 990 1,000 1,030

Gross rear axle weight 850 880 880 860 870 850 970 960 960

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 650 650 660 640 640 650 670 670 690

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to

1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800
8%

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to

1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600
12%

284
 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 110 kW (150 HP) All-Wheel Drive

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
110 (150)/3,500-4,000 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
51 CN

LEON ST
Performance LEON ST
X-PERIENCE 4WD

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 211 (VI) 208 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.7 8.7

Operation
Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,040 2,050

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,474 1,491

Gross front axle weight 1,020 1,020

Emergencies
Gross rear axle weight 1,070 1,080

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 730 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,900 2,000

Safety
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,700 2,000

285
 Technical data

Diesel engine 2.0 135 kW (184 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
135 (184)/3,500-4,000 380/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
51 CN

Performance LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST

Start-Stop Automatic Start-Stop Automatic Start-Stop Automatic X-PERIENCE
4WD
Top speed (km/h) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (sec-

5.7 5.7 5.6 5.6 5.9 5.9 4.9
onds)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

7.5 7.5 7.4 7.4 7.8 7.8 7.1
onds)

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,880 1,900 1,860 1,890 1,970 1,990 2,080

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,370 1,390 1,350 1,370 1,415 1,435 1,529

Gross front axle weight 1,020 1,040 1,020 1,040 1,020 1,040 1,060

Gross rear axle weight 910 910 890 900 1,000 1,000 1,070

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 680 690 670 680 700 710 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to

1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 2,000
8%

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to

1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 2,000
12%

286
 Technical specifications

Dimensions

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 243 Dimensions

Operation
LEON LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST X-PERIENCE
A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 853/774 853/774 853/1,046 853/1,060

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,601 2,636 2,630

Emergencies
D Length (mm) 4,263 4,228 4,535 4,543

1,533/1,504 1,541/1,505
E/F Front/reara) track width (mm)
1,549/1,520 1,547/1,510

G Width (mm) 1,816 1,810 1,816 1,816

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,459 1,446 1,451b) 1,478b)

Safety
Turning radius (m) 10.9
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b) Dimension to the roof bars.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

огромный архив документации по автомобилям Volkswagen, Skoda, Seat, Audi 287
 Index

Index description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Assistance systems
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
A head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
ABS Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Air conditioning Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 159 traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 229 User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Assistance Systems
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 All-wheel drive Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Audible signal
Adaptive Cruise Control Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Audible warning signal
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro- Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 89 warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 89 Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjusting the head restraints Anti-puncture Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Automatic gear
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Anti-Puncture Kit Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Adjustment Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Anti-puncture Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 140 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 122 downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys- driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 140 tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Anti-theft alarm system launch control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Air-conditioning trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 see also Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . 117 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
manual air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . 11, 117, 120 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Steering wheel with gearshift paddles . . . . . . 169
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Aspects to take into account before starting the tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 169
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 83 ASR
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 B
deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
289
 Index

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 88

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 87
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Blown bulbs Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27, 28
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 245 Changing Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 rear light bulb on the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 rear light bulbs on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Rear light on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Braking Changing bulbs plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 front fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Moving off on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Changing gear seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
C engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 166 trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Camera Changing main headlight bulbs washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Changing settings windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Changing the main beam headlight bulb Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Capacity Changing the main headlight bulb Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
natural gas fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 day light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 dipped headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Checking levels Controls and displays
Central locking engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Child-proof locking Controls on the steering wheel
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Operating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Child seat operating the audio system and telephone . . 115
Manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

290
 Index

Convenience closing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 226, 265
Convenience opening refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 227
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Driving abroad
Coolant Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Direction of rotation Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205
cooling system tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205
checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107 Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Cooling system Display of traffic signs on the instrument panel Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cornering Disposal Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Distance control
Correct sitting position see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 E
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 E10
rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 184 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 112
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 EDL
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Doors see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Efficiency programme
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
D Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Electrical accessories
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Electrical socket
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 21 Driver trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 73, 74, 75 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 125
Detachable ball Driver information system convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 126
Assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 CD/radio indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . 35 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223 Driving Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Diesel economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

291
 Index

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Extending

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 173 G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 exterior lighting
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Exterior mirrors
emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Engine fault adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Exterior rear view mirrors
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Engine management exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 246 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8
puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 248 External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Emergency operation maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fog-light bulb
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 FR version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Engine Environment Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Front Assist
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Environmental tips City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
starting up (driver messages with the mechan- Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 229 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ESC radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 245 Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 251 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 see also Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . 195
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 250 Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Front Assist monitoring system
closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Exhaust gas filtration system malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 249 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 248 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Exhaust pipe: Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 60, 250
292
 Index

Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 199
G Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Gas front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Front Assist Monitoring System fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Gearbox DSG Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Front passenger front airbag Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54
deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 86 automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Front seat Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 242 Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 169
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 General instrument panel
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
I
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 163
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 163
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fuel consumption Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Indication on display
Switching off using inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fuel tank cap H traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Indications on the
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fuel tank flap warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Function Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 80 compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Head-protection airbags distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 94 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Headlights engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
293
 Index

second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 167 data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 K Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Keys Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 38 Assign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Indications on the screen car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . . . . 164 light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 lighting of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 119 main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Kick-down Motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Knee airbags side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Light switch
warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 L Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Load compartment in the luggage compartment
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Interior rear vision mirror see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 148
cleaning the camera area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Lane Assist system
Interior view Loading the vehicle
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Launch control programme (automatic gearbox) 171
right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Leather: care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27 tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 153
Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Locking and unlocking
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
J Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 89 with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 129
audible signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
294
 Index

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 One-touch opening and closing

automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Moving off Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 156 Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 152 N Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 241
retractable rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 244 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
see also Loading the luggage compartment . 148 smell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . . 156 Natural leather in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Luggage net cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 12
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Navigation system windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
M Net bag Opening manually
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 152 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Main panel Noises
Turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . 129 Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 P
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Make-up mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
malfunction refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 253 Paintwork
Malfunction Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Panoramic sliding sunroof
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 O closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
front assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manual air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 126
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manual gear change total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 170
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 On-screen messages
Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
295
 Index

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Rear lights on the rear lid
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Power steering change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parking Aid Pre-heating system Rear lights on the side panel
adjusting the display and audible warnings . 215 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Rear seat
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Progressive steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . . 143
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Puncture Rear seat backrest
sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . . . 144
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 R lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Parking aid system Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rear seat passengers
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 197 see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 73, 74, 75
Parking distance control Radio-operated remote control Rear shelf
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Radio display: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
ParkPilot Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Rear view mirror
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Particulate filter (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Rear view mirrors
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 adjusting the exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . 139
Passenger Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 73, 74, 75 instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 interior anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Passenger door manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Refuelling
Passenger seat backrest screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 gas gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13 opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Petrol see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Remote control key
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Rear light bulbs on the rear lid unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 fitting the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Removing and installing head restraints . . . . . . 140
Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 234 removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Rear light bulbs on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Positioning seat belts removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 replacing the battery
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Rear light on the side panel of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 removing the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Rear lights Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Retractable rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

296
 Index

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107 Safety notes Sitting position

Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rims Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Sliding panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Saving fuel Smell of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Roll-back function inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 265
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 41 all-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Seat Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 electric seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Seat belt position Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Roof luggage rack Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 81 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 182
Running-in control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 The engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Running in purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 83 The engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 82 Steering
S SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Safelock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 engaging the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
see also Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . 117 Seats Steering wheel
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 169
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 21 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Storage area
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Safety information positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Safety instructions Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Side airbags Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 136
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 87 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

297
 Index

Switch Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 153
Switching off the engine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Trim parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Trims
Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Towline anchorage Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 28, 163 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 129
System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 89 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
T Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . . . 153 Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Tyre Mobility Set
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Tyre Mobility System
interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Technical data windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Traffic Sign Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Tyre monitoring systems
roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Traffic signs Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 display on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Tightening torques of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 226 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 167, 169 parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27, 28 tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27 Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Transporting items useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 66
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Towing bracket Transporting objects Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

298
 Index

U W Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 265

chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 81 Warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . 46, 110 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 66
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 197 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Upholstery: cleaning ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Cruise control system GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Windows
V electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Vehicle engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 111 removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 windscreen and rear window wiper blades
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 251 instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 91
charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 136
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 of the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Windscreen washer water
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Warning symbols Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 see Warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . 110 Window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Vehicle care Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 tems
windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 70 Wheel service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 124 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
299
 Index

Winter conditions
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Defrosting the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Winter operation
Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
all-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

300
About this manual ® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
Note

not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
This manual contains a description of the nal information.
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the >> The section is continued on the follow-
time this manual was published. Some of the ing page.
This manual is divided into six large parts,
units described herein will not be available
Important warnings on a given page which are:
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets. 1. The essentials
Detailed contents on a given page
Because this is a general manual for the IBIZA 2. Safety
range, some of the equipment and functions General information on a given page 3. Emergencies
that are described in this manual are not in-
4. Operation
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Emergency information on a given page
they may vary or be modified depending on 5. Tips
the technical requirements and on the mar- 6. Technical data
WARNING
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
The illustrations are intended as a general Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted find the information you require.
ble dangers of accident or injury.
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
CAUTION
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
The equipment marked with an aster- All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain For the sake of the environment
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
tional extras for some versions, or are vant information concerning environmental
protection. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
only offered in certain countries.
All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.15
Inglés 5F0012720BD (05.15) (GT9)

5F0012720BD

­­
Leon Inglés (05.15)
Leon
MANUAL
OWNER’S